Bizhub Pro 1050e

1050/1050e
Operator Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Table of Contents
1
Safety Information
1.1
1.1.1
Warning and Precaution Symbols .................................................. 1-3
1.1.2
Meaning of Symbols ...................................................................... 1-3
1.2
Safety Information ............................................................................ 1-3
Regulation Notices ......................................................................... 1-10
1.2.1
Laser Safety ................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.2
Ozone Release ............................................................................. 1-12
1.2.3
Electromagnetic Interference ....................................................... 1-12
1.2.4
For European Users ..................................................................... 1-12
1.2.5
For German Users ........................................................................ 1-12
1.3
Caution Labels and Indicators ...................................................... 1-13
1.4
Installation Space ........................................................................... 1-15
Preparation for Use

2.1
Machine Configuration ..................................................................... 2-3
2.1.1
External Machine Items .................................................................. 2-3
2.1.2
Internal Machine Items ................................................................... 2-5
2.1.3
Control Panel Layout ..................................................................... 2-6
2.1.4
Folding Unit FD-501 ....................................................................... 2-8
2.1.5
Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502 ...................................... 2-11
2.1.6
Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ............................................................... 2-13
2.1.7
Perfect Binder PB-501 ................................................................. 2-16
2.1.8
Finisher FS-503 ............................................................................ 2-19
2.1.9
Standard/Optional Equipment ..................................................... 2-20
2.2
Turning On/Off the Power Switch ................................................. 2-23
2.2.1
To Turn On the Power .................................................................. 2-23
2.2.2
To Turn Off the Power .................................................................. 2-25
bizhub PRO 1050/1050e

x-1
2.3
2.3.1
Auto Low Power ...........................................................................2-27
2.3.2
Auto Shut-Off ................................................................................2-27
2.3.3
Using Power Save Manually .........................................................2-28
2.3.4
When Weekly Timer Is Activated ..................................................2-30
2.4
Making User Authentication ...........................................................2-33
Paper and Original Information

3.1
Paper Information ..............................................................................3-3
3.1.1
Paper Weight ..................................................................................3-3
3.1.2
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity ..................................................................3-5
3.1.3
Paper Size .......................................................................................3-8
3.1.4
To Store Copy Paper ......................................................................3-9
3.2
To Use Machine When Power Save LED Lights ...........................2-26
Original Information ........................................................................3-10
3.2.1
Using Original Glass .....................................................................3-10
3.2.2
ADF Originals ................................................................................3-12
Supplies & Handling

4.1
Loading Paper ....................................................................................4-3
4.1.1
Loading Paper in Main Body Trays and Paper Feeder Unit Trays ..4-4
4.1.2
Loading Cover Paper in Cover Feeding Tray of

Perfect Binder PB-501 ....................................................................4-8
4.1.3
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray ....................................................4-11
4.2
Adding Toner ...................................................................................4-14
4.3
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into Finisher FS-503 ................4-17
4.4
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ..4-20
4.5
Adding Paste Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-501 ............................4-22
4.6
Empty Trash Basket of Folding Unit FD-501 .................................4-25
4.7
Empty Dust Box of Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ..................................4-27
4.8
Empty Dust Box of Perfect Binder PB-501 ....................................4-29
4.9
Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker

LS-501/502 .......................................................................................4-31
x-2
Before Making Copies

5.1
5.1.1
Machine Status Screen .................................................................. 5-5
5.2
Features of the bizhub PRO 1050/1050e ........................................ 5-7
5.3
How to Make a Basic Copy ............................................................ 5-12
5.4
Positioning Originals ...................................................................... 5-16
5.4.1
Positioning Originals in ADF ......................................................... 5-16
5.4.2
Positioning Original on Original Glass .......................................... 5-19
5.5
Copy Screen ...................................................................................... 5-3
Setting Print Quantity ..................................................................... 5-20
5.5.1
To Set Print Quantity .................................................................... 5-20
5.5.2
To Change Print Quantity ............................................................. 5-21
5.6
Setting Job During Warm-up ......................................................... 5-22
5.7
To Stop Scanning/Printing ............................................................. 5-25
Basic Job Settings

6.1
Copy Conditions Incompatible with Basic Settings ...................... 6-3
6.2
Function Key ..................................................................................... 6-8
6.3
Original Setting ............................................................................... 6-10
6.3.1
Specifying Original Direction ........................................................ 6-10
6.3.2
Selecting Binding Direction of Originals ...................................... 6-12
6.3.3
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) ............................ 6-14
6.3.4
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded) ....................................... 6-16
6.3.5
Feeding Single Original from ADF (Single Feed) .......................... 6-18
6.3.6
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals

(Custom Size / Tab Paper) ........................................................... 6-21
6.4
Memory Scan Mode ....................................................................... 6-24
6.5
Special Image .................................................................................. 6-26
6.5.1
Selecting Exposure Level and Adjusting Background Whiteness 6-26
6.5.2
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) . 6-30
6.6
Zoom ................................................................................................ 6-32
6.6.1
To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode ......................................... 6-32
6.6.2
To Change Magnification Ratio .................................................... 6-33
6.7
6.7.1
Copy Mode ...................................................................................... 6-37

Making Double-Sided Copies Using ADF .................................... 6-37

x-3
6.8
6.8.1
6.9
Making Double-Sided Copies Using Original Glass .....................6-40

Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals ..........6-44
Paper Tray Setting ...........................................................................6-46
6.9.1
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) ....................................6-47
6.9.2
To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) ...........................................6-49
6.9.3
Rotation ........................................................................................6-51
6.9.4
Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper Presetting) .........6-53
6.10
Reserve Job Setting ........................................................................6-64
Job Management
7.1
Overview of Job List Screen .............................................................7-3
7.2
Job Operation on Job List Screen ...................................................7-4
7.2.1
To Check/Control Reserved Jobs ..................................................7-4
7.2.2
To Display Output History ...............................................................7-6
7.2.3
To Display Send History .................................................................7-7
7.2.4
To Check Incomplete Jobs .............................................................7-8
7.2.5
To Check/Operate Suspended Jobs ..............................................7-9
7.2.6
To Check/Control Spool Jobs ......................................................7-11
Applications
8.1
Copy Conditions Incompatible with Applications ..........................8-3
8.2
To Use Application Function ............................................................8-8
8.3
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet Insertion) .............................8-10
8.4
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) ........................8-17
8.5
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) ...............8-20
8.6
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) ..................8-23
8.7
Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave) .......................8-26
8.8
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) ........................8-29
8.9
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) .........8-33
8.10
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job

(Program Job) ..................................................................................8-39
8.11
Erasing Outside of the Original (No Image Area Erase) ...............8-42
8.12
Reversing Colour in Black and White Image

(Neg. Pos. Reverse) .........................................................................8-45
8.13
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) .....8-47
x-4
8.14
Repeat Automatically or Select Repeat Times

(Repeat: Auto Detect/ Repeat Mode) ............................................ 8-50
8.15
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders

(Frame/Fold Erase) ......................................................................... 8-54
8.16
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper

(Image Centering) ........................................................................... 8-58
8.17
Printing Images Fully to the Edges (All-Image Area) ................... 8-60
8.18
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) .......................... 8-61
8.19
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) ..... 8-66
8.20
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) .............. 8-69
8.21
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) .................................... 8-78
8.22
Print Words, Date/Time, Annotation Number onto Copies

(Annotation) ..................................................................................... 8-81
8.23
Overlay an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) . 8-86
8.24
Store Image in HDD / Overlay Stored Image

(Overlay Memory) ............................................................................ 8-89
Setting Output Methods

9.1
Copy Conditions Incompatible with Output Modes ...................... 9-3
9.2
Selecting an Output Tray ................................................................. 9-8
9.3
Setting Binding Direction for Duplex Copies ............................... 9-13
9.4
Using Finisher FS-503 .................................................................... 9-15
9.4.1
Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated Output to the

Primary (Main) Tray ...................................................................... 9-17
9.4.2
Stapling Output to the Primary (Main) Tray .................................. 9-19
9.4.3
Collated / Uncollated Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray ......... 9-22
9.5
Using Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502 ............................ 9-25
9.6
Using Folding Unit FD-501 ............................................................. 9-28
9.6.1
Punching File Holes in Copies ..................................................... 9-29
9.6.2
Folding Copies ............................................................................. 9-32
9.7
Using Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ....................................................... 9-34
9.7.1
Making Folded Booklet ................................................................ 9-34
9.7.2
Folding Copied Set ...................................................................... 9-38
9.8
Using Post Inserter on Folding Unit FD-501 ................................. 9-42
9.9
Using Folder/Finisher Functions Manually ................................... 9-46
9.10
Using Perfect Binder PB-501 ......................................................... 9-50

x-5
9.11
Using Two Copiers in Tandem .......................................................9-67
9.11.1
To Stop Scanning/Printing ............................................................9-73
9.11.2
Troubleshooting ............................................................................9-74
10 Advanced Information
10.1
Checking Feature Selections by Proof Copying ...........................10-3
10.2
Checking Feature Selections Before Copying (Check Mode) .....10-5
10.3
Interrupt Copying ............................................................................10-9
10.4
Storing and Recalling Job Conditions (Mode Memory) .............10-11
10.4.1
Storing Job Conditions ...............................................................10-11
10.4.2
Recalling Stored Job Settings ....................................................10-15
10.5
Recalling Previous Job Settings ..................................................10-17
10.6
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) .................10-19
10.6.1
10.7
To Display Help Screen ..............................................................10-20

Adjusting Response Time of Touch Keys (Accessibility) ...........10-22
11 Machine Status Screen Setting

11.1
Machine Status Screen Setting Outlines .......................................11-3
12 Paper Setting
12.1
Paper Setting Outlines ....................................................................12-3
12.1.1
Setting Items in Paper Setting ......................................................12-3
12.1.2
Recommended Setting of Paper Type/Weight ...........................12-10
12.2
Register Paper Type/Weight ........................................................12-11
12.3
Delete Paper Type/Weight ............................................................12-17
12.4
Set Paper Size, Conditions, Air Assist Function for a Tray .......12-19
12.5
Change Paper Type/Weight Specified for a Tray .......................12-29
13 Adjustment
13.1
Machine Adjustment Outlines ........................................................13-3
13.2
01 Magnification Adjustment ..........................................................13-4
13.3
02 Timing Adjustment ...................................................................13-13
13.4
03 Centering Adjustment ..............................................................13-22
13.5
Finisher Adjustment Outlines .......................................................13-24
13.6
01 Stapler Position Adjustment ....................................................13-25
x-6
13.7
02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment ............................................ 13-31
13.8
03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment ............................................... 13-36
13.9
04 Stacker Adjustment ................................................................. 13-53
13.10 05 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment .................................................... 13-57

13.11 06 Perfect Binder Adjustment ..................................................... 13-76
13.12 07 Trimmer Count Adjustment .................................................. 13-105
14 Controller Setting
14.1
Function Overview .......................................................................... 14-3
14.2
01 Report Type ................................................................................ 14-8
14.3
02 Printer Setting .......................................................................... 14-10
14.4
03 Select Printer Setting .............................................................. 14-17
14.5
04 Spool ......................................................................................... 14-19
14.6
05 Interface Setting ...................................................................... 14-20
15 Utility Screen Settings

15.1
Utility Screen Setting Outlines ...................................................... 15-3
16 User Setting
16.1
01 System Setting ........................................................................... 16-3
16.1.1
01 Language Setting .................................................................... 16-3
16.1.2
02 Buzzer Setting ......................................................................... 16-4
16.1.3
03 1SHOT Indication Time ........................................................... 16-8
16.1.4
04 Default Screen Setting ............................................................ 16-9
16.1.5
05 Auto Reset Setting ................................................................ 16-10
16.1.6
06 Key Response Time .............................................................. 16-11
16.1.7
07 Change User Password ........................................................ 16-12
16.1.8
08 Function Key Setting ............................................................. 16-14
16.2
02 Function Setting ....................................................................... 16-17
16.2.1
01 Feed Tray Setting .................................................................. 16-17
16.2.2
02 ATS Permit ............................................................................ 16-19
16.2.3
03 Auto Paper Type ................................................................... 16-21
16.2.4
02 Each Function Setting ........................................................... 16-23
16.2.5
03 Density Setting ...................................................................... 16-25
16.2.6
03 Photo Mode Density Setting ................................................. 16-29

x-7
16.2.7
04 Image Density Selection ........................................................16-31
16.2.8
04 Preset Zoom ..........................................................................16-33
16.2.9
05 Tandem Setting ......................................................................16-34
16.2.10
06 User Paper Selection .............................................................16-38
16.3
03 Copy Setting .............................................................................16-39
16.3.1
01 Reset Setting .........................................................................16-39
16.3.2
02 Each Function Setting ............................................................16-46
16.4
04 Scanner Setting ........................................................................16-49
16.4.1
01 Default Address Setting .........................................................16-49
16.4.2
02 Each Function Setting ............................................................16-51
16.5
05 Touch Screen Adjustment .......................................................16-53
17 Machine Manager Setting

17.1
Machine Manager Setting Outlines ...............................................17-3
17.2
01 System Setting ............................................................................17-6
17.2.1
01 Power Save Setting .................................................................17-6
17.2.2
02 Time and Date Setting .............................................................17-8
17.2.3
03 Weekly Timer Setting .............................................................17-10
17.2.4
04 Management List Print ...........................................................17-22
17.2.5
05 Operation Prohibit Set ...........................................................17-26
17.2.6
06 Expert Adjustment .................................................................17-29
17.2.7
07 Size Setting ............................................................................17-35
17.2.8
08 Annotation Setting .................................................................17-36
17.2.9
09 Perfect Binding Setting ..........................................................17-43
17.3
17.3.1
17.4
02 Manager/Machine Register .....................................................17-49

01 Machine Manager Register ....................................................17-49
03 Use Auth./Volume Track ..........................................................17-51
17.4.1
01 Authentication Method ..........................................................17-51
17.4.2
02 Volume Track .........................................................................17-56
17.4.3
03 User Authentication Set .........................................................17-61
17.4.4
04 Non register/Output Set .........................................................17-67
17.5
04 Network Setting ........................................................................17-68
17.5.1
01 Machine NIC Setting ..............................................................17-68
17.5.2
02 Controller NIC Setting ............................................................17-70
x-8
17.6
05 Copy/Printer Setting .............................................................. 17-128
17.6.1
01 JOB Offset Operating .......................................................... 17-128
17.6.2
02 Continuation Print(Print) ...................................................... 17-129
17.6.3
03 Page No. Position (Booklet) ................................................ 17-130
17.6.4
04 Fixing Prerotation Set ......................................................... 17-131
17.6.5
05 Image Auto Rotation ........................................................... 17-133
17.6.6
06 Interruption Suspend .......................................................... 17-134
17.6.7
07 Copy Reserve Operation ..................................................... 17-135
17.6.8
08 Scan Stop (pull out tray) ...................................................... 17-137
17.6.9
09 Continuation Print (Copy) .................................................... 17-138
17.6.10
10 Original Glass SDF .............................................................. 17-139
17.6.11
11 SDF Auto Setting ................................................................ 17-140
17.7
17.7.1
17.8
06 System Connection ............................................................... 17-141

01 User Call .............................................................................. 17-141
07 Security Setting ...................................................................... 17-142
17.8.1
01 Machine Manager Password .............................................. 17-142
17.8.2
02 HDD Management Setting .................................................. 17-144
17.8.3
03 Security Strengthen mode .................................................. 17-152
17.9
17.9.1
08 Scanner Address Register .................................................... 17-154

01 Send Address Edit/Delete ................................................... 17-154
18 Browser Control Setting

18.1
Web Utilities .................................................................................... 18-3
18.2
Setting Account Track Data .......................................................... 18-5
18.2.1
Adding Account Track ................................................................. 18-6
18.2.2
Editing Account Track Data ......................................................... 18-9
18.3
Setting Scan Transmission Function .......................................... 18-18
18.4
Transmitting Machine Setting File .............................................. 18-24
18.5
Box Edit ......................................................................................... 18-32
18.6
PageScope Web Connection ....................................................... 18-37
18.7
Access ........................................................................................... 18-39
18.8
Screen Configuration ................................................................... 18-40
18.8.1
18.9
Logging in Using Administrator Mode ....................................... 18-42

Administrator Mode ...................................................................... 18-44

x-9
18.10 Administrator Mode System Tab ..............................................18-44

18.10.1
Administrator Password .............................................................18-44
18.10.2
Device Information ......................................................................18-45
18.10.3
ROM Version ...............................................................................18-46
18.10.4
Online Assistance .......................................................................18-46
18.10.5
Import/Export ..............................................................................18-48
18.10.6
Maintenance ...............................................................................18-49
18.10.7
E-Mail Alert .................................................................................18-51
18.11 Administrator Mode Print Tab ...................................................18-52

18.11.1
Interface ......................................................................................18-52
18.11.2
Port Settings ...............................................................................18-53
18.11.3
Default Settings ..........................................................................18-54
18.11.4
Administrator Mode Scan Tab .................................................18-58
18.11.5
Subject Registration ...................................................................18-58
18.11.6
Body Registration .......................................................................18-61
18.12 Administrator Mode Network Tab .............................................18-64

18.12.1
TCP/IP .........................................................................................18-64
18.12.2
NetWare ......................................................................................18-66
18.12.3
IPP ..............................................................................................18-68
18.12.4
FTP ..............................................................................................18-69
18.12.5
SNMP ..........................................................................................18-71
18.12.6
SMB ............................................................................................18-72
18.12.7
Apple Talk ...................................................................................18-74
18.12.8
E-Mail ..........................................................................................18-75
18.12.9
SSL/TLS ......................................................................................18-77
18.12.10 Authentication .............................................................................18-92
19 Security
19.1
Security Functions ...........................................................................19-4
19.1.1
Environments in which Security Strengthen

mode is recommended .................................................................19-5
19.1.2
Creating a secure environment .....................................................19-5
x-10
19.2
Security Strengthen Mode ............................................................. 19-6
19.2.1
Description of Security Strengthen mode .................................... 19-6
19.2.2
Data protected by Security Strengthen mode ............................. 19-7
19.2.3
Data that is not protected in Security Strengthen mode ............. 19-7
19.3
Protect and Delete Data After Use ................................................ 19-8
19.4
User Authentication in Security Strengthen Mode ...................... 19-9
19.4.1
To register a new user ................................................................ 19-10
19.4.2
To change user data .................................................................. 19-15
19.4.3
To delete a user ......................................................................... 19-20
19.4.4
To change password by user ..................................................... 19-23
19.5
HDD Store Function in Security Strengthen Mode .................... 19-26
19.5.1
Store the data in a box while copying ........................................ 19-26
19.5.2
Store scanned data in a box ...................................................... 19-31
19.5.3
Recall/Delete data in a box ........................................................ 19-36
19.5.4
Output data in the Secure Box .................................................. 19-41
19.6
Machine Manager Security Functions ........................................ 19-46
19.6.1
Turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF ................................... 19-46
19.6.2
HDD lock password ................................................................... 19-50
19.6.3
Print audit log ............................................................................. 19-55
19.6.4
Analyze audit log ........................................................................ 19-58
20 Troubleshooting
20.1
If Please Call Service Message Is Displayed ............................ 20-3
20.2
Clearing Mishandled Paper ........................................................... 20-5
20.3
If MACHINE Tab Blinks in Orange ................................................. 20-8
20.3.1
Paper Misfeed .............................................................................. 20-8
20.3.2
Tray Empty ................................................................................... 20-9
20.3.3
Inconformity in Paper Presetting ................................................ 20-11
20.4
If Memory Full Message Is Displayed

(Memory Overflow) ....................................................................... 20-13
20.5
If Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed ........................................ 20-14
20.6
Troubleshooting Tips ................................................................... 20-15

x-11
21 Maintenance
21.1
Cleaning Image Scanning Section .................................................21-3
21.1.1
Cleaning the ADF Scanning Glass ................................................21-3
21.1.2
Cleaning the Original Glass ..........................................................21-3
21.1.3
Cleaning the ADF Guide Cover .....................................................21-4
21.2
Precautions for Paste Pellets and the Perfect Binder .................21-5
21.3
Checking Copy Count .....................................................................21-6
21.4
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................21-9
22 Machine Specifications
22.1
Main Body Specifications ...............................................................22-3
22.1.1
Main Body .....................................................................................22-3
22.1.2
ADF (DF-603) ...............................................................................22-5
22.2
Option Specifications ......................................................................22-6
22.2.1
Paper Feeder Unit PF-701 ............................................................22-6
22.2.2
Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502 .......................................22-6
22.2.3
In-Bin Stapler Finisher FS-503 ......................................................22-7
22.2.4
Folding Unit FD-501 ......................................................................22-8
22.2.5
Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ................................................................22-9
22.2.6
Perfect Binder PB-501 ................................................................22-10
23 Appendix
23.1
How to Input Characters ................................................................23-3
23.1.1
About keys on the character input screen ....................................23-3
23.1.2
About character input ...................................................................23-4
23.2
Setting Data for Import/Export .......................................................23-5
23.3
Configuration Setting ....................................................................23-10
23.4
Font List ..........................................................................................23-15
23.5
PCL Font List .................................................................................23-26
23.6
Glossary ..........................................................................................23-29
23.7
Index ...............................................................................................23-32
x-12
ENERGY STAR Program
The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce energy
consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have
determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy
efficiency, based on the following features.
-
Auto Low Power

This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automatically
when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the
copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240 minutes.
Automatic Shut-Off
This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning the
power supply OFF, thereby reducing energy consumption to 75 W or
less. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power, operating automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state
during that time.
The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30
minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes.
Automatic Duplex Copying

To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided
(duplex) copies, automatically.
Combination
To reduce paper consumption, this function can also be used to lay out
and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper.
We recommend that you utilize Auto Low Power function, the Automatic
Shut-Off function, Automatic Duplex Copying function, and Combination
function.

x-13
Acknowledgements
- KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA
HOLDINGS, INC.
- PageScope and bizhub PRO are registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.
Copyright 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.
Copyright 2006 GoAhead Software, Inc. All rights reserved.
Exemption
- No part of this manual may be used or duplicated without permission.
- Manufacturer and Sales Company will have no liability for any influences
caused by using the printing system and this Operator Manual.
- The information written in this Operator Manual is subject to change without prior notice.
2
Note
To operate safely, be sure to read the Safety Information before using the
machine. For details, refer to Safety Information on page 1-3.
x-14
Safety Information
Safety Information
Safety Information
1.1
Safety Information
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance
of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators
should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing
equipment problems.
-
Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of
this manual.
2
Note
Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the
purchased product.
1.1.1
Warning and Precaution Symbols

The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to
categorize the level of safety warnings.
WARNING
CAUTION
1.1.2
Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death.
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property.
Meaning of Symbols
A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution.
This symbol warns against cause burns.
A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action.
This symbol warns against dismantling the device.
A solid circle indicates an imperative course of action.
This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.

1-3
Safety Information
1
Disassemble and modification
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been
fixed to the product. Some products have a high-voltage part or a
laser beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or
blindness.
Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown
could result. If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source
could cause blindness.
Power cord
WARNING
Do not scratch, abrade, place a
heavy object on, heat, twist, bend,
pull on, or damage the power cord.
Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.)
could result in a fire or breakdown.
Should any of these conditions be
found, immediately turn OFF the
power switch, unplug the power
cord from the power outlet, and
then call your authorized service
representative.
Power source
WARNING
Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do that
could result in a fire or electrical shock.
Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or shock. If proper wall outlet is
not available, the customer shall ask qualified electrician for the installation.
Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause a fire or
electrical shock.
Contact your authorized service representative if an extension cord
is required.
Consult your authorized service representative before connecting
other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overload could result in a
fire.
1-4
Safety Information
Power source
CAUTION
The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency occurs.
Power plug
WARNING
Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an
electrical shock could result.
Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do
this could result in a fire or electrical shock.
CAUTION
Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the power
cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year
and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.
Grounding
WARNING
Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with
a grounding terminal.

1-5
Safety Information
1
Installation
WARNING
Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water, or metal
clips or other small metallic objects on
this product. Spilled water or metallic
objects dropped inside the product
could result in a fire, electrical shock, or
breakdown.
Should a piece of metal, water, or any
other similar foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turn
OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
CAUTION
After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit
moves or falls, it may cause personal injury.
Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to soot
or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical
shock, or breakdown could result.
Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall,
causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown.
Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heat
could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction.
Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, as
a fire could result.
Ventilation
CAUTION
Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating the
product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time
could injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular intervals.
1-6
Safety Information
Actions in response to troubles

WARNING
Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inordinately
hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF
the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and
then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
Do not keep using this product, if this product has been dropped or
its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug
the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized
service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
CAUTION
The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature,
which may cause burns.
When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.)
which are indicated by a Caution HOT caution label.
Consumables
WARNING
Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame. The
hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage.
CAUTION
Do not leave a toner bottle or drum in a place within easy reach of
children. Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your
health.
Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or
watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They could cause these
products to malfunction.
When moving the machine

CAUTION
Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power
cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or
cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown.
When moving this product, always hold it by the locations specified
in the User manual or other documents. If the unit falls it may cause
severe personal injury. The product may also be damaged or malfunction.

1-7
Safety Information
1
Before successive holidays
CAUTION
Unplug the product when you will not use the product for long periods of time.
Paste pellet
CAUTION
Do not put paste pellets close to fire. Paste pellets are flammable
and easy to catch on fire.
Do not swallow paste pellets. Should you swallow any, drink large
amount of water or milk to vomit, and immediately consult a doctor.
Keep out of reach of children in order to avoid unexpected accidents.
1-8
Safety Information
Perfect Binder
CAUTION
Do not use the Perfect Binder without ventilation for an extended
period of time. Ensure to ventilate the room on a regular basis. It is
recommended that the Perfect Binder should be installed in a place
with a local exhaust system. Using the Perfect Binder in a room
without appropriate ventilation could pose health hazard.
Handle melted hot paste carefully. If it gets in the eye, do not rub
nor tray to open the eye, but cool it with cold water immediately and
consult a doctor.
Do not touch melted hot paste as it may cause burn injury. If it sticks
on your skin, cool that part of the skin with cold water immediately
and consult a doctor.
Do not touch the paste tank unit immediately after you turned off
the machine to avoid burn injury. Wait until the unit is no longer hot
when you handle it directly with your hands.
Do not put the paste hopper and the paste tank unit close to fire.
Paste is flammable and easy to catch on fire.
Do not get close to the vapor emitted from melted hot paste. If you
have irritation in or around your eyes, nose or throat, move to an
area where you can get fresh air.
Do not block up the vent for the fan on the back of the Perfect Binder. This will prevent the discharge of heat, and may cause fire or
breakdown.
Do not change the temperature setting for the paste tank unit. This
may cause fire or breakdown.

1-9
Safety Information
1
1.2
Regulation Notices
1.2.1
Laser Safety
This product employs a Class 3B laser diode having maximum power of
15 mW and wavelength of 770 - 800 nm.
This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product. Since the laser beam is
concealed by protective housings, the product does not emit hazardous laser radiation as long as the product is operated according to the instructions
in this manual.
For Denmark Users
7 ADVARSEL
%
Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af

funktion. Undg udsttelse for srling.
Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.
Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens hjeste styrke er
15 mW og blgelngden er 770 - 800 nm.
For Norway Users
7 ADVARSEL
%
Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert I denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for usynlig laserstrling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 15 mW og
bkgelengde er 770 - 800 nm.
1-10
Safety Information
For Finland, Sweden Users

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
6 VAROITUS!
%
Laitteen kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle lasersteilylle.
Tm on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 15 mW ja aallonpituus on 770 - 800 nm.
7 VARNING!
%
Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n I denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som
verskrider grnsen fr laserklass 1.
Det hr r en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden r
15 mW och vglngden r 770 - 800 nm.
Rear side
of main body

1-11
Safety Information
1
1.2.2
Ozone Release
During print operation, a small quantity of ozone is released. This amount is
not large enough to harm anyone adversely. However, be sure the room
where the machine is being used has adequate ventilation, especially if you
are printing a high volume of materials, or if the machine is being used continuously over a long period.
1.2.3
Electromagnetic Interference
This product must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB
interface cable.
The use of non-shield cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 and local rules.
1.2.4
For European Users

This product complies with the following EU directives:
89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC
This declaration is valid for the areas of the European Union (EU) or EFTA only.
This device must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB
interface cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under 89/336/EEC rules.
1.2.5
For German Users

Maschinenlrminformations -Verordnung - 3. GSGV, 18.01.1991:
Der arbeitsplatzbezogene Immisionswert betraegt 70 dB(A) oder weniger
nach ISO 7779.
1-12
Safety Information
1.3
Caution Labels and Indicators

The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as
shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any
dangerous situations or serious injury.
(Entrance of the reversal output unit)

(Right side of the fixing unit)
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT your finger
into the two ADF hinge
portions; otherwise you may
be injured.
(Top surface of the fixing unit)
CAUTION
DO NOT put your
hand between the
main body and
developing fixing
unit; otherwise
you may be
injured.
CAUTION
The fixing unit is
very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
CAUTION
DO NOT put your
hand between
the main body
and developing
fixing unit;
otherwise you
may be injured.
CAUTION
This product employs a Class
IIIb Laser Diode that emits an
invisible laser beam. The cover
should not be opened under
any circumstances.

1-13
Safety Information
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
1-14
Safety Information
1.4
Installation Space
Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, replenishing consumables, changing parts, and periodic inspection. The whole machine may weigh
approx. 1,065 kg at maximum, depending on the combination of options. Be
sure to choose a level and solid floor for the installation place.
Unit: mm
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FS-503
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + LS-502

1-15
Safety Information
Unit: mm
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + LS-502 (2) + FS-503
1-16
Safety Information
1
Unit: mm
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FD-501 + SD-501 + FS-503
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FD-501 + SD-501
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + SD-501

1-17
Safety Information
Unit: mm
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + SD-501 (Side view)
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FD-501 + SD-501 + PB-501
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + SD-501 + PB-501
1-18
Safety Information
1
Unit: mm
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FD-501 + SD-501 + PB-501
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + LS-501 + PB-501
Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + PB-501

1-19
Safety Information
1
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this
product together with your household
waste!
Please refer to the information of your local

community or contact our dealers regrading the proper handling of end-of-life electric and electronic equipments. Recycling
of this product will help to conserve natural
resources and prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling.
1-20
Preparation for Use
Copier
Preparation for Use
Preparation for Use
2.1
Machine Configuration
2.1.1
External Machine Items
14
3
4
5
13
No.
12
11
10
Part name
Description
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
automatically feeds multiple originals one at a time to the

original glass for copying.
Touch Panel
displays interactive operation screens.
Sub power switch
turns machine power ON/OFF when pressed.
Control panel
controls copier operations and displays messages as required.
Tray 3
(universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 2,000 sheets

from A3 to A5.
Tray 4

from A3 to A5. OHP films and thick paper are available
from this tray only.
Tray 5

from A3 to A5.

2-3
Preparation for Use
2
No.
Part name
Description
Tray left side door
opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
Tray 1

from A3 to A5.
10
Tray 2

from A3 to A5.
11
Front door
12
Toner unit door
opens to allow toner supply.
13
Options
see descritpion for each on the following pages
14
Left side door
opens together with the Front door to allow removal of

mishandled paper or when turning on/off the main power
switch.
2-4
Preparation for Use
2.1.2
Internal Machine Items
No.
Part name
Description
Total counter
indicates the total number of copies and prints made.
Conveyance fixing unit
passes the paper through the drum unit, and fuses the
toner onto the copy paper, and is to be withdrawn for removal of mishandled paper.
Lever A
can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit for

removal of mishandled paper.
Drum unit
forms the copy image.
Fixing unit
fuses the toner onto the copy paper.
Main power switch
used only by service representative turns machine power

on/off when pressed.
7 CAUTION
The internal fixing unit is very hot.
%
To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.

2-5
Preparation for Use
2
2.1.3
Control Panel Layout
19
18
20
21
1
2
17
16
3
4
15
14
13 12 11 10
No.
9 8
Part name
Description
Sub power switch
turns machine power on/off when pressed.
Keypad
enters numeric values.
Reset
restores copier to the initial settings.
Interrupt
stops copying/printing/scanning in progress to allow a

simple copying job.
Stop
ceases the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory.
Proof Copy
outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are selected properly.
Start
activates copying or scanning.
Start LED
lights in green when machine operation is available, and

turns red if any operation cannot be started.
[C]
(Clear quantity) allows resetting of print quantity.
Access
sets the machine to allow copying/scanning/printing only

when the User Authentication/Volume Track password is
entered.
10
2-6
Preparation for Use
No.
Part name
Description
11
Mode Check
displays a screen showing all settings that are selected

for the current job.
12
Utility/Counter
displays the Utility Menu Screen / Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions.
13
Mode Memory
displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions.
14
Accessibility
adjusts the response time when touch panel keys or control panel keys are pressed.
15
Help
displays a screen with help for the currently selected

function.
16
Power Save
enables temporary use of the machine when the Power

Save LED is lit, or activates power-saving mode for times
when the copier is inactive.
17
Power Save LED
lights when any power-saving mode is activated, machine power is off due to the timer function, or user password is required for use.
18
Touch panel
displays machine and copying status, help information,

interactive screens, and touch keys for selecting all functions.
19
Power LED
lights in red when the main power switch is turned ON,

then turns green when the sub power switch is turned
ON.
20
Data LED
blinks while receiving print data.
21
Brightness adjustment
dial
can be turned to adjust the brightness of the touch panel

(positioned at the back).
7 CAUTION
The touch panel of the control panel is covered with glass.
%
Do not drop heavy objects on the glass, or put excess weight or pressure on it; otherwise the glass may break or scratched and you may be
injured.
7 CAUTION
If the Service Call Screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be
continued anymore.
%
Stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident.
%
Write down the report code as stated on the 2nd line of the message,
then switch off the machine and disconnect from the power socket.
%
Contact your service representative and inform them of the report
code.

2-7
Preparation for Use
2
2.1.4
Folding Unit FD-501

4
2
6
FD-503
No.
FD-501
Part name
Description
Lower cover feed tray
holds cover sheets.
Lower cover feed tray

guide plates
hold cover sheets to fix the position.
Upper cover feed tray
holds cover sheets.
Upper cover feed tray

guide plates
hold cover sheets to fix the position.
Upper cover
Folding unit door
opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste paper.
2-8
Preparation for Use
2
12
1
2
3
4
11
10
9
8
No.
Part name
Description
Inlet lever
opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.
Post inserter conveyance lever
(behind the inlet lever) opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.
Trash basket
holds waste paper punched out.
Upper/Lower conveyance lever
opens rightward to remove mishandled paper.
Folding unit handle
withdraws the unit to allow removal of mishandled paper.
Conveyance knob/1
can be turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mishandled paper.
Outlet lever
Upper/Lower right side

lever
opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

2-9
Preparation for Use
2
No.
Part name
Description
Upper/Middle/Lower
knob
can be turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandled

paper.
10
Left side lever (right/

left)
11
Upper lever
12
Conveyance knob/2
can be turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandled

cover paper.
2-10
Preparation for Use
2.1.5
Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502
4
5
6
3
10
12
13
14
13
12
10
15
No.
11
7
14
8
Part name
Description
Secondary (Sub) tray
holds sets output in Non-sort mode.
Top cover handle (left)
opens to remove mishandled paper.
Top cover handle

(right)
Paper removal indicator
lights while the stacker goes down in order to allow

takeout of printed sheets.

2-11
Preparation for Use
2
No.
Part name
Description
Paper removal button
is pressed to take out printed sheets from the stacker.
Large capacity stacker

door
opens to take out printed sheets from the stacker.
Outlet cover lever

conveyance cover
handle
Stacker conveyance
knob
can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper to the

stacker.
10

conveyance knob

secondary (sub) tray.
11
Outlet knob

outlet.
12
Inlet lever
opens downward to remove mishandled paper.
13
Stacker
holds sets output in Non-sort mode or Collated mode

(offset).
14
Carriage
carries paper together with the stacker.
15
Outlet lever
2-12
Preparation for Use
2.1.6
Saddle Stitcher SD-501

1
5
8
7
12
13
6
1
3
4
11
5
7
10

2-13
Preparation for Use
2
Internal View
No.
Part name
Description

of Saddle Stitcher
SD-501
holds non-sorted sets output from Saddle Stitcher.
Multi-folding mode
outlet cover handle
opens the cover to remove mishandled paper when using

multi-folding mode.
Multi-folding mode
tray
holds sets output in multi-folding mode.
holds non-sorted sets output from the machine on the

right side of the Saddle Stitcher.
Right side door of Saddle Stitcher SD-501
Saddle Stitcher tray
is withdrawn when using Fold&Staple mode
Dust box
is withdrawn to remove waste paper.
Left side door of Saddle Stitcher SD-501
opens for staple supply or to remove mishandled paper.
2-14
Preparation for Use
External View
No.
Part name
Description
Upper cover lever of

Folding unit
opens the upper cover to remove paper misfed inside the

Folding unit.

conveyance lever
(middle)
Folding unit drawer

handle
opens the drawer to remove paper misfed inside the

Folding unit.

conveyance lever
(right)
Inlet lever
Feeding knob

Folding unit.
Folding unit conveyance lever
Folding unit conveyance cover handle
opens the cover to remove mishandled paper.
Folding unit front cover

lever
10
Stapling unit
staples folded sets.
11
Stapling unit knob
can be turned clockwise to feed mishandled paper.
12
Outlet lever
13
Outlet conveyance lever

2-15
Preparation for Use
2
2.1.7
Perfect Binder PB-501
4
5
3
4
2
5
6
16
7
8
9
10
15
2-16
14
13
12
11
Preparation for Use
Internal View
No.
Part name
Description
Glue hopper cover
opens for supply of glue pellet.
holds sets output without being processed by the perfect

binder.
Front door of Perfect

Binder PB-501
opens for manual binding operation or to remove mishandled paper and waste trimmings.
Cover feeding tray
holds cover paper.
Perfect binder tray
holds sets output in Perfect Binding mode.
Perfect binder tray

cover
opens to take out the bound sets from the tray.
Feeding button
is pressed to feed the bound set leftward.

2-17
Preparation for Use
2
External View
No.
Part name
Description
Body set releasing

knob in clamp unit
can be turned clockwise to take out the body set fixed in

the clamp unit.
Clamp unit conveyance knob
can be turned clockwise to feed the body set for removal

of mishandled paper.
Clamp unit lever
can be turned clockwise to withdraw the clamp unit for

making bound sets manually or for removal of body set
mishandled in the clamp unit.

conveyance knob
can be turned anticlockwise to feed the mishandled paper into the secondary (sub) tray.
Body set conveyance

lever (upper)
opens downward to remove mishandled body set.
Body set conveyance

lever (lower)
opens upward to remove mishandled body set.
Cover conveyance lever (left)
opens upward to remove mishandled cover sheet.
Cover conveyance lever (right)
opens leftward to remove mishandled cover sheet.
Cover conveyance lever (lower)
opens leftward with the trim dust box drawn out to remove mishandled cover sheet.
10
Cover conveyance
knob
can be turned clockwise to remove mishandled cover

sheet.
11
Trim dust box
is withdrawn to remove waste paper.
12
Binding unit descending knob
can be turned downward to let the binding unit down for

13
Jam position display
indicates the position of mishandled paper by LED

lamps.
14
Cover control releasing

knob
can be turned clockwise to remove cover sheet from the

binding unit.
15
Binding unit releasing

knob
can be turned downward to remove cover sheet from the

binding unit in the top position.
16
Cover fixing plate releasing knob (right/left)
can be turned clockwise for the left knob and anticlockwise for the right knob to release the cover fixing plate for
2-18
Preparation for Use
2.1.8
Finisher FS-503
2
8
No.
10
Part name
Description
Finisher door
opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper and replenishing staples.
Primary (Main) tray
holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Collated mode (offset), or Staple mode.
holds sets output in Non-sort mode.
Inlet lever

conveyance lever
(right)

conveyance lever (left)
Stapler unit conveyance knob

stapler unit.
Stapler unit conveyance lever
Stapler unit handle
withdraws the unit to allow removal of mishandled paper.
Stapler unit knob
can be turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mishandled paper.
10

2-19
Preparation for Use
2
2.1.9
Standard/Optional Equipment
Finisher FS-503
Finisher FS-503
+ Folding Unit FD-501

Main Body
+ Paper Feeder Unit PF-701
+ Reverse Automatic
Document Feeder DF-603
Finisher FS-503
+ Saddle Stitcher SD-501
Large Capacity Stacker LS-502

Finisher FS-503
+ Large Capacity Stacker LS-501
2-20
Preparation for Use


Main Body
+ Reverse Automatic
Finisher FS-503


2-21
Preparation for Use
Finisher FS-503

Main Body
+ Reverse Automatic

Finisher FS-503
+ Large Capacity Stacker LS-501 (2)
2-22
Preparation for Use
2.2
Turning On/Off the Power Switch

The machine has two power switches, namely, main power switch and sub
power switch.
2.2.1
To Turn On the Power
Turn ON the main power switch.

-
The main power switch is located

inside the machine.
Open the front door and left side
door to reach it.
When the main power switch is
turned on, the Power LED on the
control panel will light in red.
!
Details
Once the main power switch is turned on, be sure not to use it in usual
operation.
Turn ON the sub power switch.

-
The sub power switch is located

on the right side of the control
panel.
When the sub power switch is
turned on, the Power LED will
turn green.
The Wake-up Screen and Machine Status Screen with warm-up image
will be displayed.

2-23
Preparation for Use
A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the touch panel,
the Machine Status Screen with four types of warm-up image will be
displayed in succession for approx. 6.0 minutes.
!
Details
You can set reserve jobs while the machine is warming up.
Touch the LCD screen to change the Machine Status Screen with warmup image to the screen with the job list, then check that the message
Ready to copy reserve is displayed in the message area.
The Machine Status Screen with the Job list will be displayed.
The message on the Machine Status Screen will inform you that copying job is now available.
!
Details
Machine manager may have changed the screen to be displayed after the
machine power is on, so that a user should enter the user name and
password to operate the machine. For details, refer to Making User Authentication on page 2-33.
If a key counter or copy card is required, follow the instruction on the
screen.
2-24
Preparation for Use
2.2.2
To Turn Off the Power
Turn OFF the sub power switch.

-
The sub power switch is located

on the right side of the control
panel.
The touch panel and all the LEDs
on the control panel other than
the Power LED will go out, and
the Power LED will turn red from
green.
2
Reminder
When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer function, do not
turn off the power. Turning off the power will deactivate the function.
Turn OFF the main power switch.

-
The main power switch is located

inside the machine.
Open the front door and left side
door to reach it.
2
Reminder
Be sure not to turn off the main power

switch in usual operation.
When turning the main power switch off then on, be sure to wait 10 seconds or longer before turning it on again; otherwise the machine may not
operate properly.

2-25
Preparation for Use
2
2.3
To Use Machine When Power Save LED Lights

If you find the Power Save LED lit on the control panel, the machine cannot
be operated due to the Power Save or Weekly Timer function.
%
Press [Power Save] on the control panel.
If Power Save has been activated, the machine will become available
for copying operation.
2
Note
Power Save function has two modes; Auto Low Power and Auto ShutOff. See the following description for details.
This function can also be activated manually. For details, refer to Using
Power Save Manually on page 2-28.
If Weekly Timer has been activated, the Machine Status Screen will appear
with the message Timer interrupt mode / Please input password displayed
in the message area, and the machine operation will be available temporarily
by the Timer Interrupt function. For details, refer to When Weekly Timer Is
Activated on page 2-30.
2-26
Preparation for Use
2.3.1
Auto Low Power

This function conserves energy by lowering the power consumption to 413W
or less in standby mode.
Auto Low Power activates automatically after a specified period (initially 15
minutes) of copier inactivity with the Power Save LED lit, touch panel gone
off, and all other LEDs except Start LED on the control panel turned off. The
Start LED will turn red, while the Power LED keeps green.
%
To start a copying job, press or touch any key on the control panel and
touch panel.
2
Note
The Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15

minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes.
For details,refer to Lists of the function settings on page 15-5.
!
Details
If the Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time, the power will be
turned off.
The touch panel will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the
Jam Position Screen is displayed.
2.3.2
Auto Shut-Off
This function achieves further energy conservation by reducing power consumption to 75W or less in standby mode.
In the initial setting, Auto Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power after a specified
period (initially 120 minutes) of copier inactivity, with the Power Save LED lit
and all other LEDs on the control panel and touch panel turned off. The Power LED keeps green.
%
To start a copying job, press [Power Save]. The copying operation will
become available.
2
Note
The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120
minutes/ 240 minutes, or can be deactivated. For details, refer to Lists
of the function settings on page 15-5.

2-27
Preparation for Use
2
2.3.3
Using Power Save Manually

Follow the procedure below to operate Power Save function (Low Power or
Shut-Off) manually.
2
Note
The machine is initially set to activate the Shut-Off function manually. For
details, refer to Lists of the function settings on page 15-5.
Press [Power Save] for one second or longer, then release it.
The following message will be displayed.

-
Using Auto Shut-Off:

Entry Shut off mode, after 10 second
Press key/screen to cancel
Using Auto Low Power:

Entry Low Power mode, after 10 second
Press key/screen to cancel
2-28
Preparation for Use
!
Details
Be sure to press [Power Save] for one second or longer, otherwise the
following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low Power) mode
will not be activated.
Press POWER SAVER more than one second,
then release it for shut off mode
Press POWER SAVER continuously more
than one second for low power mode
Power Save will be activated.

The [Power Save] LED will be lit and the LCD screen will be turned off.

2-29
Preparation for Use
2
2.3.4
When Weekly Timer Is Activated

The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified by
the machine manager.
2
Note
For details, refer to Lists of the function settings on page 15-5.

When a machine is in OFF condition under control of Weekly Timer, the
[Power Save] LED is lit and machine operation is unavailable.
However, the following procedure temporarily enables the machine operation. (Timer Interrupt)
Press [Power Save] on the control panel.
The Machine Status Screen will be displayed along with the message shown below.
Timer interrupt mode
Please input password
!
Details
The machine power will be turned off automatically after 5 minutes from
this state if a password is not entered.
Input copy time
0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)
If the above message is displayed, proceed to step 3.
2-30
Preparation for Use
Enter the Timer Interrupt password, then press [Start].

-
Enter a 4-digit Timer Interrupt password using the control panel

keypad.
Timer interrupt mode
Please input password ####
Press [Start].
2
Note
The Timer Interrupt password is to be specified in the machine manager

setting. Ask your machine manager for the password.
!
Details
If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit

password.
Set the hour for the interrupt use, then press [Start].
-
Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 for 3 hours) using the control panel keypad. (0 ~ 9)
Input copy time
Press [Start].
Set the minute for the interrupt use, then press [Start].
-
Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 07 for 7 minutes) using the control panel
keypad. (00 ~ 59)
Input copy time
Press [Start].
!
Details
Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5. A number larger
than 60 is unavailable.
Copying is available until the set time is up.

2-31
Preparation for Use
2
5
When the machine operation is finished, press [Power Save] for one
second or longer, then release it.
The machine returns to OFF condition.
2-32
Preparation for Use
2.4
Making User Authentication

This machine can prohibit its operation until the user name, user password,
section name, and/or section password specified by the machine manager
are verified.
Copy quantity limit for each section can also be set.
When the machine is turned on, one of the following User Authentication
screen will be displayed according to the authentication setting.

2-33
Preparation for Use
2
Copying will be available by the following procedure.
Enter the user name, user password, section name, and/or section
password, as required.
-
Touch the desired item key to display the keypad screen.

Enter your user name (max. 64 characters), user password (max. 64
characters), section name (max. 8 characters) and/or 8-digit section password.
Touch [OK].
Check that the screen message changes to Ready for copy.
Start machine operation.

Normal copying/printing/scanning job is available on the machine.
!
Details
If the message Copy limit reached is displayed and machine operation

becomes unavailable, contact your machine manager.
When machine operation is completed, press [Access].

The initial state will be restored, with the User Authentication Screen
displayed on the touch panel.
2-34
Paper and Original

Information
Copier
3.1
Paper Information
This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper.
- Tray 1 and 2 (Main body trays)
- Tray 3, 4, and 5 (Paper Feeder Unit PF-701)
Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies.
- ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (attached to Main body)
- Finisher (FS-503)
- Folding Unit (FD-501)
- Post Inserter (attached to Folding Unit FD-501)
- Large Capacity Stacker (LS-501/LS-502)
- Saddle Stitcher (SD-501)
- Perferct Binder (PB-501)
Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each.
3.1.1
Paper Weight
Paper Trays
Weight
Tray 1 and 2 (Main body trays)
40 ~ 244 g/m
Tray 3 and 5 (PF-701 trays)
40 ~ 244 g/m
Tray 4 (PF-701 tray)
40 ~ 300 g/m

2
2
2
3-3
3
Equipment
Weight
ADU
60 ~ 244 g/m
Finisher
Primary (main) tray:

Secondary (sub) tray:
Folding unit
Punch:
Folding, Letter fold-in,
Letter fold-out, Z-fold:
Double parallel, Gate:
2
50 ~ 300 g/m
Post inserter
2
2
40 ~ 244 g/m
2
40 ~ 300 g/m
2
50 ~ 209 g/m
2
50 ~ 130 g/m
2
50 ~ 91 g/m
2
50 ~ 244 g/m
2
50 ~ 300 g/m
Large capacity stacker
Stacker:
Saddle stitcher
Fold&Staple, Trimmning,
Multi Centre:
Multi Letter:
Straight delivery:
Perfect binder
Body:
Cover::
2
50 ~ 244 g/m
2
50 ~ 91 g/m
2
50 ~ 300 g/m
2
64 ~ 91 g/m
2
82 ~ 161 g/m
2
40 ~ 300 g/m
!
Details
For details, refer to Register Paper Type/Weight on page 12-11.

The paper weight specified for each tray can be changed for temporary
use. For details, refer to Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper
Presetting) on page 6-53.
When using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel, or Gate mode,
the finished set will be delivered only to the secondary (sub) tray on the
left side of the Folding unit.
2
Reminder
Be sure to use paper only of the weight specified for the tray; otherwise
copy quality may be deteriorated or machine trouble may occur.
3-4
3.1.2
Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity

Paper Trays
Capacity
Tray 1 and 2 (Main body trays)
2
1,500 sheets (80 g/m paper)
Tray 3, 4 and 5 (PF-701 trays)
2
2,000 sheets (80 g/m paper)
Equipment
Capacity
ADU
Unlimited
Finisher
Folding unit
Secondary (sub)
tray
Max. 200 sheets
Primary (main)
tray (normal)
500 sheets (A5, A5R, B6R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R)

3,000 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R)
1,500 sheets (A3, B4, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
Wide sizes (Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Primary (main)
tray (Staple)
Finisher primary
(main) tray
Punch:
Conforms to those specified for normal mode of Finisher
Folding modes:
30 sheets or less (A3, B4, A4R, 12x18, 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R)
Secondary (sub)
tray on the left
side of Folding
unit
Max. 200 sheets

Folding modes:
30 sheets or less (A3, B4, A4R, 12x18, 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R)
2
500 sheets (80 g/m paper)
2~ 9 sheets stapled: 150 sets

10~20 sheets stapled: 50 sets
2
Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m paper) per set
Post inserter
Upper/Lower
tray
Large capacity
stacker
Stacker
Max. 5,000 sheets

(A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14,
8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, Wide sizes (Max. 324mm x
460mm)
Max. 2,000 sheets (B5, A5)
Secondary (sub)
tray
Max. 200 sheets

3-5
3
Equipment
Saddle stitcher
Capacity
Fold & Staple
(fine paper)
Fold & Staple

(coated paper)
Fold & Staple:

Saddle stitcher
tray capacity
Trimming
Multi Centre
Multi Letter
Perfect binder
Cover feeding
tray
2
2
50 ~ 81 g/m : 50 or 49 sheets +1 (200 g/m Cover)
2
2
2: 20 or 19 sheets +1 (200 g/m2 Cover)
92 ~ 130 g/m
2
2
2: 10 sheets
162 ~ 209 g/m
2
210 ~ 244 g/m : 5 sheets
2
* Some types of fine paper (50~81 g/m ) may be limited
2
to 30 sheets of 29 sheets + 1 (200 g/m Cover). Contact
your service representative for details.
2
** Fine (vertically laid) paper (62~91 g/m ) 300 mm or less
in length will be limited to 30 sheets or 29 sheets + 1 (200
2
g/m Cover cover).
2
2
2
2
2: 10 or 9 sheets +1 (200 g/m2 Cover)
92 ~ 130 g/m
2
2
2 ~ 10-sheet-folded set: 50 sets
* Saddle stitcher tray should be fully withdrawn in order
to accommodate the maximum number.
2
2
Max. trimmed sheets: 50 (80 g/m ) 2, or 49 (80 g/m )
2) 2
+ 1 (200 g/m
* Tray capacity is the same as Fold & Staple mode.
2
Max. folded sheets: 5 sheets (80 g/m )
Tray capacity: 30 sets (Saddle stitcher tray)
2
Max. folded sheets: 5 sheets (80 g/m )
Tray capacity
1-sheet-folded set: 40 sets
2
82 g/m paper: 1,000 sheets
2
161 g/m paper: 500 sheets
Perfect binder
tray
1 set of maximum thickness (approx. 30 mm) 11 2

columns* (approx. 6,600 sheets)
* Automatically shifts to the second column when the first
column is detected as full load.
Secondary (sub)
tray
Max. 200 sheets (with Full load detection function activated)
!
Details
Using Folding or Z-fold, the finished set can be delivered to any tray of
Finisher primary (main) tray, secondary (sub) tray, and secondary (sub)
tray on the left side of Folding unit.
Using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel, or Gate mode, the
finished set will be delivered only to the secondary (sub) tray on the left
side of the Folding unit.
3-6
The Full load detection function on Perfect binder counts one column to
be full when the following amount is reached in order to prevent the piled
sets from collapsing.
10 ~ 30-sheet-bound set: 50 sets
31 ~ 150-sheet-bound set: 35 sets or until detected as full load
151 ~ 300-sheet-bound set: until detected as full load
!
Details
The following table shows the standard height of folded and stapled
booklet according to the number of sheets and paper size.
Paper size
Number of
sheets (1 set)
A3, 1218,
1117
(401 mm or
more)
B4, 8.514, 8K
(301 ~ 400 mm)
A4R, 8.511R,
16KR (261 ~ 300
mm)
B5R
(260 mm or
less)
2~5
35 mm
40 mm
45 mm
Not specified
6 ~ 15
45 mm
50 mm
Not specified
Not specified
16 ~ 30
50 mm
55 mm
Not specified
Not specified
31 ~ 50
60 mm
65 mm
Not specified
Not specified

3-7
3
3.1.3
Paper Size
Paper Trays
Available Sizes
Tray 1 to 5
STD size:
A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"
Available to detect 5.5x8.5 instead of A5, 8.5"x11"R
instead of A4R, 8K instead of B4, 16K instead of B5,
16KR instead of B5R
Non STD size:
Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. A5 or 5.5"x8.5"
Wide size:
A3W, B4W, A4W, A4RW, B5W, B5RW, A5W,
12"x18"W, 11"x17"W, 8.5"x11"W, 8.5"x11"RW,
5.5"x8.5"W
STD tab paper:
A3T, B4T, A4T, A4RT, B5T, B5RT, 11"x17"T,
8.5"x11"T, 8.5"x11"RT
Non STD tab paper:
Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. A5 or 5.5"x8.5"
Equipment
Available Sizes
ADU
STD size: A3 to A5 (Portrait orientation only)

Non STD size:
Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. 100mm x 140mm
Wide size: A3W to A5W (Portrait orientation only)
Tab paper: Unavailable
Finisher
Secondary (sub)
tray
Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. B6R
Primary (main)
tray (normal)
STD size: A3 to A5R

Wide sizes
STD tab paper
Primary (main)
tray (Staple)
STD size: A3 to A5
Wide sizes
STD tab paper
Finisher primary
(main) tray
Punch: A3 to A5
Folding modes:
A3, B4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R
Secondary (sub)
tray on the left
side of Folding
unit
Post inserter
Upper/Lower
tray
STD size: A3 to A5
Wide sizes
Large capacity
stacker
Stacker
STD size: A3 to A5
Secondary (sub)
tray
Wide sizes:
Folding unit
3-8
Equipment
Saddle stitcher
3
Available Sizes
Saddle stitcher
tray
A3, B4, A4R, B5R, F4*, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",

8.5"x11"R, 8K, 16KR, Wide size paper Max. 12.76" x
18.11" (324 mm x 460 mm)
* F4 indicates the following four sizes: 8"x13",

8.125"x13.26", 8.5"x13", 8.25"x13"
Perfect binder
Multi-folding
mode tray
A4R, 8.5"x11"R
Secondary (sub)
tray of Saddle
stitcher, Secondary (sub) tray
of Finisher
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, F4*, 12"x18",
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5",
5.5"x8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, tab paper, Wide size paper
Max. 12.76" x 18.11" (324 mm x 460 mm)
* F4 indicates the following four sizes: 8"x13",

8.125"x13.26", 8.5"x13", 8.25"x13"
Cover feeding
tray
Length (head to foot): Same as body set

Width: Book width x 2 + thickness + 3 mm or more
(trimming width)
Maximum size: 330 mm x 472 mm
Perfect binder
tray
Standard sizes: A4, B5, A5

Maximum size: 307 mm x 221 mm
Secondary (sub)
tray
Max. 331 mm x 488 mm ~ Min. 100 mm x 139 mm
2
Reminder
Be sure to specify the actual size to use wide size in a tray. For details,
refer to Setting Custom Size on page 12-22.
3.1.4
To Store Copy Paper

-
Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp copy paper may cause a paper misfeed.
Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage.
Do not place paper packages vertically to store.
Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed.

3-9
3
3.2
Original Information
Use the original glass or document feeder to position originals to copy.
3.2.1
Using Original Glass

Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded,
stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.
2
Note
See each description in this guide for copy conditions which cannot use
the document feeder to scan.
Unsuitable ADF Originals
Curled, creased or
folded originals
Paste-ups
or cut-outs
Books
Glossy or transparent
originals, OHP film,
art paper, cellophane
Doubled, punched or
stapled originals
Thin or thick
originals
Specifications for Using Original Glass

- Max. original size: 297mm x 432mm, sheet or book
- Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8 kg / 30mm
- Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass
2
Note
Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series,
AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by the machine manager.
For details, refer to 07 Size Setting on page 17-35.
3-10
7 CAUTION
%
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick
original is placed and is under pressure of ADF; otherwise the glass
may be broken and you may be injured.

3-11
3
3.2.2
ADF Originals
Following four modes are provided when using the document feeder (ADF)
to scan originals.
- Normal mode
- Mixed Original mode
- Z-Folded Original mode
- SDF mode
Specifications for each mode are described as follows.
2
Note
Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series,
AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by the machine manager.
For details, refer to 07 Size Setting on page 17-35.
Normal mode
Specifications
Detectable original size
Original weight
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17", 8"x13", 8.5"x11"
(297mm x 432mm ~ 128mm x 140mm)
2
50 ~ 130 g/m (no special stock)
Max. feeder capacity
2
Curling tolerance
10mm or less
Original placement
Face up
Mixed Original mode

Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. For details, refer to
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) on page 6-14.
Specifications
Original size
Three types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide

width.
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5 and A5 mixed
B4, A4R, B5, B5R and A5 mixed
A4R, B5R and A5 mixed
2
2
Curling tolerance
10mm or less
Original placement
Face up (For details, refer to p. 5-17.)
Original weight
3-12
!
Details
See below for the guide width of each combination.
Guide
width
Guide
width
Guide
width
Z-Folded Original mode

Use Z-Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the size
detection sensor of the ADF. For details, refer to Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded) on page 6-16.
Specifications
Original weight
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17", 8"x13", 8.5"x11"
(297mm x 432mm ~ 128mm x 140mm)
2
2
Curling tolerance
10mm or less
Original placement
Face up; orientation same as copy paper
Single Feed mode

Use Single Feed mode to copy thick originals to be fed one sheet at a time
in the document feeder. For details, Feeding Single Original from ADF (Single Feed) on page 6-18.
Specifications
297mm x 432mm ~ 128mm x 140mm
Original weight
Single-sided original
Double-sided original
1 sheet at a time
Original placement
Face up

2
50 ~ 200 g/m paper
2
50 ~ 130 g/m
3-13
3-14
Supplies & Handling
Copier
Supplies & Handling
Supplies & Handling
4.1
Loading Paper
A paper indicator is shown on each tray

key of the Machine Status Screen and of
the Copy Screen to indicate the paper level
of the tray. Six levels are provided.
When paper in a tray becomes empty, the
indicator blinks on the tray key.
Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper.
2
Reminder
Paper type setting for each tray made on the Machine Status Screen can
be changed temporarily on the Copy Screen using the Paper Presetting
key.
Be sure to load the specified paper; otherwise mishandled paper may occur.

4-3
Supplies & Handling
4
4.1.1
Loading Paper in Main Body Trays and Paper Feeder Unit

Trays
Withdraw the tray to be supplied with paper.
!
Details
Be sure that the machine is powered ON before withdrawing the tray.

Only one tray can be withdrawn at a time.
2
Reminder
Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.
Open the paper feed roller.

-
Tray 1 and 2
Tray 3, 4, and 5
4-4
Supplies & Handling
Place paper on the tray with any curl turning up, then move the side
guide plates and rear edge guide to the edge of the paper.
Paper holding lever

Tray 1 and 2
Limit lever
Paper holding lever

Tray 3, 4, and 5
Limit lever
Load paper aligning it to the paper feed roller side of the tray.
Press the release knob of the front side guide plate to move the side
guide plates, and also move the rear edge guide to the edge of the
paper.
2
Reminder
Do not load above the limit level, and carefully load the paper to be seated under the paper holding lever at the air nozzle.
Be sure that the side guide plates and rear edge guide are securely
aligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct
paper size, or machine trouble may occur.

4-5
Supplies & Handling
4
4
When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.
4-6
Supplies & Handling
Push in the tray until it locks into place.

The indicator on the Machine Status
Screen or Copy Screen will change.
2
Reminder
Do not bump the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may
be caused.

4-7
Supplies & Handling
4
4.1.2
Loading Cover Paper in Cover Feeding Tray of Perfect

Binder PB-501
Withdraw the cover feeding tray.
Load cover paper in the tray.
Place cover paper faceup, with the top to be rear in the tray. When
making the book bound on the right side, the front side in the tray
will be the top.
Align it to the paper feed roller side.
4-8
Supplies & Handling
2
Reminder
Do not load above the limit level, and carefully load the paper to be seated under the paper holding lever at the air nozzle.
Align the side guide plates and rear edge guide to cover paper.
-
Press the release knob of the front side guide plate to move the side
guide plates, and also move the rear edge guide to the edge of cover paper.
2
Reminder
aligned to the paper; otherwise a paper jam may be caused.

4-9
Supplies & Handling
4
7

The indicator on the Machine Status
Screen or Copy Screen will change.
Do not bump the tray into the perfect binder; otherwise machine trouble may be caused.
4-10
Supplies & Handling
4.1.3
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray

Tabbed sheets can be used if the tray paper size is specified as tabbed
sheets in the Tray Setting or Paper Presetting. Follow the procedure below
to supply the tray with tabbed sheets.
Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets.
Loaded in Tray
1 or 2
Loaded in Tray
3,4 or 5
1st TAB
1st TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
2nd TAB
1st TAB
3rd TAB
2nd TAB
3rd TAB
3 finished sets
Withdraw the tray.

The tray paper size should be specified as tabbed sheets.
2
Note
For details, refer to Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper Presetting) on page 6-53.
Place paper on the tray.

Place paper referring to the illustration shown above.
2
Reminder
Do not load above the limit level on the side guide plate.

4-11
Supplies & Handling
!
Details
The machine can be set to discharge the oddments of a set of tabbed

sheets automatically if the tabbed original count is less than the number
of tabbed sheets in a set. See the next page for detail.
Move the side guide plates to the edge of the paper.

-
Set paper aligning it to the paper feed roller side of the tray.
Press the release lever of the front side guide plate to move the side
guide plates, and also move the rear edge guide to the edge of the
paper.
2
Reminder
aligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct
paper size, or machine trouble may occur.
4-12
Supplies & Handling
!
Details
Needless Tab Paper Exit

This function sets the machine to discharge the oddments of a set of
tabbed sheets automatically if the tabbed original count is less than the
number of tabbed sheets in a set, so that the next copy job can be started
afresh with the 1st tabbed sheet.
Three tabbed
Originals
Copy from the 1st to 3rd tabbed sheet,

and automatically descharge
4th and 5th tabbed sheets.
Load all
the five sheets
For details of Tab Paper mode, see Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Custom Size / Tab Paper) on page 6-21.
Use the User Setting mode to specify whether or not to use the Needless
Tab Paper Exit function. For details refer to 02 Each Function Setting
on page 16-23.
If the machine with this function enabled stops the current job due to a
trouble such as paper misfeed, a message will appear on the touch panel
to prompt you to check that the tabbed sheet tray source is prepared for
the next copy job to start with the 1st tabbed sheet.
Needless Tab Paper Exit may not be allowed depending on the finisher
type mounted on the machine.

4-13
Supplies & Handling
4
4.2
Adding Toner
This machine is equipped with a toner storage for keeping a bottle stock of
toner. When toner supply from the toner bottle becomes low, the message
Toner Bottle can be exchanged will be displayed on the touch panel.
When toner supply runs out from both toner bottle and toner storage, the
message Toner will be used up / Exchange Toner Bottle or "Please add
toner" will appear.
2
Reminder
Use the same number toner bottle as described on the label applied on
the inside of the toner unit door. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur.
7 CAUTION
%
Keep the toner bottle away from children. The toner is non-toxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and
seek medical advice.
Do not throw the empty toner bottle into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire,
the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
4-14
Supplies & Handling
Add toner according to the procedure as follows.
Open the toner unit door.
Pull the toner unit lever forward to

withdraw the bottle holder until it
stops.
Remove the empty toner bottle.
Shake the new toner bottle several

times to loosen toner.

4-15
Supplies & Handling
4
5
Remove the cap from the new toner

bottle, then put it to the used one.
New
Used
Set the new toner bottle into the bottle holder.
!
Details
Be sure to set the label of the toner bottle upward, then fit its bottom to
the hollow part of the bottle holder; otherwise toner leakage may occur
or the bottle holder may not be returned to its original position.
Return the bottle holder to its original

position, then close the toner unit
door securely.
4-16
Supplies & Handling
4.3
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into Finisher FS-503

When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Cartridge indicator
lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status Screen.
Follow the procedure below to set the staple roll into the staple cartridge.
Open the Finisher door.
Pull out the stapler unit slowly by

holding the stapler unit handle until it
stops.

4-17
Supplies & Handling
4
3
Remove the staple cartridge.

Pull down the handle of the staple
cartridge to draw it downward.
Set the staple roll into the staple cartridge.

-
Open the staple cartridge cover,

then set the staple roll into the
cartridge.
Close the cover, then remove the

lock tape pulling it in horizontal
direction.
2
Reminder
Do not pull the lock tape upward, otherwise the tape may rip and remain inside the cartridge so that the staples
cannot be used.
Set the staple cartridge.

-
Return the staple cartridge to its

original position as shown below.
Push up and in to secure it in
place.
4-18
Supplies & Handling
Return the stapler unit to its original

position.
Close the Finisher door.

4-19
Supplies & Handling
4
4.4
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into Saddle Stitcher

SD-501
When the staple cartridge of the Saddle Stitcher SD-501 is empty, the Cartridge indicator lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status
Screen.
If printing job is in progress, a message will be displayed on the Copy Screen.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.
Open the left side door of the Saddle

Stitcher.
Remove the empty cartridge.

-
Hold both left and right sides of

the staple cartridge, then draw it
forward.
4-20
Supplies & Handling
!
Details
The machine is mounted with two staple cartridges. Be sure to remove

the empty one.
Set the new cartridge.
2
Reminder
Check that the top side of the staple cartridge is up, otherwise it cannot
be inserted.
Close the left side door of the Saddle

Stitcher.

4-21
Supplies & Handling
4
4.5
Adding Paste Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-501

If the Perfect Binder PB-501 is out of paste pellets, the machine warmup
cannot be completed with the following message displayed on the Machine
Status Screen, and consequently the binding operation is unavailable.
When the paste pellets run out during the binding operation, the machine
stops the job immediately and the binding operation also becomes unavailable.
2
Reminder
If you open the paste hopper cover during the binding operation, a paper
jam may be caused due to the sudden halt of the machine. Never open
the paste hopper cover while the binding operation is in process.
Be sure to use the paste GC-501 exclusively provided for Perfect Binder
PB-501.
Handle melted hot paste with great care. To ensure safety and product
reliability, observe the precautions for using paste pellets. Read Safety
Information on page 1-3 as well.
Do not overload the paste hopper with paste pellets.
Do not touch the lever in the paste hopper with your hand to avoid breakdown.
4-22
Supplies & Handling
Loosen the paste pellets inside the

bag.
Open the paste hopper cover.
Supply the paste hopper with paste pellet.
2
Reminder
Do not add the paste pellet above the limit level indicated inside the paste
hopper.

4-23
Supplies & Handling
4
4
Close the paste hopper cover.
4-24
Supplies & Handling
4.6
Empty Trash Basket of Folding Unit FD-501

When the trash basket becomes full, the Punch Dust indicator lights in red in
the option status area of the Machine Status Screen.
Follow the procedure below to empty the trash basket.
Open the Finisher door.
Withdraw the trash basket.

4-25
Supplies & Handling
4
3
Empty the trash basket.
Return the trash basket to its original

position.
Close the Finisher door securely.
4-26
Supplies & Handling
4.7
Empty Dust Box of Saddle Stitcher SD-501

When the dust box of the Saddle Stitcher SD-501 becomes full, the Trim
Dust indicator lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status
Screen.
Follow the procedure below to empty the dust box.
Withdraw the dust box.
2
Reminder
The dust box cannot be withdrawn while machine operation is in

progress. Be sure to confirm that the machine has stopped its operation
before withdrawing the dust box.

4-27
Supplies & Handling
4
2
Open the top cover of the dust box.
Take waste paper out of the dust

box.
Close the top cover of the dust box,

then return it to its original position.
2
Reminder
Be sure to return the dust box to its original position, otherwise the trimming function cannot be performed.
4-28
Supplies & Handling
4.8
Empty Dust Box of Perfect Binder PB-501

When the dust box of the Perfect Binder PB-501 becomes full, the Trim Dust
indicator lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status Screen.
Follow the procedure below to empty the dust box.
Open the front door of the perfect

binder.
2
Reminder
Do not open the front door while machine operation is in progress, otherwise a paper jam may be caused. Be sure to confirm that the machine
has stopped its operation before opening the front door.

4-29
Supplies & Handling
4
2
Withdraw the dust box.
Take waste paper out of the dust

box.
Return the dust box to its original position.
Then close the front door of the perfect binder.
4-30
Supplies & Handling
4.9
Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker

LS-501/502
Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/502 can hold 5,000 output sheets (2,000
sheets for B5 and A5) at maximum.
Follow the procedure below to take out paper from the stacker.
Press the Paper removal button.

The stacker unit will move down to
the carriage.
Open the large capacity stacker

door.
!
Details
Once the stacker holds a sheet of output paper, the large capacity stacker
door will be locked and cannot open till
the stacker unit goes down fully to the
carriage.
Withdraw the carriage by holding its

handle.
2
Reminder
Be sure to withdraw the carriage

straightforward, and do not change the
direction forcibly while driving it.
The carriage is for the exclusive use of carrying paper. Do not drive it in
any other use.
Never put yourself in the large capacity stacker.

4-31
Supplies & Handling
4
4
Remove the sheets from the carriage.

The stacker unit can be removed
from the carriage.
2
Reminder
Once lowering the stacker unit for the purpose of removing mishandled
paper or checking output sheets, be sure to remove all the sheets from
the carriage. If the carriage is returned with any sheets left on the stacker
unit, machine trouble may be caused.
Return the carriage to its original position.
Close the large capacity stacker

door.
2
Reminder
When returning the stacker unit to its original position, fit the two projections of the carriage to the two holes of the stacker unit, otherwise the
carriage cannot be returned properly.
4-32
Copier
5.1
Copy Screen
The Copy Screen is used to select the desired copy conditions when setting
a new copy job and also reserve jobs.
3 4
5 6
7 8
10
23
22
11
21
12
20
13
19
18
17
16
15
14
No.
Part name
Description
COPY tab
is touched to display the Copy Screen.
Original Setting key
is touched to specify the condition of originals to be

scanned.
Special Image key
is touched to specify the image quality or background exposure level of the originals, and also to specify the userset
density.
AE key
is touched to activate AE (Automatic Exposure).
Density adjustment keys
are used to specify the desired exposure level.
Zoom key
is touched to select the desired magnification ratio using

preset ratios, user preset ratios, zoom mode or vertical/horizontal zoom mode.
1.0 key
is touched to copy in 1.000 magnification ratio.

5-3
5
No.
Part name
Description
Auto Zoom key
is touched to activate AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection).
Set Number indicator
indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel

keypad.
10
Output indicator
indicates the print count on the left of the set count while
printing.
11
Application key
is touched to select various application functions.
12
Paper Presetting key
is touched to use different paper type from that indicated

on the tray key.
13
Tray keys
display specified paper setting and amount remaining in

each tray.
14
Auto Paper Select key
is touched to activate APS (Automatic Paper Selection).
15
Rotation Off key
is touched to release the Rotation function.
16
Copy Mode area
is used to select the copy mode (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, or 2-2).
17
Punch key
is touched to use Punch mode.
18
Staple key
is touched to use Staple mode
19
Function keys
are touched to recall the job setting previously registered

using Mode Memory. Up to five settings can be recalled.
20
Output Application key
is touched to specify the desired output mode.
21
Memory Scan key
is touched to store scanned images innto memory.
22
Machine Status icons
display to indicate various machine status.
23
Message area
displays the machine status and procedure required at that

time.
5-4
5.1.1
Machine Status Screen

The Machine Status Screen displays when copying operation becomes
available after warm-up, or when any copying job has been completed.
15
14
13
12
11
6
10
No.
Part name
Description
COPY tab
is touched to display the Copy Screen.
JOB LIST tab
is touched to display the Job List Screen.
MACHINE tab
is touched to display the Machine Status Screen, and

blinks in red when machine trouble occurs.
Count/Set indicator
indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel

keypad, and also indicates the print count on the left of
the set count while printing.
Tray setting list
displays the paper setting made for each tray, and also
displays the paper sizes loaded in the Post inserter. The
currently selected tray will be indicated in different colour.
Job list
displays the current status of the jobs to be operated on

the machine.
Controller key
is touched to set the controller.
Adjustment key
is touched to make adjustments of the machine and optional equipment.

5-5
5
No.
Part name
Description
Paper Set key
is touched to make paper setting for each tray.
10
Maintenance & supply

indicator
lights in red when staple supply is required or when trash

basket is full.
11
Toner message
displays the current status of toner supply.
12
Machine status display
prompts you if any door or cover is open.
13
Scanner message
displays the current status of scanning job.
14
Icon area
displays various machine status icons.
15
Message area
displays messages concerning printing job, and also indicates the warmup status of the main body and optional
perfect binder if mounted.
5-6
5.2
Features of the bizhub PRO 1050/1050e

-
All-Image Area
Makes copies printed completely to the edges of the paper to avoid image loss.
AE - Automatic Exposure
Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original.
AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection

Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when paper size
is selected manually. Automatically selected when [Auto Zoom] is
touched.
Annotation
Allows you to register words, current date/time, and annotation number
as a set and to print it onto output copies at the location designated on
the screen.
APS - Automatic Paper Selection

Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents.
Auto Low Power

Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
Auto Reset
Automatically resets to the default settings after a specified period of
copier inactivity.
Auto Shut-Off
Automatically shuts off the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
Book Copy
Copies both pages of an open book or book-size sheet separately onto
two letter sheets in 1-1 mode or separately onto each side of one letter
sheet in 1-2 mode. You can use the Book Copy mode with the Front or
Front/Back cover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copied
normally before image division is performed on the other pages.
Booklet
Creates a multiple page signature booklet copied on both sides of paper
in 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode.
Chapter
Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only duplex mode (1-2) is compatible with this feature.
Combination
Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper
to create a draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving
paper.
Copy Density
Manually selects up to 9 density levels.

5-7
5
-
Copy Mode
Selects the desired simplex mode (1-1 or 2-1); or duplex mode (1-2 or 22).
Custom Size for Original

Identifies the special original size which the machine cannot detect, in order to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing.
Density Shift
Shifts each of nine density levels in four enhance modes (Text & Photo,
Text, Photo, Low Contrast) to three levels lighter or three levels darker.
Frame/Fold Erasure
Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300mm), Fold (1 99mm), or Frame & Fold.
Function Key
Recalls the job setting previously registered using Mode Memory at a single touch.
Image Centring
The original image on the original glass or in the document feeder is copied and centred on a sheet.
Image Insert
Stores pages in memory from the original glass, and inserts the pages
into a document copied from the document feeder.
Image Shift
Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left
edges (shift amount from 0 ~ 250mm, in 1mm increments); reduces image to prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from 0 ~ 250mm, in
1mm increments).
Interrupt Copying
Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of
the copier features for the interrupt job.
Job List
Displays the Job List Screen to view the current machine status, changes
the operation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, or
displays the previous job list.
Manual Shut-off
Shuts off the machines power when pressing [Power Save] on the control panel.
Memory Scan Mode

Scans documents into memory from the original glass and/or the document feeder and inserts the pages into another document copied from
the document feeder. If an incompatible function is selected in this mode,
the latter function will not be selected, and an Error message will be displayed.
5-8

-
Mixed Original
Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS
mode. APS automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS
mode allows you to select one paper size for all originals.
Mode Memory
Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed.
All compatible original glass functions can be programmed into Mode
Memory directly after they are selected.
Neg. Pos. Reverse

Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa.
No Image Area Erase

When copying from the original glass when the document cover is open,
copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which
would otherwise copy as black.
OHP Interleave
Copies onto transparency film and interleave blank or copied paper for
each original copied.
Output for Machine with Finisher FS-503 Installed

Non-Sort, Collated, Uncollated, and Staple modes using the primary
(main) tray.
Collated and Uncollated modes using the secondary (sub) tray.
Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Application
Screen.
Output for Machine with Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/502 Installed

Non-Sort, Collated, and Uncollated modes using the stacker
Collated and Uncollated modes using the stacker secondary (sub) tray
Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Application
Screen.
Output for Finisher FS-503 with Folding Unit FD-501 Installed

Punch, Folding (Z-fold, Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel,
Gate, Folding), Cover sheet feeding
For details, refer to Setting Output Methods on page 9-3.
Output for Machine with Saddle Stitcher SD-501 Installed

Fold & Staple, Trimming
Folding (Multi Centre, Multi Letter)
For details, see Setting Output Methods on page 9-3.
Output for Maschine with Perfect Binder PB-501 Installed

Perfect Binding, Trimming
For details, refer to Setting Output Methods on page 9-3.
Overlay
Scans an original image and overlays it on the pages of another document. For example, you may want to incorporate a page heading, graphic
design or logo into the pages of your document.

5-9
5
-
Overlay Memory
Same as for Overlay except the overlay image is stored in memory.
Paper Capacity
Total 9,000 sheets, including two 1,500-sheet trays (Tray 1 and 2) and
three 2,000 sheet trays (Tray 3, 4, and 5).
Power Save
Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a
brief warm up period by pressing [Power Save] on the control panel.
Program Job
Scans documents into memory while designating different copy conditions for each original, then prints all the documents collectively.
Proof Copy
To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy
by pressing [Proof Copy] on the control panel or touching [Proof Copy]
on the Check Screen.
Repeat
Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down
the page as many times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 150mm) permits
in manual or auto.
Reserve
Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the machine is busy printing or copying.
Rotation
Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orientation of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper.
Sheet Insertion
Insert up to 26 blank or copied sheets from any tray, or inserts blank or
copied front and back covers from any tray to enhance the presentation
of multi-page documents.
Stamp
Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and numbering onto the output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of
the copies.
Stapling
Selects the stapling position and number of staples.
Tab Paper
Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image on
the tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed
copy paper.
Tandem Mode for Two Copiers

Works in tandem to distribute a large copying job in half the time of nontandem mode.
5-10

-
Text/Photo Enhance
Enhances photo image in Photo mode, regular image in Text/Photo
mode, text image in Text mode, lighter image in Low Contrast mode.
Weekly Timer
Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main
body power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and
also enables the Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the
machine even when the machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off
mode.
Wide Size Paper

Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size.
Z-Folded Original
This feature sets the ADF to accept Z-folded originals.
Zoom
Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-set
ratios. Zoom ratios can be selected from 25% ~ 400% in 1% increments.

5-11
5
5.3
How to Make a Basic Copy

Follow the procedure below to make a basic copy.
Use Function key to recall the job setting previously registered using Mode
Memory. Up to five settings can be recalled.
!
Details
The following procedure is basic and not always applicable to the operation of selected copy conditions. When using a specific function, be
sure to follow the procedure described in each section.
Display Copy Screen.

-
Touch [COPY] tab on the Machine Status Screen to display the

Copy Screen.
Set copy conditions as desired.

The following settings are available on the Copy Screen.
- Function Key (See p.p. 6-8)
- Original Setting (See p. 6-10)
- Special Image (See p. 6-26)
- Zoom (See p. 6-32)
- Application (See p. 8-8)
- Output Application (See p. 9-3)
- Copy Mode (See p. 6-37)
- Paper Presetting (See p. 6-53)
5-12
Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.

For details, refer to Setting Print Quantity on page 5-20.
Position originals FACE UP in the

document feeder, or FACE DOWN
on the original glass.
For details, refer to Positioning Originals on page 5-16.

5-13
5
5
Press [Start] on the control panel.
When the machine starts scanning originals, the current job status will
be displayed on the popup menu.
The reserve job setting is available from this popup menu. Touch [Yes]
or [Close] to return to the Copy Screen. For details, refer to Reserve
Job Setting on page 6-64.
!
Details
The screen to be displayed after machine power is turned on can be selected either from the Machine Status Screen (initially selected) or the
Copy Screen. The popup screen will vary depending on this selection.
The Job List Screen is provided to change the operation order of reserve
jobs or cancel the reserve job. For details, refer to Overview of Job List
Screen on page 7-3.
5-14
If [No] is touched, the Machine Status Screen will be restored.
The current job will be displayed in the job list, with the count/set quantity indicated at the upper right corner of the screen.

5-15
5
5.4
Positioning Originals
5.4.1
Positioning Originals in ADF

The document feeder (ADF) automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly
to the original glass area, starting with the top sheet. The ADF should only be
used for unstapled, smooth, flat originals.
Positioning originals in Normal mode
Arrange originals in order.
2
Reminder
Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed
fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically.
Be sure not to use unsuitable ADF originals.
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

-
Place two-sided originals with

page one FACE UP.
Up to 100 originals can be set at
a time.
2
Reminder
Do not set more than 100 originals or

over the limit line indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed
will occur.
If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets, then load them from the block with the first page.
Adjust paper guides.
5-16
Positioning originals in Mixed Original mode

Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder.
2
Note
For details, Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) on page 6-14

-
Arrange the mixed size originals as illustrated below.
To the
depth
To the left
Setting
direction
2
Reminder
Be sure not to use unsuitable ADF originals. For details, refer to Unsuitable ADF Originals on page 3-10.
2
Note
For details, refer to Mixed Original mode on page 3-12.
Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of the
document feeder tray.
-
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.

Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.

5-17
5
3
Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode

Z-Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size
detection sensor of the ADF.
2
Note
For details, refer to Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded) on

page 6-16.
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

-
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.

Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
2
Reminder
Be sure not to use unsuitable ADF originals. For details, refer to Unsuitable ADF Originals on page 3-10.
5-18
5.4.2
Positioning Original on Original Glass

Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded,
stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.
Raise the document feeder.
Position original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner, aligning the edge
with the left measuring guide.
The direction of the original should
confirm to the Original direction icon
displayed on the Copy Screen.
Gently close the document feeder to

prevent the original from shifting on
the glass.
!
Details
When Book Copy, AUTO mode in Repeat, or Image Centring is selected, the
document feeder should not be closed
while scanning. For details, refer to chapter 8 Applications.
7 CAUTION
%
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick
original is placed and is under pressure of ADF; otherwise the glass
may be broken and you may be injured.

5-19
5
5.5
Setting Print Quantity

This section describes how to set or change print quantity.
5.5.1
To Set Print Quantity

The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by
the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets.
%
5-20
5.5.2
To Change Print Quantity

Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity that has been already entered.
Press [C] (clear quantity).

The quantity displayed on the touch panel will return to 1.
Enter the correct quantity.


5-21
5
5.6
Setting Job During Warm-up

While the copier is warming up after power is turned on, select copy conditions and start scanning so that the copier may start printing immediately the
copier engine is ready.
This function can be disabled by service. Contact your service representative, if desired.
Turn on the main power switch and sub power switch of the machine.
2
Note
For details, refer to Turning On/Off the Power Switch on page 2-23.
Display the Copy Screen to check that the message Ready to copy reserve is displayed in the message area.
-
A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the touch panel, the Machine Status Screen with four types of warm-up image
will be displayed in succession for approx. 6.0 minutes.
Touch [COPY] tab to change the Machine Status Screen to display
the Copy Screen, then check that the message Ready to copy reserve is displayed in the message area.
Set the desired copying conditions, and enter the print quantity.
2
Note
For details, refer to Setting Print Quantity on page 5-20.
5-22
Position original(s) FACE UP in the ADF or FACE DOWN on the original

glass.
2
Note
For details, refer to Positioning Originals on page 5-16.
Press [Start].
When scanning the original for the job is started, the popup menu will
appear on the Copy Screen.
Touch [Yes] or [Close] to return to the Copy Screen to make another

reserve job setting. For details, refer to Reserve Job Setting on
page 6-64.
!
Details
The screen to be displayed after machine power is turned on can be selected from the Machine Status Screen (initially selected), Copy Screen,
and Job List Screen. The popup screen will vary depending on this selection.
The Job List Screen is provided to change the operation order of reserve
jobs or cancel the reserve job. For details, refer to Overview of Job List
Screen on page 7-3.

5-23
If [No] is touched, the Machine Status Screen will be restored.
The current job will be displayed in the job list, with the count/set quantity indicated at the upper right corner of the screen.
5-24
5.7
To Stop Scanning/Printing
Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing.
2
Note
This procedure is effective only for the job in progress. To stop the reserved jobs on standby, operate on the Job List Screen. For details, refer
to Overview of Job List Screen on page 7-3.
Press [Stop] while the current job is in progress.
!
Details
With the popup menu displayed right after pressing [Start] for scanning
reserve job, the job cannot be canceled even if [Stop] is pressed. According to the procedure Scanning reserve job while printing on page 5-28
touch an appropriate key on the popup menu to clear it.
The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended,
and the popup menu will be displayed on the Copy Screen.
Touch the desired key on the popup menu.

The popup menu will vary according to the job in progress.

5-25
Both scanning and printing are in progress

%
Touch [Stop Job] to cancel the job, or touch [Continue] to complete the
job.
!
Details
Touching [Stop Job] will delete all the scanned data.

Scanning the job in Memory Scan mode
%
job.
!
Details
5-26
Batch printing is in progress

%
job.
!
Details

Scanning and printing the job using Program Job
%
job.
!
Details

5-27
5
Scanning reserve job while printing
Select to stop scanning, printing, or to stop both operation.
Start scanning the reserve job while printing.

The following popup menu will be displayed.
Touch [NO] to restore the Machine Status Screen.

If machine has been set to display the Copy Screen as the initial
screen, touch [MACHINE] tab to restore the Machine Status Screen.
Press [Stop]. Machine operation will be ceased, and the following popup menu will be displayed.
5-28
Select the job to cancel.

-
Touch Scan to stop scanning the reserve job and continue printing.
Touch Print to stop printing and continue the scanning job.
Touch Scan/Print to cancel both scanning and printing jobs.
Touch Continue to complete both jobs.
!
Details
All the data scanned for stopped job will be deleted.

5-29
5-30
Basic Job Settings
Copier
Basic Job Settings
Basic Job Settings
6.1
Copy Conditions Incompatible with Basic Settings
Tab Paper
Custom Size (Full Area)
Custom Size
Z-Folded Original
*5
2-1
2-2
*5
AE
Memory Scan Mode (ADF)

APS
AMS
1.000 Magnification
z
z
ZOOM
Preset Magnification
z
z
Rotation
*3
Manual Density
Special Image
Mixed Original
Background Adjust (-)
Background Adjust (+)
Text
Photo (*5)
Low Contrast
Text & Photo (Enhance)
Preset Density
Manual Density
Rotation
ZOOM
1.000 Magnification
AMS
2-2
APS
2-1
Original Setting
1-2
Memory Scan Mode (Glass)
Special Image
1-2
Copy Mode/Magnification
1-1
1-1
Copy Conditions Incompatible

with Basic Settings
AE
Preset Density
x
x
x

Low Contrast
Photo (*5)
Text
Original Setting
Mixed Original
Z-Folded Original

z
z
Custom Size
Tab Paper
*6
*3
z
z
6-3
x
u
x
x
Chapter (Print Insertion)
Booklet
Booklet (Adhesive Binding)
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
6-4
x
c
x
u
x
u
x
u
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Overlay (*1)
Overlay Memory
Annotation
Watermark/Numbering
Watermark
Date
Set Numbering
Page Numbering
Stamp
All-Image Area
Non-Image Area Erase
Reduce & Shift
Application / File Edit
Image Shift
Image Centring
Fold Erasure
Frame Erasure
Repeat (2/4/8 Repeat)
Neg. Pos. Reverse
Repeat (Auto)(*2)
Repeat
Book Copy
Image Insert
OHP Interleave
Combination
Chapter
Back PI (Upper/Lower)
Front PI (Upper/Lower)
Back Cover
Front Cover
Insertion using PI
Sheet Insertion
Program Job (First job)
6
Basic Job Settings
Application / Image Edit
u
u
u
x
x
x
x
x
Original Setting
Special Image

Rotation
Mixed Original
x
x
Z-Folded Original
x
x

x
x
Tab Paper
x
x
*4
*4
*4
1-2
2-2
Face Down
Face Up
Hole-Punch (Top)
Hole-Punch (Left)
Hole-Punch (Right)
Gate (Outside Print)
Gate (Inside Print)
Double Parallel (Outside Print)
Double Parallel (Inside Print)
Letter Fold-out (Outside Print)
Letter Fold-out (Inside Print)
Letter Fold-in (Outside Print)
Letter Fold-in (Inside Print)
Folding (Outside Print)
Copy Conditions Incompatible with

Basic Settings
Folding (Inside Print)
Z-Fold
2 Stapling (Right)
2 Stapling (Left)
2 Stapling (Top)
1 Stapling (Upper Right)
1 Stapling (Upper Left)
Uncollated (Rotation)
Collated (Rotation)
Uncollated
Collated (Offset)
Basic Job Settings
Output Application
1-1
2-1
x

x
APS
AMS
1.000 Magnification
ZOOM
Manual Density
*4
AE
Preset Density
Low Contrast
Photo (*5)
Text
Custom Size
6-5
x
x
x
x
6-6
Perfect binding (Body Set)
Tandem
Trimming (*7)
Multi Letter (Outside Print)
Multi Letter (Inside Print)
Multi Centre
Fold&Staple
HDD
Upper Binding
Right & Left Binding
N to 1
1 to N
6
Basic Job Settings
Output Application
Basic Job Settings
Description
None
Compatible
Grayed out (including automatic release)
Output message
Originally incompatible but selectable (Function last selected has priority.)
Released automatically
*1
Overlay cannot be selected in Program Job.
*2
Selecting Auto in Repeat, Non-Image Area Erase will also be selected automatically and cannot be released.
*3
Rotation without AMS is unavailable in Mixed Original. (Mixed Original or last selected function has priority.)
*4
Rotation is unavailable if staple or punch position will be interfered.
*5
Memory Scan mode is selected automatically.
*6
If Low Contrast is selected with minus level in Background Adjustment, the minus
level will be altered to 0 automatically.
*7
Release automatically if using secondary tray for output.

6-7
Basic Job Settings
6
6.2
Function Key
The Function key allows you to assign up to five job settings previously
stored using Mode Memory.
This section describes how to make a copy by simply touching the Function
key to recall the desired job setting.
!
Details
For storing job settings using Mode Memory, refer to Storing and Recalling Job Conditions (Mode Memory) on page 10-11.
The job setting assignment to the Function key is performed by the machine manager. For details, refer to 08 Function Key Setting on
page 16-14.
Specifications for Function Key:
- The assignment to the Function key is available only for the job setting
stored using Mode Memory.
- Up to 5 Function keys are provided for the job setting assignment.
- Function keys are available from Copy Screen only. This function cannot
be used in any other mode (SCAN, STORE, RECALL, JOB LIST, or MACHINE.)
- Function key will be dimmed to show inactivity if the setting currently
made is incompatible with any copy condition assigned to that key.
- Function key will be void if the job setting assigned to that key is deleted
in Mode Memory.
Touch the Copy tab on the Machine Status Screen to display the copy
Screen.
The Copy Screen will be displayed.
6-8
Basic Job Settings
Touch the desired Function key.
The copy conditions of Mode Memory assigned to that key will resume
on the screen.

6-9
Basic Job Settings
6
6.3
Original Setting
6.3.1
Specifying Original Direction

Specify the direction of the originals placed on ADF or original glass.
This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making double-sided copies with binding position specified or when staple position is
specified.
Originals on ADF:
Originals on platen glass:
Normal
Normal
Left
Left
Upside Down
Upside Down
Right
Right
2
Note
For details, refer to Setting Binding Direction for Duplex Copies on

page 9-13 and Selecting Binding Direction of Originals on page 6-12.
Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
6-10
Basic Job Settings
Touch to highlight the desired original direction key.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Copy Screen.
!
Details
Touch [Recall STD] to restore the initial setting, or touch [Cancel] to

resume the previous setting.

6-11
Basic Job Settings
6
6.3.2
Selecting Binding Direction of Originals

When copying double-sided originals in 2-1 or 2-2 mode, the copied sets will
be exactly the same in page arrangement as the originals.
Use this function to obtain the single- or double-sided copies having the
same edge as page top, from double-sided originals printed upside down on
the reverse side.
2
Note

page 9-13.
Specifications for Binding Direction of Originals:
- Upper Binding is available only in 2-1 or 2-2 copy mode.
- If the machine restores the initial setting, this function will be reset to R&L
Binding.
- The machine is set to match the Original binding direction and Copy
binding direction automatically. For details, refer to 02 Each Function
Setting on page 16-46.
R & L Binding
Upper Binding

6-12
Basic Job Settings
Touch [Upper Binding] to highlight it.

6-13
Basic Job Settings
6
6.3.3
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original)

Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder to copy mixed size
originals.
Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS
mode) or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode).
Specifications for Mixed Original:
- Use ADF.
- Combination of original sizes to be mixed depends on the width of the
ADF original guides. For details, refer to Mixed Original mode on
page 3-12.
APS
AMS
Mixed size originals
6-14
Basic Job Settings
APS mode
Automatically select the paper of the same size as that of the original.
AMS mode
Automatically select magnification ratio to copy onto the same paper in size.

Touch [Mixed Original] to highlight it.
Touch [OK] to return to the Copy Screen.
!
Details
APS is automatically selected on the Copy Screen.

To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Copy Screen to select the desired paper size.
Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

Arrange the mixed size originals aligning the left and rear sides.
2
Note
For details, refer to Positioning originals in Mixed Original mode on

page 5-17.

6-15
Basic Job Settings
6
6.3.4
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded)

Use the Z-Folded mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals.
Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the ADF may function incorrectly.
Specifications for Z-Folded Original:
- Use ADF.
- This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size.
Z-folded original

Touch [Z-Folded] to highlight it.
6-16
Basic Job Settings
!
Details
Touch [Recall STD] to restore the initial setting, or touch Cancel to

Position Z-folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

Normal originals can be set together with the Z-folded original.
2
Note
For details, refer to Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode on

page 5-18.

6-17
Basic Job Settings
6
6.3.5
Feeding Single Original from ADF (Single Feed)

Use the Single Feed mode to copy thick originals or paste-ups to be fed one
sheet at a time in the document feeder.
Copying usually starts after the [Start] key is pressed, however, the machine
manager can set the machine to automatically feed the original one second
after placing the original in the document feeder. (Auto Start)
Specifications for Single Feed:
- Use ADF. Set 1 sheet at a time.
- Auto Start mode is different from the normal Single Feed mode in procedure. Contact your machine manager to check the current setting.
Procedure in normal Single Feed mode

Touch [Single Feed] to highlight it.
!
Details

6-18
Basic Job Settings
Position Single Feed original FACE UP in the document feeder.

-
Position a sheet of the original in

the document feeder, then align
the paper guides to the original.
2
Reminder
Never set more than one thick original

or paste up, otherwise machine trouble
may be caused.
Select additional copy conditions, then press [Start].

The original will be fed and scanned, then the printing job will start in
succession when the machine becomes ready for output.
Procedure in Auto Start mode

Touch [Single Feed] to highlight it.

Memory Scan is automatically highlighted on the Copy Screen.
!
Details


6-19
Basic Job Settings
6
4
Select additional copy conditions, as desired.
Adjust the ADF paper guides.

Without setting the original, adjust
the ADF paper guides according to
the original size to be set.
Position a sheet of original FACE UP

in the document feeder.
The set original will be automatically
fed and scanned.
2
Reminder
Never set more than one original, otherwise machine trouble may be
caused.
Touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory Scan mode (ADF), then press
[Start].
The printing job will start.
6-20
Basic Job Settings
6.3.6
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Custom Size / Tab

Paper)
The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through ADF or
positioned on the original glass (Standard Size mode).
Use Custom Size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or
printing special size originals. Load tabbed copy paper in a tray and use Tab
Paper mode to copy a tabbed original, including the image of the tab part,
onto tabbed copy paper.
Using Tab Paper mode with the Auto Image Shift (Tab Print) function enabled
in the User Setting, the standard-sized original having tab part image printed
on the right edge can be printed properly onto tabbed copy paper by being
shifted 12.5 mm to the right side.
!
Details
Refer to Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray on page 4-11 for details on

loading tabbed copy paper in a tray.
Be sure to make the Paper Setting for the tray loaded with tabbed copy
paper. For details refer to Set Paper Size, Conditions, Air Assist Function
for a Tray on page 12-19.
Use the User Setting mode to specify whether or not to use the Auto Image Shift (Tab Print) function. For details refer to 02 Each Function Setting on page 16-23.
Specifications for Custom Size / Tab Paper:
- Use Full area on the Custom Size mode menu for small originals that cannot be copied in Standard Size mode.
- Tab extension width for tabbed originals: 12.5 mm or less
Tabbed copy paper size and tab extension width can be specified in Paper Setting.
- Using Tab Paper mode with tabbed copy paper loaded in a tray, the
Needless Tab Paper Exit function will function. For details, refer to Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray on page 4-11.


6-21
Basic Job Settings
6
2
Touch [Custom Size] or [Tab Paper].

The popup menu will appear for Custom Size or Tab Paper size setting.
Touch the desired size key.
6-22
Basic Job Settings
Touch [OK] on the popup menu.

The popup menu will disappear.
!
Details


6-23
Basic Job Settings
6
6.4
Memory Scan Mode

Use Memory Scan mode to scan more than 100 originals into memory then
to start a continuous printing job, or to combine images scanned from ADF
and original glass.
Specification for Memory Scan Mode:
- Memory Scan mode is necessarily used in the following functions: Making double-sided copies using original glass, Image Insert, Book Copy,
Program Job, Storing image in Overlay Memory
Make copying selections on the Copy Screen, as desired.
Touch [Memory Scan] to highlight it.

The Memory Scan mode will be activated.
!
Details
[Memory Scan] may already be highlighted depending on the selected

copy conditions.
Position original(s), then press [Start].

Using original glass:
- Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page.
- Repeat this step for all originals.
Using ADF:
- Position originals FACE UP.
If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not
exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first
page.
6-24
Basic Job Settings
!
Details
Memory indicator under the message area of the LCD screen allows you
to check the remaining memory.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [Stop]. For details,
Scanning the job in Memory Scan mode on page 5-26.
When scanning is completed, touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory

Scan mode.
Press [Start].
All the data in memory will be output.
Press [Stop] to suspend the printing job.

6-25
Basic Job Settings
6
6.5
Special Image
6.5.1
Selecting Exposure Level and Adjusting Background

Whiteness
Automatic Exposure (AE) operates with the default settings. It detects the
density of the original image and automatically selects the appropriate exposure for the copy.
Select manual copy density to adjust exposure (density) when originals are
too light or too dark.
Adjust also the background whiteness when copying newspaper or recycled
paper originals.
Light original
Normal
Dark original
2
Note
User Density programs the desired density selected among 16 exposure

levels divided from the darkest level to normal level, and normal level to
the lightest level, respectively.
This setting can be made by the machine manager. (Utility Menu
Screen>02 Function Setting>03 Density Setting>02 User Density Setting)
To recall the programmed density, follow the procedure below.
Density Shift can shift each of nine density levels described below to
three levels lighter or three levels darker.
This function can be set by the machine manager to use in combination
with each of four Enhance modes. For details, refer to 01 Density Shift
for Enhance Mode on page 16-25.
Image Density Selection changes the range of the density level between
the darkest and lightest, so that users can obtain the optimum print result
according to the originals or print object without degrading image quality.
6-26
Basic Job Settings
This setting can be made by the machine manager, and will also be applied to Density Shift for Enhance Mode. For details, refer to 04 Image
Density Selection on page 16-31.
Touch [Darker] to darken, or [Lighter] to lighten the copy image.
Highlight the desired exposure level indicator.

Touch [Normal] to select the middle density level.
When resuming AE, touch [AE].

6-27
Basic Job Settings
6
7
Select the desired background adjustment level.

-
Touch [Special Image].

The Special Image popup menu will be displayed.
Touch [Darker] or [Lighter] in the Background Adjust area to move

the highlighted indication to the desired adjustment level.
Or, touch [Normal] to resume the standard level.
Touch [OK]. The Copy Screen will be restored.
Recall the preset density.

-
Touch [Special Image].

Touch [Preset1] or [Preset2] in the Preset Density area to recall the

desired density setting.
Touch [OK]. The Copy Screen will be restored.
6-28
Basic Job Settings
!
Details


6-29
Basic Job Settings
6
6.5.2
Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance)

Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tones so that the copy
quality more closely matches to that of the original.
Text & Photo Mode

Use this mode to copy an original including both text and photo image.
Low Contrast Mode

Select Low Contrast to darken lightly printed images (e.g., pencil) without
changing background exposure.
Photo Mode
Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will
closely represent the half-tones of the original image.
Text Mode
Use the Text mode when copying a text original. In this mode, text is improved in comparison to using the general mode.
Original
Text&Photo
Photo
Original
Original
Text&Photo
Text&Photo
Low
Contrast
Photo
2
Note
Density Shift can shift each of nine density levels described on the preceding pages to three levels lighter or three levels darker.
This function can be set by the machine manager to use in combination
with each of four Enhance modes. (Utility Menu Screen>02 Function Setting>03 Density Setting>01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode) For details,
refer to 01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode on page 16-25.
6-30
Basic Job Settings
Touch [Special Image] on the Copy Screen.
Touch the desired mode key to highlight it.
!
Details


6-31
Basic Job Settings
6
6.6
Zoom
In the initial settings on the Copy Screen, the magnification is automatically
set at 1.000 (full size).
This section describes how to change the magnification ratio.
6.6.1
To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode

Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.
Close the ADF securely, then press [Reset].

The initial settings are restored. Check that [1.0] is highlighted to indicate that the 1.000 magnification is selected.
!
Details
The initial settings may be altered by the machine manager. For details,
refer to 01 Initial Setting on page 16-39.

Specifying paper size will release 1.000 magnification and set [Auto
Zoom] automatically. In this case, touch [x1.0] to highlight it again.
6-32
Basic Job Settings
6.6.2
To Change Magnification Ratio

The following four modes are provided.
-
Manual Zoom (proportional): 0.250 to 4.000 in 0.001 (0.1%) increments

Manual Zoom (individual): Vertical and horizontal dimensions can be
specified individually from 0.250 to 4.000 in 0.001 (0.1%) increments.
Enlarge/Reduce: Select from the eight ratios (0.500, 0.647, 0.772, 0.785,
1.214, 1.294, 1.545, 2.000) provided on the screen.
Preset Zoom: Select from the three ratios previously programmed.
2
Note
For details, refer to 04 Preset Zoom on page 16-33.
Touch [Zoom] on the Copy Screen.

6-33
Basic Job Settings
6
2
Specify the desired magnification.

-
Manual Zoom (proportional)

Touch the key at the upper left corner in the Manual Zoom area.
Use the screen keypad to enter the desired magnification ratio. The
entered ratio will be displayed on the Copy Screen.
!
Details
If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correct number.

Touching arrow keys + and , will change the ratio in 0.001 (0.1%) steps.
-
Manual Zoom (individual)

Touch the vertical zoom key (the second one in the left side line) in
the Manual Zoom area.
6-34
Basic Job Settings

-
Use the screen keypad to enter the desired vertical magnification

ratio. The entered ratio will be displayed on the Copy Screen.
Touch the horizontal zoom key (the third one in the left side line) in
the Manual Zoom area.
Use the screen keypad to enter the desired horizontal magnification
ratio. The entered ratio will be displayed on the Copy Screen.
!
Details
If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correct number.

Touching arrow keys + and , will change the ratio in 0.001 (0.1%) steps.
-
Enlarge/Reduce
Touch the desired zoom key in the Enlarge/Reduce area.
Preset Zoom
Touch the desired preset zoom key in the Preset Zoom area.

6-35
Basic Job Settings
6
3
!
Details
Touch [Cancel] to resume the previous setting.
6-36
Basic Job Settings
6.7
Copy Mode
The Copy Screen is initially set to 1-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from single-sided originals.
Follow the procedure below to make double-sided copies from the originals
scanned from the document feeder or from the original glass, and also to
make single-sided copies from double-sided originals.
6.7.1
Making Double-Sided Copies Using ADF

Select the copy mode according to the original type (single-sided or doublesided).
Specifications of 1-2 or 2-2 Copy Mode Using ADF:
- Position originals according to the original direction icon on the Copy
Screen.
- The double-sided copies can be arranged upside down on the back pages.
- The normal double-sided copies (having the same edge as page top) can
be made from double-sided originals printed upside down on the back
pages.
binding direction automatically. For details, refer to 02 Each Function
2-2 Copying
Duplex copy
1-2 Copying
Duplex copy
Single-sided original

6-37
Basic Job Settings
6
1
Touch [1-2] or [2-2] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.
Specify other conditions for making double-sided copies.

-
Selecting the original set direction

Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen to display the Special
Original popup menu.
Touch the desired original direction key to highlight it.

To make normal double-sided copies (having the same edge as
page top) from double-sided originals printed upside down on the
back pages, touch [Upper Binding] to highlight it.
6-38
Basic Job Settings
!
Details

For details, refer to Specifying Original Direction on page 6-10.
For details, Selecting Binding Direction of Originals on page 6-12.
-
Selecting the binding mode

Touch [Output Application] on the Copy Screen to display the Output Application popup menu.
Touch the desired binding direction key to highlight it. To make

double-sided copies arranged upside down on the back pages,
touch [Upper].
2
Note

page 9-13.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder

Set originals according to the original direction icon displayed on the
Copy Screen.

6-39
Basic Job Settings
6
6.8
Making Double-Sided Copies Using Original Glass

Use the original glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.
Specifications for Making Double-Sided Copies Using Original Glass:
- Use the Memory Scan mode.
Screen.
- The double-sided copies can be arranged upside down on the back pages.
- For details, refer to Unsuitable ADF Originals on page 3-10.
binding direction automatically. For details, 02 Each Function Setting
on page 16-46.
Specify copy conditions for making double-sided copies.

-
Selecting the original set direction

Original popup menu.

2
Note
6-40
Basic Job Settings
Selecting the binding mode

Touch [Output Application] on the Copy Screen to display the
Output Application popup menu.
Touch the desired binding direction key to highlight it. To make

double-sided copies arranged upside down on the back pages,
touch [Upper].
2
Note

page 9-13.
Position original FACE DOWN on the original glass.

Open the ADF. Position original FACE DOWN according to the original
direction icon displayed on the Copy Screen, then close the ADF.
Be sure to start from the first page.
2
Reminder
If Book Copy, No Image Area Erase, Auto Detect mode of Repeat, or Image Centring is selected, keep the ADF open throughout the scanning
procedure.

6-41
Basic Job Settings
6
3
Touch [1-2] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.
The [Memory Scan] key will be automatically highlighted on the screen.
2
Reminder
DO NOT press [Reset] at this point, otherwise the Memory Scan mode
will be released to disable the copier from scanning the original placed
Press [Start] to scan.

The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into
memory.
Replace the original on the original glass with the back side image original, then press [Start].
When all originals are scanned, touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory
Scan mode.
!
Details
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [Stop]. For details, refer to Scanning the job in Memory Scan mode on page 5-26.
Press [Start] to print.

All the data in memory will be output.
6-42
Basic Job Settings
!
Details
Press [Stop] to suspend the printing job. For details, Batch printing is in
progress on page 5-27.

6-43
Basic Job Settings
6
6.8.1
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals

Use ADF and select 2-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from double-sided originals.
Specifications for Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals:
Screen.
- The normal single-sided copies (having the same edge as page top) can
be made from double-sided originals printed upside down on the back
pages.
2-1 Copying
Simplex copy
Touch [2-1] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.
6-44
Basic Job Settings
Specify copy conditions for making copies from double-sided originals.

-
Selecting the original set direction and binding direction

Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen to display the Special Original popup menu.

To make normal double-sided copies (having the same edge as
page top) from double-sided originals printed upside down on the
back pages, touch [Upper Binding] to highlight it.
2
Note

For details, refer to Selecting Binding Direction of Originals on
page 6-12.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder

Set originals according to the original direction icon displayed on the
Copy Screen.

6-45
Basic Job Settings
6
6.9
Paper Tray Setting

Each paper tray has been preset with paper size, paper type/weight, and air
assist on/off by machine manager.
Paper Size
The machine manager has been set each tray to detect the standard paper
size when loaded or exclusively to accommodate a specific size. (non-standard size, wide size, or tabbed paper size)
The tray specified as standard size or tabbed paper size allows APS (Automatic Paper Selection), AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection), and Rotation to function, and the tray specified as wide size allow AMS and Rotation.
The size selection for each tray can be altered temporarily from the Copy
Screen.
Paper Type/Weight
The machine manager specifies various paper conditions (Type, Weight, Coloured Paper, Hole-Punch, Both Sides Adjustment) for each tray.
The selection for each can also be altered temporarily from the Copy Screen
to make a copy using different type of paper.
Air Assist On/Off
For details of this function, contact your machine manager.
The following describes how to use APS, AMS, Rotation functions, and how
to temporarily change the paper size and other conditions specified for each
tray by machine manager.
6-46
Basic Job Settings
6.9.1
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS)

APS detects the original size placed on the ADF or original glass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected.
!
Details
The original sizes to be detected from the ADF or original glass are previously determined. For details, refer to ADF Originals on page 3-12.
The original sizes to be detected from the ADF or original glass can be
changed by the machine manager. For details, refer to 07 Size Setting
on page 17-35.
The machine manager can designate the tray or paper condition incompatible with APS. For details, refer to 02 Each Function Setting on
page 16-46.
The machine manager can deactivate APS when original is set in the ADF
or on the original glass.
Specifications for APS:
- APS is incompatible with AMS, however, Rotation is available.
- APS will not select the tray of the size specified as non-standard or wide
size.
Touch [Auto Paper Select] at lower right corner of the Copy Screen.
Select additional copy conditions as desired, then position original(s).

6-47
Basic Job Settings
6
3
Press [Start].
Scanned image will be printed on the paper size automatically selected.
If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will
be performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate
paper.
!
Details
The APS may not function for the tray of the selected size due to the paper type/weight specified for that tray. Contact your machine manager.
See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio
and copy paper size.
6-48
Original size
Paper size
Magnification
Magnification
Paper size
Basic Job Settings
6.9.2
To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS)

When a paper size is specified on the touch panel, an appropriate reduction
or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically according to the original
size detected from the ADF or the original glass.
Specifications for AMS:
- AMS is incompatible with APS, however, Rotation is available.
- AMS will not function if the tray of the size specified as non-standard is
selected.
Touch a tray key on the Copy Screen to select the desired paper size.
Selected tray key will be highlighted, and the Auto Zoom key will also
be highlighted.
!
Details
For details, refer to To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode on page 6-32.
Select additional copy conditions as desired, then position original(s).

6-49
Basic Job Settings
6
3
Press [Start].
Scanned image will be printed on the specified paper size in the magnification ratio automatically selected.
See the table below for the original size, copy paper size, and magnification ratio automatically selected.
Paper size
Original size
6-50
Basic Job Settings
6.9.3
Rotation
This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original documents onto size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction.
!
Details
The machine manager can set this function ON, or to operate when APS,
AMS or reduce functions. For details, refer to 05 Image Auto Rotation
on page 17-133.
Specifications for Rotation:
- Copy paper sizes: A4, B5
- Original sizes: A3, B4, A4, B5
Original
Copy
Original
Copy
Rotation copying
Rotation copying
A4R
A3
A4
B5R
B5
A4
B4
Normal copying
Normal copying
A4R
A4R
B5
A4
B5
B5R
B5R
The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.

Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.

6-51
Basic Job Settings
6
1
Touch [Rotation Off] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.
When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Copy Screen will
disappear to indicate that this function is cancelled.
Touch to deselect [Rotation Off] to resume this function.

When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on the
screen.
6-52
Basic Job Settings
6.9.4
Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper Presetting)

Each paper tray has been preset with paper size, paper type/weight, and air
assist on/off by machine manager.
If you want to use another paper than any loaded in the trays, follow the procedure below to temporarily change the setting of the tray to be used.
!
Details
When starting a job after a setting change has been made in paper
weight, it may take a certain period of time before copying operation becomes available due to the fixing temperature adjustment.
On the Copy Screen, check the tray setting for each tray.
Each key displays paper size, paper weight, paper type, and paper
amount remaining in the tray.

6-53
Basic Job Settings
6
2
Touch Paper Presetting.
The Paper Presetting popup menu will be displayed.
Select the tray to change the setting temporarily.
Touch the desired tray key on the popup menu.
6-54
Basic Job Settings
Change the paper size.

Select one of the following four items.
Standard Size, Custom Size, Wide Size Paper, Tab Paper
-
Setting Standard Size

Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Standard Size].
Touch the desired size key.

Touch [OK] to complete the setting.
Setting Custom Size

Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Custom Size].
Touch the vertical/horizontal size key, then use the screen keypad
or arrow keys + and , to enter the desired size.
Entered size should fall within 182 mm ~ 324 mm in vertical dimen-

6-55
Basic Job Settings
6
-
sion, 140 mm ~ 460 mm in horizontal dimension.

Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired
image position.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting
!
Details
The smallest size of the custom size can be changed. Contact your service representative for details.
-
Setting Wide Size Paper

Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Wide Size Paper.]
Touch the desired wide size key to highlight it.

Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired
image position.
Touch [Input Size] to display the Size Input Screen.
Touch the vertical size key, then use the screen keypad or arrow
keys + and , to enter the vertical size.
The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical
size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size,
to a maximum of 324 mm.
Touch the horizontal size key, then use the screen keypad or arrow
keys + and , to enter the horizontal size.
The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal
size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size,
to a maximum of 460 mm.
6-56
Basic Job Settings
!
Details
When setting wide size, be sure to specify the precise dimensions of paper to be used. The dimensions of the wide size selected in step (2) are
not correctly set in the initial setting.
-
Touch [Select Size] to return to the Select Size Screen.


6-57
Basic Job Settings
6
-
Setting Tab Paper

Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Tab Paper].
Touch the desired tabbed paper size key to highlight it.

If setting the custom tabbed paper size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Size Setting Screen.
Touch the vertical/horizontal/index size key, then use the screen
keypad or arrow keys + and , to enter the desired size.
Touch [Number of Tabs] to display the Number of Tabs Screen,
then use the screen keypad or arrow keys + and , to enter the
number of tabs. Setting range is from 1 to 15.
6-58
Basic Job Settings
Change the paper setting.

Change the paper setting of the tray either by selecting the one previously registered or by programing a new setting.
-
Selecting the paper setting

Touch [Type/Weight].
Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desired paper type/weight

from the list, then touch the key to highlight it.

6-59
Basic Job Settings
6
-
Programing a new setting

Touch [Change].
Touch [Type], then select the desired paper type key.

!
Details
For details, refer to Paper Setting Outlines on page 12-3.
6-60
Basic Job Settings

-
Touch [Weight].
Touch the desired paper weight key, then touch [OK].

-
Touch [Coloured Paper].

6-61
Basic Job Settings
6
Touch the desired colour key, then touch [OK].
- Touch [Hole-Punch].
Touch [With Punch Hole] if the paper has punch holes, or touch [Non
Punch Holes] if not, then touch [OK].
-
Touch [Both Sides Adj].
Touch [Front or Back] to select the printed side, select the adjustment
item (vertical zoom, horizontal zoom, vertical shift, or horizontal shift),
and then touch + <--> - to specify the value to be positive or negative.
Use the screen keypad or arrow keys + and , to enter the desired adjustment value, then touch [OK].
6-62
Basic Job Settings
2
Note
For details,refer to Paper Setting Outlines on page 12-3.
Touch [Close] on the Paper Presetting popup menu.
The tray with the paper setting changed will be selected on the screen,
and all paper level indicators will disappear from the tray keys.
However, the name indicated on the tray key will not be changed.
Load copy paper into the tray with the setting change made.
!
Details
The changed setting will be cleared when copying job is completed using
that tray.
If [Reset] is pressed or Auto Reset functions before completion of the job,
the changed setting will also be cleared.

6-63
Basic Job Settings
6
6.10
Reserve Job Setting

The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is in
process. When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately.
Service can set the machine to disable this function. Contact your service
representative, if desired.
Specifications for Reserve:
- Job settings: Max. 100
- The reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan the
current job, and also available anytime while printing the current job.
Display the Copy Screen with the message Ready to set reserve Job.
When scanning job is started:
The above popup menu will be displayed.

Touch Yes. The Copy Screen for setting reserve job will be displayed.
2
Note
Touching [No] will return to the Machine Status Screen. In this case,
touching [COPY] tab will display the Copy Screen and allows you to make
the reserve job setting.
If the machine is initially set to display the Copy Screen after scanning job
is started, the above popup menu will provide only the Close key. Touching [Close] will also display the Copy Screen to make the reserve job setting.
6-64
Basic Job Settings
While printing job is in progress:
Select copy conditions for the reserve job as desired, position original(s), then press [Start].
-
The message Printing in progress is displayed in the message

area of the Machine Status Screen.
Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen with the message
Ready to set reserve Job.
Repeat steps 1 and 2. Up to 100 reserve jobs can be entered.

To check and operate the reserve jobs, touch [JOB LIST] tab to display the Job List Screen. For details, refer to Overview of Job List
Screen on page 7-3.
Printing of the reserve job will automatically start.

6-65
Basic Job Settings
If paper setting has been changed for a reserve job, a popup menu will be
displayed, prompting you to replace copy paper in the designated tray.
Load copy paper specified for that reserve job into the designated tray, touch
[Change], then press [Start].
When trouble occurs on a reserve job, refer to If MACHINE Tab Blinks in Orange on page 20-8.
6-66
Job Management
Copier
Job Management
Job Management
7.1
Overview of Job List Screen
The Job List Screen allows you to check/operate the following items.
- Reserved job
- Output History
- Send History
- Incomplete
- Suspended (The letters on the key turn red if any suspended job remains.)
- Spool
!
Details
The jobs referred here include printer jobs and scanner jobs.
Follow the procedure below to display the Job List Screen.
Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen.

The Job List Screen will be displayed.
Touch the desired key at the bottom of the screen.

See the following pages for details of each subsequent screen.
Touch other tab key to exit the Job List Screen.

7-3
Job Management
7
7.2
Job Operation on Job List Screen
7.2.1
To Check/Control Reserved Jobs

Use this function to display all the reserve jobs as a list.
The list includes following information.
- Job No.: consecutive numbers of both copy and print jobs
- User Name: user who transmitted the job
- Mode: Copy or Printer
- Status: Printing or Reserved (current status of the job)
- Sheets: max. 4-digit page count
- Sets: max. 4-digit set count
- Pages To Go: max. 4-digit pages to be output (Sheets x Sets = Pages To
Go)
- Minute(s): time required for completing each job (minute)
Follow the procedure below to check the settings, change the output order,
and suspend/delete/stop reserved jobs.
Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch Reserved Job if
not highlighted.
Check the status of the reserved jobs.

Touch [Next] to scroll, if 8 or more jobs are entered.
7-4
Job Management
Select the desired job, then select the job operation.
To specify the next job to be printed:
Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Print Nex]t.
The highlighted reserve job will be moved just under the current print
job.
!
Details
This will not function if printing operation has already been started for the
selected job.
To change the order of jobs:
Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Priority].
The highlighted job will be advanced by one in printing order unless the
job preceding the selected one is already in progress.
!
Details
If printing order cannot be changed for the selected job, a message will
be displayed for information.
To suspend reserve job:
Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Suspend].
Printing operation for the selected job will be suspended and kept
stored in memory.
!
Details
In this case, the letters Suspended on the key will turn red at the bottom
of the Job List Screen to prompt you that a suspended job remains in the
machine. Touch [Suspended] to resume printing operation. For details,
refer to To Check/Operate Suspended Jobs on page 7-9.
%
To clear reserve job:

Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Delete].
Touch Yes on the popup menu to clear the selected job.
All the data of the selected job will be cleared.
To check the settings of reserve job:

Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch [Details].
Check the settings of the selected job on the screen. Touch Close to
return to the Job List Screen.

7-5
Job Management
7
7.2.2
To Display Output History

Use this function to display output history as a list.
- Result: Complete or Cancel
- Time: time when output operation was executed
Follow the procedure below to check the settings of output jobs.
Touch JOB LIST tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Output History].
Check the status of the output jobs.

Touch the desired job key, then touch [Details].

-
Detailed settings of the selected job will be displayed.

Touch [Close] to return to the previous screen.
7-6
Job Management
7.2.3
To Display Send History

Use this function to display send history as a list.
- Mode: E-Mail / FTP / PC / HDD
- Address: address to which the data was transmitted
- Result: Complete or Cancel
- Time: time when data transmission was executed
Follow the procedure below to check the settings of transmitted jobs.
Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Send History].
Check the status of the transmitted jobs.


-


7-7
Job Management
7
7.2.4
To Check Incomplete Jobs

Use this function to display incomplete jobs as a list.
- Cause: Memory Full, Cancel, etc.(cause for which the job was not completed)
Follow the procedure below to check the settings of noncomplete jobs.
Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Incomplete].
Check the status of the incomplete jobs.


-

7-8
Job Management
7.2.5
To Check/Operate Suspended Jobs

Use this function to display all suspended jobs as a list.
- Status: Suspended or Printing (current status of the job)
- Pages To Go: max. 4-digit pages to be output (Sheets x Sets = Pages To
Go)
- Minute(s): time required for completing each job (minute)
Follow the procedure below to check the settings of each job and release/
collectively release the suspended jobs.
Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Suspended].
The letters Suspended on the key appears red to prompt you that a
suspended job remains in the machine.
Check the status of the suspended jobs.


7-9
Job Management
7
2
To output suspended job:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Release].
The selected job will be output according to the current printing order.
!
Details
To check the printing order, touch [Reserved Job] to display the reserved
job list.
To output all suspended jobs:
Touch [All Release], then touch [Yes] on the popup menu.

All suspended jobs will be output according to the current printing order.
!
Details
To check the printing order, touch [Reserved Job] to display the reserved
job list.
%
To check the settings of suspended job:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Details].
Check the settings of the selected job on the screen. Touch [Close] to
return to the Job List Screen.
7-10
Job Management
7.2.6
To Check/Control Spool Jobs

Use this function to display spool jobs as a list.
- Mode: Wait for RIP or Receiving (current status of the spool job)
Follow the procedure below to change the output order or delete the spool
jobs.
Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Spool].
Check the status of the spool jobs.

To specify the next job to be printed:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Print Next].
The highlighted job will be moved just under the current print job.
!
Details
This will not function if printing operation has already been started for the
selected job.

7-11
Job Management
7
To change the order of jobs:
Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch Priority.

The highlighted job will be advanced by one in printing order unless the
job preceding the selected one is already in progress.
!
Details
If printing order cannot be changed for the selected job, a message will
be displayed for information.
To clear spool job:
Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch Delete.

Touch Yes on the popup menu to clear the selected job.
!
Details
All the data of the selected job will be cleared.
7-12
Applications
Copier
Applications
Applications
8.1
Copy Conditions Incompatible with Applications
Sheet Insertion
Insertion using PI
Tab Paper
Custom Size
Z-Folded Original
Mixed Original
Original Setting
Text
Photo (*5)
Low Contrast
Preset Density
AE
Manual Density
Rotation
Special Image
ZOOM
1.000 Magnification
AMS
APS
2-2
2-1
1-2
1-1

with Applications
Front Cover
Back Cover
Chapter
Combination
x
x
Booklet
Adhesive Binding
OHP Interleave
Image Insert
Book Copy
Neg. Pos. Reverse

Repeat
Repeat (Auto) (*4)
Frame Erasure
Fold Erasure
Image Centering
Image Shift
Reduce & Shift

x
z
x
x
x
x
x
x
All-Image Area
Stamp
Page Numbering
Set Numbering
Date
Watermark
Watermark/Numbering
Annotation
Overlay Memory
Overlay (*3)

8-3
Applications
Overlay
Overlay Memory
Annotation
Watermark/Numbering
Watermark
Date
Set Numbering
Page Numbering
Stamp
All-Image Area
Reduce & Shift
Image Shift
Image Centering
Fold Erasure
Frame Erasure
Repeat (Auto)
Repeat
Neg. Pos. Reverse
Book Copy
Image Insert
Booklet
Combination
Chapter
Back Cover
Front Cover
Insertion using PI
Sheet Insertion
OHP Interleave
u
u
x
x
x
x
x
*4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
8-4
x
x
x
x
*1
*1
x
x
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
z
*1
x
x
*1
*1
*1
u
x
*1
x
x
*1
z
z
z
z
Applications
Face Down
Hole-Punch (Top)
Hole-Punch (Left)
Hole-Punch (Right)
Gate (Inside Print)
Insertion using PI
2 Stapling (Right)
2 Stapling (Left)
2 Stapling (Top)
Adhesive Binding
Sheet Insertion
Z-Fold
x
Collated (Rotation)
x
Uncollated
x
Booklet
Collated (Offset)
Combination
Face Up
Output Application

Applications
Front Cover
Back Cover
Chapter
OHP Interleave
Image Insert
Book Copy
Neg. Pos. Reverse
Repeat
Repeat (Auto) (*4)
Frame Erasure
Fold Erasure
Image Centering
Image Shift
Reduce & Shift
All-Image Area
Stamp
Page Numbering
Set Numbering
Date
Watermark
Watermark/Numbering
Annotation
Overlay Memory
Overlay (*3)

8-5
Fold&Staple
Multi Centre
Trimmming (*7)
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
*6
*6
*6
*6
x
*6
*6
*6
*6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
*7
*7
x
x
*7
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
8-6
x
Perfect biding (Body Set)
Tandem
HDD (*2)
Upper Binding
N to 1
1 to N
8
Applications
Output Application
Applications
Description
None
Compatible
Output message
*1
2 in 1 and 2 Repeat are available. (Grayed out if not.)
*2
Limited to Job Store function in Copy mode.
*3
*4
Selecting Auto in Repeat, Non-Image Area Erase will also be selected automatically and cannot be released.
*5
*6
Back cover using cover paper is unavailable.
*7
Available only when Booklet is selected.

8-7
Applications
8
8.2
To Use Application Function

Follow the procedure below to display the Application popup menu and select the desired copying features.
Touch [COPY] tab on the Machine Status Screen to display the Copy
Screen.
Touch [Application] on the Copy Screen.
The Application popup menu will be displayed on the touch panel.
8-8
Applications
!
Details
When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch a

function key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the
appropriate settings.
If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear
dimmed.
Touch [Bookmark] on the subsequent screen, if desired, so that the
screen may be directly accessed from the Check Screen to change the
setting you made.
-
To restore the original copying conditions, touch [Cancel].

To cancel all the selected functions with the setting made for each
remained, touch [All Off].
To resume the initial setting, press [Reset].
Touch [OK] on the Application popup menu.

Selections will be completed and the Copy Screen will be restored,
with the selection listed in the area under the Application key.
2
Reminder
With the Copy Screen displayed, you can press [Start] to perform the operation.
!
Details
Selected functions can be directly accessed from the Application area of

the Copy Screen to change or clear the setting you made.
To cancel the selection of each application function, touch [Function
OFF] on the subsequent screen.

8-9
Applications
8
8.3
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet Insertion)

Use Sheet Insertion in print mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or
separator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers.
The covers and insertions can be fed from different tray source for each, and
also available from Post inserter if Folding unit FD-501 option is installed.
Specifications for Sheet Insertion:
- Use ADF.
- Trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions should have the
same paper size loaded. AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is automatically selected.
- Max. insert sheets: 26 locations, from 1~999, including front and back
covers
- Post inserter is available as additional front/back cover tray source. In
this case, Post inserter will feed the first (front) cover and the last (back)
cover.
- Post inserter is also available as additional insertion tray source.
- The covers fed from Post inserter cannot be printed.
8-10
Applications
8
FRONT COVER PRINTED
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
4
23
56
FRONT COVER BLANK
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
SURVEYOR S 1
REPORT
Copies
Originals
9 10
78
56
34
12
9 10
78
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
34
12
56
9
7 8 10
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
PRINTED SHEET INSERTION

SURVEYOR S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
56
2
4
SURVEYOR S 1
REPORT
Originals
9 10
78
BACK COVER BLANK
Copies
Originals
56
Copies
Originals
BACK COVER PRINTED

9 10
78
56
34
12
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
34
12
9 10
78
56
34
12
9 10
78
BLANK SHEET INSERTION

SURVEYOR S
REPORT
Copies
56
Copies
Originals
10
89
7
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
34
12
9 10
78
56
34
12
2
SURVEYOR S 1
REPORT
Originals
6
45
78
9 10
Copies
Combination samples:
FRONT & BACK COVERS PRINTED
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK
AND PRINTED SHEET INSERTION
AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
2
1
Originals
23
SURVEYOR S 1
REPORT
89
56
7
10
Copies
SURVEYOR S
REPORT
9 10
78
56
34
12
Originals
2
SURVEYOR S 1
REPORT
6
45
78
9 10
Copies
Load regular sheets, insertion sheets and covers into any tray.
When using the Post inserter, load covers or insertion sheets into the
Post inserter tray.
2
Reminder
Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back cover, and insertions
have the same paper size loaded.
Check the tray information on the Machine Status Screen or Copy Screen
and use the specified paper; otherwise machine trouble may occur.
To use any other paper type/size than the specified paper, touch [Paper
Presetting] on the Copy Screen to change the setting temporarily.
8-11
Applications
8
2
2
Reminder
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the ADF securely, then
press [Reset].
Touch [Sheet Insertion] on the Application popup menu.
The Sheet Insertion Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired cover mode.
If no cover is desired, proceed to the next step.
8-12
Applications
%
8
To insert a front cover: Touch [Front Cover].
The Front Cover Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired front cover mode, copy mode (Simplex/Duplex), and
tray paper to be used.
To use covers loaded in the Post inserter, touch [Cover] and select the
tray to be used. If both tray cover and post inserter cover are specified,
the post inserter front cover will be the first page.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the previous screen.
%
To insert a back cover: Touch [Back Cover].

The Back Cover Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired back cover mode, copy mode (Simplex/Duplex), and tray
paper to be used.
8-13
Applications
To use covers loaded in the Post inserter, touch [Cover] and select the tray
to be used. If both tray cover and post inserter cover are specified, the post
inserter back cover will be the last page.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the previous screen.
To insert the insertion sheets: Touch [Insertion Sheets].
The Insertion Sheets Screen will be displayed.
Enter the desired insertion type setting.
The Set 01 key is active to be ready for the first insertion type setting.
Select the desired insertion mode (Print/Blank), copy mode (Simplex/
Duplex), and tray paper to be used.
8-14
Applications
Enter the page number.
Touch [Insert Page Setting], then use the touch panel keypad to enter
the page number of insertion location. Use , (comma) between pages, or - (hyphen) for consecutive pages.
To delete the last entered number, touch [Delete]. To clear all the page
entry, touch [Clear].
!
Details
If p 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p.

4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.
2
Note
The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically.

Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the
screen.
When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count,
it will be ignored.
Touch [Fix] to complete the page entry. The Set 01 setting is fixed and
the Set 02 key will be active.
To change the insertion type, set the new one and enter the page
number.

8-15
Applications
!
Details
If the same page number has been entered in Set 02 and Set 03 for example, the setting of later number (Set 03) will take priority.
When all settings are completed, touch [OK] on the Sheet Insertion
Screen.
The Application popup menu will be restored.
!
Details
To clear all the settings, touch [Clear All].

To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].
To cancel the function without clearing the setting made, touch [Function
OFF].

The Copy Screen will be restored.
8-16
Applications
8.4
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)

Chapter is used with ADF in 1-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages
on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve the
presentation of double-sided copies.
To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.
Specifications for Chapter:
- Use ADF.
- Max. title pages: 30 sheets, from 1 ~ 999
- The chapter page can be copied on the sheet from another tray source.
(Print insertion)
- Use Stamp together with this function to print chapter number onto
chapter page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermark numbering.
1-sided originals
Copies in
Chapter mode
Title pages
Title pages
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-17
Applications
8
2
Touch [Chapter] on the Application popup menu.
The Chapter Screen will be displayed.
Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each title
page.
Touch [Set] after each entry to move to the next key. To set more than
15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete]. The entered number will be
deleted.
8-18
Applications
!
Details
Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the

screen.
Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are
entered out of sequence.
When a page number is larger than the
total original page count, insertion occurs as the last page of the document.
2
Note
Touch [Booklet] on the Chapter Setting

Screen to use this function.
To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch [Print
Insertion] on the screen.
In this case, you can touch [Insertion Tray] to change the currently selected paper tray displayed on the screen.
When all entries are made, touch [OK].

!
Details
To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel].

OFF].


8-19
Applications
8
8.5
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)

Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto
one sheet of copy paper (2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1).
Specifications for Combination:
- Use ADF. (Use Memory Scan mode if original glass is desired for scanning originals.)
- AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be
selected.)
4 in1 copying
Original
2 in1 copying
8 in1 copying
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Combination] on the Application popup menu.
8-20
Applications
8
The Combination Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired Combination mode.
Touch [2 in 1], [4 in 1] or [8 in 1] in the desired order area, referring to

the illustration on the following page.
Touch [OK].
!
Details

OFF].

AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the
one that is set and displayed on the Copy Screen, touch the desired
tray key.

8-21
Applications
8
6
Select the desired original direction.

Original popup menu. Touch to select the desired original direction key,
then touch [OK] to return to the Copy Screen.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
Press [Start].
!
Details
Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode.
Original
Layout
Horizontal order
2 in 1
4 in 1
Vertical order
8 in 1
4 in1
8 in 1
Portrait type
Landscape type
8-22
Applications
8.6
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)

Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of
paper. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged
in booklet format in correct order.
If the machine is equipped with Saddle stitcher SD-501 option, folded, stapled, and/or trimmed booklets can be made.
If the machine is equipped with Folding unit FD-501 option, Adhesive Binding is available together with Folding mode.
Specifications for Booklet:
- Use ADF. (Use Memory Scan mode if original glass is desired for scanning originals.)
- Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in
2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.
- Trays for copy paper and front/back covers should have the same paper
size loaded.
- AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size.
1-sided originals
Booklet copying
Magazine binding
Adhesive binding
2-sided originals
Load Copy Paper.

Load the desired copy paper size in a tray.
When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover With Copy Sheet or Cover
With Blank Sheet), load the same size paper in any other tray unless it
is specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type.

8-23
Applications
8
2
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Booklet] on the Application popup menu.
Touch to highlight the desired Booklet mode key.
When a cover sheet is required, touch [Cover Tray Select] to select

the cover sheet tray source.
Touch [Left binding] or [Right binding] if you want to change the
output order.
8-24
Applications
Touch [OK].
!
Details

OFF].
2
Note
The Utility Menu Screen provides the setting to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet
with Page Numbering in Stamp.

AMS is selected automatically.
Select the tray in which you loaded copy paper in step 1.

To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper
size.
Select the 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode.

If the copier is equipped with FD-501, Folding output mode is available.
10
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder, then press [Start].
2
Reminder
Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in

2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.

8-25
Applications
8
8.7
Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave)

Use the OHP Interleave function in 1-1 or 2-1 mode to copy onto overhead
projection transparent films, and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with
each copied transparent film.
In the Interleave Blank mode, a blank interleaf sheet is output with each
transparent film to keep the film material from sticking together.
In the Interleave Copy mode, a copied interleaf sheet is output with each
transparent film to provide reference during a presentation, a medium for
photocopying, and a set for filing or inserting into a binder.
Specifications for OHP Interleave:
- Load transparency films in Tray 4.
- Print quantity: 1
- Finisher cannot be used.
- AMS is automatically selected.
Blank interleaf sheets Copied interleaf sheets

Transparent films
Transparent films
Original
Interleave
Blank mode
Interleave
Copy mode
Set transparent films into Tray 4.

Touch [Paper Presetting] on the Copy Screen to specify the Tray 4 paper type to OHP.
2
Reminder
Do not load transparent films in any tray other than Tray 4; otherwise machine trouble may occur.
When interleaf sheet is needed, load copy paper in any other tray to
match the size of transparent films.
8-26
Applications
Touch [OHP Interleave] on the Application popup menu.
Select the desired OHP Interleave mode, then touch [OK].
!
Details

OFF].

8-27
Applications
8
6

!
Details
AMS is selected automatically.

To release AMS, select the desired magnification.
Print quantity is already set to 1. You cannot enter any other quantity.
Touch to select the tray loaded with transparent films.
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN

Press [Start].
8-28
Applications
8.8
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)

Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the original
glass, such as photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from the document feeder. Then, output the combined images
as a finished set.
The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in
the document feeder.
Specifications for Image Insert:
- Use ADF and original glass.
- Max. image insert: 30 locations, from p. 1 to p. 999
1-sided originals
placed on ADF
2-sided originals
placed on ADF
Insertion originals
on original glass
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-29
Applications
8
2
Touch [Image Insert] on the Application popup menu.
The Image Insert Screen will be displayed.
Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number.
Touch [Set] after each entry to move to the next key.

When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move
to the next page.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete]. The entered page
number will be deleted.
8-30
Applications
!
Details
Entering Page Numbers

For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned images will be inserted as follows:
The first scanned image will be inserted after page 2.
The second scanned image will be inserted directly after the first scanned
Image insertion.
The third scanned image will be inserted after page 6.
2
Note
When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as the last page.
Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of
sequence.
Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that location.
Option
Touch [Booklet] on the Image Insert Screen to use this function.
When all page number entries are made, touch [OK].

!
Details

OFF].

The Memory Scan key on the Copy Screen appears highlighted to
show that the Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.
Scan the document feeder images

Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.

8-31
Applications
8
8
Press [Start].
The originals positioned in the document feeder will be scanned into
memory.
Scan the original glass images.

Open the document feeder.
Position an original FACE DOWN on the original glass, then close the
document feeder.
2
Reminder
PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO PAGINATION.
10
Press [Start].
11
Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.
2
Note
Memory overflow may occur during scanning.

Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you
contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in
your machine.
12
Touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory Scan mode.
13
Press [Start].
The copier will start printing when ready for output.
8-32
Applications
8.9
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book

Copy)
The Book Copy mode performs image division on the original image. Use this
function to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two sheets in 1-1 or 21 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one sheet in 1-2 or 2-2 mode.
The following three modes can be selected from the Book Copy Screen:
- Full Scan mode
Image division starts from the first scan.
- Front Cover + Full Scan mode
Image division starts from the second scan, after the first scan copies
normally.
- Front/Back Cover + Full Scan mode
Image division starts from the third scan, after the first and second scan
copy normally.
Specifications for Book Copy
- Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.
- Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R
Set original
1-1/2-1 mode
1-2/2-2 mode
Touch Application on the Copy Screen.

When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the ADF securely,
then press [Reset].

8-33
Applications
8
2
Touch [Book Copy] on the Application popup menu.
The Book Copy Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired Book Copy mode.
Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
Touch [Left Binding] or [Right Binding] to select the output order according to the original pagination.
2
Note
Option
Touch [Booklet] on the Book Copy Screen to use this function.
8-34
Applications
Touch [OK].
!
Details

OFF].

APS and AMS are automatically released, and the Memory Scan key
appears highlighted to show that the Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.
Select the desired copy mode and magnification.
!
Details
Available paper sizes are A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, and B5R.
When selecting Full scan mode and scanning from the original glass, select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.
APS and AMS are released and 1.000 magnification is selected automatically. Change the magnification manually, if desired.
Position original(s).
When using original glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWN
with document feeder kept open.
When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP.
For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Full scan and Front/
Back Cover + Full scan mode, see the description on the following
page.
10

8-35
Applications
8
11
2
Reminder
When using original glass, No Image Area Erase and Image Centering are
automatically selected.
DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.
12
Touch [Memory Scan] to exit the Memory Scan mode.
13
Press [Start].
The copier will start printing when ready for output.
8-36
Applications
Scanning Original for Cover

Use original glass for scanning original for cover.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the document feeder.

Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the original glass.
Press [Start] to start scanning.
When Front/Back Cover + Full scan is selected, scan original for back
cover according to the above steps 2 and 3.
5. Use original glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning body
text originals.
To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from
the first page.
6. Press [Start] to start scanning.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals.
Front cover + Facing pages

Scan from
first page
Copies
Front/Back cover + Facing pages
Scan from
first page
Copies
Front cover + Facing pages
Scan front cover
Scan body text
Copies
Front/Back cover + Facing pages
Copies
Scan front cover Scan back cover

Scan body text
8-37
Applications
8
2
Note
Memory overflow may occur during scanning.

When using original glass, No Image Area Erase and Image Centering are
automatically selected.
DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.
8-38
Applications
8.10
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job

(Program Job)
In the ordinary Memory Scan mode, the combined features selected for the
job are applied to all originals to be scanned. In the Program Job mode, you
may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set
(referred to as JOB), then output them all as a complete set.
Specifications for Program Job:
- Max. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job.
- Once specified, paper size and the paper type/size setting cannot be
changed for another JOB.
- Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB.
The last setting made will be applied to all JOBs.
- Program Job settings cannot be stored in Job Memory.
Original A
Original B
Original C
Copied set
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-39
Applications
8
2
Touch [Program Job] on the Application popup menu.
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

The Memory Scan key on the Copy Screen appears highlighted to
show that the Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.
Select the desired copy conditions.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on

the original glass.
If the number of document feeder originals exceeds 100, divide them
into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block
with the first page.
8-40
Applications
Press [Start].
The paper size determined at this time will be applied to all subsequent
JOBs.
When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu will
be displayed in the Copy Screen.
Touch [Confirm].
The current JOB images will be stored.
To delete the images, touch [Cancel].
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned.
2
Reminder
PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF

PAGINATION.
Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity from the
control panel keypad.
10
Touch [Memory Scan] to exit the Memory Scan mode.
11
Press [Start].

8-41
Applications
8
8.11
Erasing Outside of the Original (No Image Area Erase)

The No Image Area Erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials,
etc. from the original glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of
the original will not be copied.
Specifications for No Image Area Erase:
- Use the original glass only. Keep ADF open throughout the procedure.
General copying
No Image Area Erase
Set original
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [No Image Area Erase] on the Application popup menu.

8-42
Applications

Select magnification and paper size, as desired.
!
Details
APS and AMS are automatically released.

Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1. When selecting 1-2 mode, Memory Scan mode will function automatically.
2
Reminder
DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.

Original size should be larger than 10mm x 10mm.
Press [Start].
!
Details
Oblique Erase and Rectangle Erase Modes

The No Image Area Erase has two modes; Rectangle erase mode and
Oblique erase mode. The copier is initially set to select either mode appropriate for the original placed on the original glass (AUTO mode).
If desired, display the Utility Menu Screen to specify either mode and the
original density level manually so that the No Image Area Erase functions
without fail.
Oblique
erase mode

Rectangle
erase mode
8-43
Applications
8
Having Any Problem?
This function may perform incorrectly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your service representative
about an appropriate place for installation.
8-44
Applications
8.12
Reversing Colour in Black and White Image (Neg. Pos.

Reverse)
Use Neg. Pos. Reverse to reverse the image from black-on-white to whiteon-black, and vice versa. This is very good for copying white-on-black originals and reversing them to fax.
Original
Neg. Pos. Reverse copying
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Neg. Pos. Reverse] on the Application popup menu.

8-45
Applications
8
3

8-46
Applications
8.13
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz.

Mode)
Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10mm ~ 150mm in
both vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the
A3 original area indicated on the left edge of the original glass.
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications:
- Use the original glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.)
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode

Horizontal width
Repeat copy
Vertical
width
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Repeat] on the Application popup menu.
The Repeat Screen will be displayed.

8-47
Applications
8
3
Touch [Manual], then specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the
scanning area.
Use up/down arrow key to enter the width from 10 to 150 mm in 1 mm

increments. Keep touching the key to increase/decrease the value continuously.
Or, touch [Input With Keypad] to display the popup menu to enter the
value from the touch panel keypad.
Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] on the popup menu, enter the value for
each, then touch OK to restore the Repeat Screen.
Touch [OK].
8-48
Applications

Select the desired magnification and paper size.
!
Details
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected
as a magnification ratio.
Press [Start].

8-49
Applications
8
8.14
Repeat Automatically or Select Repeat Times (Repeat: Auto Detect/ Repeat Mode)
Auto Detect mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of
the original placed onto the original glass by activating No Image Area Erase.
Repeat mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper size
and mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by
specified times in one copy sheet.
Use 2 Repeat in designated order mode to have the same cut side when cutting copied sheets in two.
Auto Detect/ Repeat Mode Specifications:
- Auto Detect Mode: Use the original glass. ADF cannot be used.
- ADF is available with Repeat mode.
- Repeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.000 (100%) fixed
Auto Detect mode
Repeat mode
Copy
(2 Repeat)
Copy
(4 Repeat)
Copy
(8 Repeat)
8-50
Applications
8
Touch [Repeat] on the Application popup menu.
The Repeat Screen will be displayed.
Touch [Auto] to select the Auto Detect mode.

Touch [2 Repeat], [4 Repeat], or [8 Repeat] to select the desired Repeat mode.
If you want the image upside down on the other side in 2 Repeat
mode, touch [R-Reverse] or [L- Reverse].
Touch [OK].

8-51
Applications
!
Details
No Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application popup

menu when Auto Detect mode is selected.
2
Note
When 2 Repeat mode is selected, Page space function of Image Shift can
be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. For details, refer to Adjusting Position of Copy Image
(Image Shift) on page 8-61.

Select the desired magnification and paper size.
!
Details
When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area will
be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to the
selected mode. In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.000
(100%).
8-52
Applications
Position original.
For Auto Detect mode original, open the document feeder, then position the original FACE DOWN on the original glass.
For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, ADF is also available.
2
Reminder
When Auto Detect mode is selected, No Image Area Erase functions automatically.
DO NOT close the document feeder.
Press [Start].
!
Details
The Auto Detect mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work
place is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your service
representative about an appropriate place for installation.

8-53
Applications
8
8.15
Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/

Fold Erase)
Use Frame/Fold Erase to eliminate black copy marks along borders to clean
up and improve the presentation of the copy.
Frame
erasure
Frame
erasure
Set original
General copying
Frame Erasure
copying
Frame
erasure
Frame
Fold
erasure erasure
Fold Erasure
copying
Frame/Fold Erasure
copying
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
8-54
Applications
8
Touch [Frame/Fold Erase] on the Application popup menu.
The Frame/Fold Erase Screen will be displayed.
Touch [All sides], [Each side], or [Fold Erasure] to highlight it.

Either Frame erasure mode and Fold erasure can be selected in
combination.

8-55
Applications
8
4
Specify the erasure amount in the selected mode.
To specify Frame Erasure (All sides) amount:

Touch to highlight [Frame], if not highlighted, then use the touch panel
keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount of
the Up, Down, Right, and Left sides collectively, from 1 to 300 mm in 1
mm increments.
To specify Frame Erasure (Each side) amount:

Touch to highlight [Frame], if not highlighted, then touch [Up Side],
[Right Side], [Down Side], or [Left Side]. The selected side amount will
be highlighted in the left illustration area of the screen.
Use the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired
erasure amount, from 1 to 300 mm in 1 mm increments.
8-56
Applications
8
To specify Fold Erasure amount:
Touch to highlight [Fold], if not highlighted, then use the touch panel
keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount,
from 1 to 99 mm in 1 mm increments.
Touch [OK].


!
Details
When lowering the document feeder onto thick original (e.g. open book),
do not press it down too hard. Keep the document feeder open, if required.
Press [Start].

8-57
Applications
8
8.16
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (Image

Centering)
Use this function to detect the image area of the original and centre the
whole image on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper.
Specifications for Image Centering:
- No Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Release it manually when
using ADF to scan originals.
Image Centering copying

Set original
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Image Centering] on the Application popup menu.
8-58
Applications
!
Details
No Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. When using ADF to

scan the original, touch to deselect this function.
When using the Book Copy with this function, the original smaller than
the selected paper size will be printed in the centre of the copy paper
without image division performed.

Select the desired magnification and paper size on the Copy Screen.
!
Details

2
Reminder
DO NOT close the ADF when No Image Area Erase is selected.

Placing original obliquely on the original glass may cause black copy
marks.
Press [Start].
!
Details
Having Any Problem?

The Image Centering function may not operate properly if the lighting in
the work place is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your
service representative about an appropriate place for installation.

8-59
Applications
8
8.17
Printing Images Fully to the Edges (All-Image Area)

Use this function to make copies printed completely to the edges.
Original
Normal copy
All-Image Area copy
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [All-image Area] on the Application popup menu.

8-60
Applications
8.18
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift)

Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose
of creating a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing purposes.
Page Space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected. Use this function to make the desired
amount of blank space between the two images on a page.
If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image shift. For details, refer to Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin
(Reduce&Shift) on page 8-66.
Specifications for Image Shift:
- Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments
- Setting in 0.1mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available.
This setting change can be made on the Utility Menu Screen.
- Creep amount: 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments
- Page space amount: 250 to +250 mm in 1 mm increments
Right
Up
Up
Right
Left
Down
Original
Down
Copies

Left
8-61
Applications
8
1
Select the copy mode and paper size from the Copy Screen, as required.
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Image Shift] on the Application popup menu.
Touch [Image Shift] on the Image Shift Screen, then specify the shift direction and amount.
8-62
Applications
8
Touch [Front] or [Back] to specify the shift direction and amount individually; or touch [Both Sides] to specify collectively. The [Back] and
[Both Sides] keys function only for duplex copying.
Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key in the upper right area,
then use the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments.
The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction
and amount to be created on the printed sheets.
When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected,

the [Creep Adj.] or [Page Space] key appears clear on the screen to
show its availability.
Touch [Creep Adj.] to make space between left and right pages of a
booklet. Or touch [Page Space] to highlight it, then enter the desired
amount using the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key.
When [Page Space] is selected, the [+5] key appears clear on the
screen to show its availability. Use [+5] to select + in order to increase the space between images, or select to decrease.
Touch [OK].


8-63
Applications
!
Details
Page space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of

Image Repeat has been already selected.
Use this function to increase/decrease the blank space between the two
images on a page. See the illustration below for details.
Booklet
Page space
Original
Page space
2 Repeat in Repeat
Page
space
Original
8-64
Applications
!
Details
Creep Adjustment function is available only when Booklet (except Adhesive Binding mode) has been already selected.
Use this function in combination with Page space to make space between the two images two images widening gradually from the inner pages to the outer pages in a folded/ folded&stapled and trimmed booklet,
so that the outer margin should be uniform on all pages through.
Enter the creep amount of the images on the outermost page, while entering the page space amount of the images on the innermost page.
Creep
Creep

Creep
Creep
Page space (+)
Page space (-)
8-65
Applications
8
8.19
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)

Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image loss
when creating a binding margin.
Specifications for Reduce & Shift:
- AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released.
- Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments
- Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available.
This setting change can be made on the Utility Menu Screen.
Left binding margin
Left
Right
Up
Down
Originals
Back
Front
Right binding margin
Front
Left
Right
Up
Down
Front
Back
Top binding margin

Left
Right
Front
8-66
Back
Down
Left
Right
Back
Up
Applications
Select the copy mode and paper size, as required.
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
Touch [Image Shift] on the Application popup menu.
Touch [Reduce & Shift] on the Image Shift Screen, then specify the shift
direction and amount.
Touch [Front] or [Back]. In Reduce & Shift mode, the [Both Sides] key
appears dimmed to show inactivity.

8-67
Applications
Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch
panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount,
from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments.
The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction
and amount to be printed on the printed sheets.
!
Details
The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according

to the shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and
magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back page. If any positioning adjustment is required, touch
[Back] and make direction and amount change.
Touch [OK].

8-68
Applications
8.20
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)

This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of
stamp, page number, numbering, and date/time at the location designated
on the screen.
The four stamp types and watermark (described in the next subsection) provided on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen can be used individually or in
multiple combinations.
Top-Left
T-Middle
T-Right
Middle-Left
Middle
M-Right
Lower-Left
L-Middle
L-Right
TOP SECRET
STAMP
SET NUMBERING
PAGE NUMBERING
DATE/TIME
Printing positions
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-69
Applications
8
2
Touch [Stamp/Overlay] on the Application popup menu.
The Stamp/Overlay Screen will be displayed.
Touch to select the desired key in the Stamp area.
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the selected stamp type.
8-70
Applications
8
When selecting Stamp:
Specify the stamp type, printing position, character size and printed
page.
Touch to highlight the desired stamp key and printing position key
on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. For details, refer to p. 8-74.
Touch [Character Size] to select [Bigger] or [Smaller].
Touch [Printed Page] to designate whether to print the selected
stamp on the cover only or on all pages.
When selecting Set Numbering: Specify the numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and start number.

8-71
Applications
8
-
Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine
Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. For details, refer to p. 8-74.
Touch [Character Size] to select 20 point or 30 point.
Touch [Start Number] to designate the starting number, if required.
For details, refer to p. 8-74.
When selecting Page Numbering:

Specify the page numbering type, printing position, character size and
type, printed page and start number.
Touch to highlight the desired page numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch
[Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen.
Touch [Change Character] to select the character size (8point,
10point, 12point or 14point) and type (Gothic or Ming). For details,
refer to p. 8-75.
stamp on the front/back cover or insertions. For details, refer to
p. 8-76.
Touch [Start Number] to designate the starting number, if required.
8-72
Applications
8
When selecting Date/Time:
Specify the date/time type, printing position, character size and type,
printed page, and date & time.
Touch to highlight the desired date, time, and printing position keys
on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. For details, refer to p. 8-74.
Touch [Change Character] to select the character size (8point,
10point, 12point or 14point) and type (Gothic or Ming). For details,
refer to p. 8-75.
Touch [Date & Time] to designate whether to print the present time
or setting time. For details, refer to page 8-76.
Touch [OK].
The Stamp/Overlay Screen will be restored.
Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if
desired.
Touch [OK] on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.



8-73
Applications
!
Details
Fine Adjustment Setting Screen

When [Fine Adjustment] is touched, the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen
will be displayed.
Touch [UP SIDE], [DOWN SIDE], [RIGHT SIDE], or [LEFT SIDE] to specify
the direction, then use the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to
enter the desired amount, from 0 to 50 mm. Touch [OK] to return to the
previous screen.
Start Number Setting Screen:
Available from Set Numbering or Watermark Numbering
Use the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired start number, then touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.
8-74
Applications
8
Start Number Setting Screen:
Available from Page Numbering
When Chapter is already selected, the chapter start number can

also be specified on the Start Number Setting Screen.To enter the
start number, touch [Start Number] to highlight it, then use the
touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired start
number for each.
Also touch [Start Page] or [Start Chapter] to highlight it, and enter
the desired start page number or chapter number.
Touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.
Change Printing Character Screen:

from Page Numbering or Date/Time

8-75
Applications
8
-
When [Change Character] is touched, the Change Printing Character Screen will be displayed.
Touch to select the desired key, then touch [OK] to return to the
previous screen.
Cover/Insert Print Setting Selection Screen:

from Page Numbering
When copied/blank insertion mode of Sheet Insertion has been already selected, this screen allows you to specify whether to print
the page number on insertions, or skip them from the page count.
Touch to select the desired key, then touch [OK] to return to the
previous screen.
8-76
Applications
8
Date & Time Setting Screen:
from Date/Time
- When [Date & Time] is touched, the Date & Time Setting screen will
be displayed.
To print the present time, touch [Present Time] to highlight it.

To print hte setting time, touch [Setting Time], then use the touch
panel keypad to enter the desired date and time.

8-77
Applications
8
8.21
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)
C
O
N
FI
DE
N
TI
AL
Use this function to print the desired letter type obliquely in the centre of the
page (Watermark), or the numbers in the specified form repeatedly over the
scanned image (Watermark Numbering).
Watermark
Watermark Numbering
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-78
Applications
8
Touch [Watermark] or [Watermark Numbering], as desired.
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the selected watermark type.
When selecting Watermark:

Specify the desired watermark type and density.
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key and density key on

the screen. If fine adjustment of the centred watermark position is
required, touch [Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment
Setting Screen. For details, refer to p. 8-74.

8-79
Applications
8
When selecting Watermark Numbering:
Specify the desired watermark numbering type, density, character size

and start number.
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key and density key on

the screen.
Touch [Character Size] to select 20 point. or 30 point.
Touch [Start Number] to designate the start number, if required. For
details, refer to p. 8-74.
Touch [OK].
desired.


8-80
Applications
8.22
Print Words, Date/Time, Annotation Number onto

Copies (Annotation)
This function allows you to register words, current date/time, and annotation
number as a set and to print it onto output copies at the location designated
on the screen.
The setting previously made for annotation number in the Utility setting can
be changed temporarily on the Annotation Screen. (Temporary Number Setting)
Annotation can be used with the four stamp types and two watermark types
provided on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen in multiple combinations.
Specifications for Annotation:
- Up to 40 combinations of words, date/time, and annotation number can
be registered.
- Machine manager can change the indicating order of words, date/time
and annotation number and select whether to print for each in the Utility
mode.
- The date/time is determined when the machine starts scanning originals,
and will be printed according to the type specified on the machine.
- The annotation number is counted for each scanned original in scanning
order, and will continue to the next job even if the machine power is
turned off then on. However, the serial count will be suspended if this
function is deselected or Temporary Number Setting is specified.
- Printing position can be selected from 9 positions, and fine adjustment is
available within 0 to 50 mm both in up/down and right/left directions.
- The following settings can be made in Annotation Setting of Utility mode.
For detail, refer to 08 Annotation Setting on page 17-36.
Printing order of words, date/time, and annotation number, print contents, and print combination
Words to type in (up to 40 alphanumerical characters)
Date type (5 types provided)
Time type (3 types provided)
Words to type in before annotation number (up to 20 alphanumerical
characters)
Start number of the annotation number
Printing form of the annotation number (2 types provided)
Temporary number (up to 12 alphanumerical characters)
Font type (Gothic/Ming)
Character size (8/10/12/14 point)

8-81
Applications
3 sets
Upper
Left
Originals
Copies
Ex. Lower Right
Upper
Right
Middle Middle Middle

Left
Right
Lower
Left
Date/time
Annotation number
Type in
Upper
Middle
Lower
Middle
Lower
Right
Printing position
2
Reminder
press [Reset].
8-82
Applications
8
Touch [Annotation].
The Annotation Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired Annotation type, then specify its printing position.
Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired Annotation setting

key on the screen, then touch to highlight it. Up to 40 setting keys
are available on the screen.
The setting registered on that key will be recalled and on the
screen.
Touch to highlight the desired printing position key on the screen.
If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine Adjustment] to display the
Fine Adjustment Setting Screen.For details, refer to page 8-74.

8-83
Applications
!
Details
If [Temp. No. Set] key appears on the annotation, the serial number setting has been changed temporarily. See the next step.
To change the annotation number setting temporarily, touch [Temp.

No. Set].
The Temporary Number Setting Screen will be displayed.
Touch the alphanumerical screen keys to enter the desired number

or word. Up to 12 alphanumerical characters can be entered.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Annotation
Screen.
!
Details
With this setting specified, the entered number or word will be printed on
all pages the annotation number will not be counted in the former setting.
If the annotation number setting has not been made for the key selected
in step 4, the [Temp. No. Set] key will be dimmed to show inactivity on
the screen.
Touch [OK].
desired.
8-84
Applications
8


8-85
Applications
8
8.23
Overlay an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job

(Overlay)
Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page
copied in the job.
Specification for Overlay:
- Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.
1st scanned original
Originals scanned
2nd and later
Copies in Overlay mode
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-86
Applications
Touch [Overlay].
Touch [OK] on the Stamp/Overlay Screen.


The Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.
Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Copy Screen.
Position the overlaying original.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN

The original image will be scanned into memory.
10
Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

11
12

8-87
Applications
8
13
Touch [Memory Scan] on the Copy Screen to exit the Memory Scan
mode, then press [Start] to print.
8-88
Applications
8.24
Store Image in HDD / Overlay Stored Image (Overlay

Memory)
Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD, then recall
the desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job.
Image Store
HDD
Store in HDD
Overlaying image
Recall overlaying image
Output
Output
Recalled image
Overlay originals
Copies in
Overlay Memory mode
2
Reminder
press [Reset].

8-89
Applications
8
2
Touch [Overlay Memory].
The Store Image Screen will be displayed.

Proceed to step 9, when recalling only the stored image.
8-90
Applications
Touch [Store Image] to display the Image Name Entry Screen.
Enter the desired image name.

Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired name up to 8 characters. The date when you made this entry will be stored automatically.
To correct an entry, touch [Del] repeatedly to delete each character,
then enter the correct name.
If the image name is correct, touch [OK].

The Copy Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed.
Select the desired copy conditions.
2
Note
The popup menu may be displayed to prompt you that the entered image
name has been already used.
Position the overlaying original on the original glass.
!
Details
The document feeder cannot be used for storing the overlaying image.

8-91
Applications
8
8

The Store Image Screen will be displayed.
!
Details
To stop scanning, press [STOP].

The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in
the HDD. The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the
storing function is completed.
To continue to store the overlaying image data, return to step 4.
Touch to select the desired overlaying image data, then touch [OK].
!
Details
Delete Image Key on the Overlay Image Selection Screen

If the [Delete Image] key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection
Screen, you can delete the stored image and name. Select the image
name using up/down arrow key to scroll, then touch Delete Image.
10
Touch [OK] to return to the Application popup menu.
11

The Memory Scan mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS
are released.
Set the desired conditions on the Copy Screen.
12
13
Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

14
15
16
Touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory Scan mode, then press [Start]
to print.
8-92
Applications
!
Details
Popup Menu for Name Duplication

If the popup menu with [Yes] and [No] keys is displayed instead of the
Copy Screen, the entered name is duplicated. Touch Yes to enter a new
name, or No to create a duplicate name.
If the popup menu with [OK] key is displayed, the entered name is duplicated. Touch [OK], then enter a new name.
Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the [Delete]
Image key is available in the Utility mode.

8-93
8-94
Applications
Copier
9.1
Copy Conditions Incompatible with Output Modes

Special Image
Tab Paper
Custom Size
Text
Photo (*3)
Low Contrast
Preset Density
AE
Manual Density
Rotation
ZOOM
1.000 Magnification
AMS
APS
2-2
2-1
1-2
Collated (Rotation)
1-1
Z-Folded Original
Original Setting
Mixed Original

with
Output Modes
Collated (Offset)
Uncollated
*5
*5
2 Stapling (Top)
*5
2 Stapling (Left)
*5
2 Stapling (Right)
*5
Z-Fold
Output Application

Gate (Inside Print)
Hole-Punch (Right)
*5
Hole-Punch (Left)
*5
Hole-Punch (Top)
*5
Face Up
Face Down
1 to N
N to 1
Upper Binding
HDD (*1)
Fold&Staple
Multi Centre
Trimming (*6)
Tandem

9-3
Insertion using PI
u
u
u
u
u
u
-
u
u
u
-
x
x

Combination
Booklet
Repeat
Repeat (Auto)(*4)

All-Image Area
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
x
x
u
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
9-4
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
u
x
x
x
u
u
x
x
x
u
u
x
x
x
x
x
u
u
x
x
x
x
u
x
x
x
x
x
u
u
x
x
x
x
Overlay (*2)
Overlay Memory
Annotation
Watermark/Numbering
Watermark
Date
Set Numbering
Page Numbering
Stamp
Reduce & Shift
Image Shift
Image Centering
Fold Erasure
Frame Erasure
Neg. Pos. Reverse
Book Copy
Image Insert
OHP Interleave
Chapter
Back Cover
Front Cover
Sheet Insertion
9
Output Application
Z-Fold
Gate (Inside Print)
Collated (Rotation)
2 Stapling (Top)
2 Stapling (Left)
2 Stapling (Right)
Z-Fold
z
z
z
z
x
x
Face Up
Hole-Punch (Top)
c
c
Hole-Punch (Left)
x
c
Gate (Inside Print)
Hole-Punch (Right)
Face Down
2 Stapling (Right)
z
Face Up
2 Stapling (Left)
z
Hole-Punch (Top)
2 Stapling (Top)
z
Hole-Punch (Left)

z
Uncollated
Hole-Punch (Right)

z
Collated (Rotation)
Uncollated
Collated (Offset)
Output Application
Collated (Offset)

Output Modes
x
x
Face Down
z
z
1 to N
N to 1
Upper Binding
x
x
HDD (*1)
Fold&Staple
Multi Centre
Trimming (*6)
Tandem

9-5
Trimming (*6)
z
x
x
Multi Centre
Tandem
Fold&Staple
HDD
Upper Binding
N to 1
1 to N
Output Application
x
x
9-6
x
x
Description
None
Compatible
Output message
*1
Limited to Job Store function in Copy mode.
*2
*3
Available only when Booklet is selected.
*4
Selecting Auto in Repeat, Non-Image Area Erase will also be selected automatically
and cannot be released.
*5
Rotation is unavailable if staple or punch position will be interfered.
*6

9-7
9
9.2
Selecting an Output Tray

This section describes how to select an output tray.
Touch [Output Application] on the Copy Screen.

The Output Application Screen appears.
Trays that can output paper will be have keys on the front image of the
machine, and the tray that is currently set to output paper is shown with
a depressed key.
9-8
Touch [Output Tray].

An Output Tray Selection Screen reflecting the combination of optional
devices will appear.
Select the desired output tray.

Touch the desired tray position key

to select it.
9-9
Machine with Large Capacity Stacker LS-502 (1 unit), or with Large

Capacity Stacker LS-501 + Finisher FS-503:
In addition to the tray position key
, the [Pile Setting] key is shown.
If you touch [Pile Setting], a popup screen will appear. Touch [Permit]
if you want to allow paper from several jobs to pile up in the large capacity stacker, or touch [Prohibit] if you do not.
9-10
Machine with Large Capacity Stacker LS-501+ LS-502, or with

Large Capacity Stacker LS-501 + LS-502 + Finisher FS-503:
and the [Pile Setting] key, the
[Stacker Auto] key is shown.
If you touch [Stacker Auto], in case the selected output tray and the
large capacity stacker become full or if problems occur, paper will be
automatically output to another large capacity stacker.

and the Pile Setting key, the
Stacker Auto key is shown.
If you touch [Stacker Auto], in case the selected output tray and the
large capacity stacker become full or if problems occur, paper will be
automatically output to another large capacity stacker.
Touch [OK] on the Output Tray Select Screen.

It will return to the Output Application Screen.
The output tray location is indicated by a depressed key on the front
image of the machine.

9-11
9
5
Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen.

It will return to the Copy Screen.
Withdraw the Saddle stitcher tray, if selected as an output tray.

-
Open the tray stand when fully withdrawn.
2
Reminder
Never return the Saddle stitcher tray to its original position with the tray
stand opened.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray / stacker capacity when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.
9-12
9.3
Setting Binding Direction for Duplex Copies

When setting duplex mode (simplex % duplex / duplex % duplex), a binding
direction must be selected. It should be set when making duplex copies with
upper binding (front and back sides have the opposite side up) from simplex
or duplex originals of right/left binding (front and back sides have the same
side up).
2
Note
If you want to make duplex copies with of right/left binding (front and
back sides have the same side up) from duplex originals with upper binding (front and back sides have the opposite side up), settings for duplex
originals and binding direction are needed. For details, refer to Specifying Original Direction on page 6-10.
Specifications for Binding Direction:
- Upper binding for duplex printing is available only when duplex mode is
selected.
- If the machine is reset, the binding mode will go back to right/left binding.
Binding Direction for Duplex copying

R&L
Originals

Upper
Copies
9-13
9
1

Touch [Upper] to select it.
Touch [OK].
9-14
9.4
Using Finisher FS-503

The Finsiher FS-503 has a primary (main) tray and a secondary (sub) tray,
each of which has the following output modes.
Output to the Primary (Main) Tray:
- Non-sort:
Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are
not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by
sorted sets.
- Collated:
Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each
sorted set offset by 30 mm upon exit.
- Uncollated:
Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original and
offsets the sets by 30 mm upon exit.
- Staple:
Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set.
Combined with the output modes above except staple mode, you can also
choose to output face up or face down, and output front to back or back to
front.
Example:
Make 3 copied sets
from 4 original sheets
Non-sort
Staple
Collated
Uncollated
2 staples
1 oblique
staple

Offset by 30mm
Offset by 30mm
9-15
Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray

- Collated:
Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset output is available.
- Uncollated:
Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original. No
offset output is available.
Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output face
up or face down, and output front to back or back to front.
Example:
Make 3 copied sets
Face down
collated
Face down
uncollated
Face up
collated
Face up
uncollated
This section describes the following output methods:

- Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated output to the primary (main) tray
- Stapled output to the primary (main) tray
- Collated / Uncollated output to the secondary (sub) tray
9-16
9.4.1
Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated Output to the Primary

(Main) Tray
A machine with Finisher FS-503 installed is set to collate output to the primary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not other optional devices
are attached. Please select an output mode by following the procedures described below.
2
Note
You can change the initial output settings. For details, refer to 01 Initial
Specifications for Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated Output to the Primary (Main) Tray
- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, standard index paper, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- Paper weight: 50 - 244 g/m2
- The primary (main) tray's specifications are described separately. For details, refer to Paper Information on page 3-3.


image of the machine. If the primary (main) tray is not selected as the
output tray, touch Output Tray to select it.

9-17
9
2
Note
Changing output trays is described separately. For details, refer to Selecting an Output Tray on page 9-8.
Select an output mode.
For non-sort output, cancel both [Collated] and [Uncollated].

For collated output, touch [Collated] to select it.
For uncollated output, touch [Uncollated] to select it.
Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N
/ N to 1) as needed.

The icon of the specified output application appears on the Copy
Screen.
2
Reminder
The primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray
on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to
the finisher.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the
print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.
9-18
9.4.2
Stapling Output to the Primary (Main) Tray

Copies will be stapled in this mode. Follow the procedures below to select
stapling position and number of staples: upper left/upper right 1 stapling,
left/up/right 2 stapling.
Specifications for Stapling Output to the Primary (Main) Tray
- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 8K, 16K, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
- Number of sheets to be stapled: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)
- Stapling position: 1 at the back (45), 1 at the front, 2 in the centre
- Stapling method: Inline clinch (staple cutting method)
- Number of cut staples: 150,000 or more (cut staples must be disposed of
by a service centre during regular maintenance.)
- The primary (main) tray's specifications are described separately. For details, refer to Paper Information on page 3-3.
Touch [Staple] on the Copy Screen.

Stapled sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. The Output
Application Icon shows the stapling position.
If you want to change stapling style and position, proceed to the following steps.

9-19
9
2
Touch [Output Application].

Touch [Stapling] and select stapling style and position.

The Stapling Selection Screen appears.
Touch any stapling position key to select it.
!
Details
If you touch [Cancel], it returns to the previous setting.

If you touch [Function Off], stapling output will be turned off but the stapling position will be kept in memory.
9-20
Touch [OK].

Screen.
2
Reminder
The primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray
on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to
the finisher.
2
Reminder

9-21
9
9.4.3
Collated / Uncollated Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray

A machine with Finisher FS-503 installed is set to collate output to the primary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not other optional devices
are attached. Please change the output tray and select an output mode by
following the procedures described below.
Specifications for Collated / Uncollated Output to the Secondary (Sub)
Tray
- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5",
5.5"x8.5"R, standard tab paper, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460
mm)
- The secondary (sub) tray's specifications are described separately. For
details, refer to Paper Information on page 3-3.

9-22
Select the secondary (sub) tray as the output tray.
Touch [Output Tray] to open the Output Tray Selection Screen. Touch
the tray position key
of the secondary (sub) tray to select it. Touch
[OK].
For collated output, touch Collated to select it.

For uncollated output, touch Uncollated to select it.

9-23
9
4

Screen.
!
Details
9-24
9.5
Using Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502

The Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502 has a stacker (on the carriage)
and a secondary (sub) tray, each of which has the following output modes.
Output to the Stacker
- Non-sort:
Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are
not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by
sorted sets.
- Collated:
Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each
sorted set offset by 20mm upon exit.
- Uncollated:
Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original and
offsets the sets upon exit.
Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray
- Collated:
Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset output is available.
- Uncollated:
Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original. No
offset output is available.
Specifications for Using Large Cpacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502
Stacker
- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- Number of sheets to be stacked:
- 5,000 sheets (A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11",
8.5"x11"R, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- 2,000 sheets (B5, A5)
- Different sizes of paper cannot be loaded at the same time.
- To remove paper, open the front door and pull out the base car. If two
units are connected, paper can be removed from one unit while the other
is operating.

9-25
9
-
The stacker's specifications are described separately. For details, refer to

Paper Information on page 3-3.
Secondary (sub) tray

- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", standard
tab paper, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- Loading capacity: Maximum 200 sheets
- The secondary (sub) tray's specifications are described separately. For
details, refer to Paper Information on page 3-3.

image of the machine. If the primary (main) tray is not selected as the
output tray, touch [Output Tray] to select it.
2
Note
Changing output trays is described separately. For details, refer to Selecting an Output Tray on page 9-8.
9-26
For unsorted output, cancel both [Collated] and [Uncollated].

For collated output, touch [Collated] to select it.
For uncollated output, touch [Uncollated] to select it.

Screen.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray / stacker capacity when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.

9-27
9
9.6
Using Folding Unit FD-501

There are three elements for output settings:
- Intermediary processing
- Output mode
- Output tray position
The Folding Unit FD-501 does the intermediary processing, while Finisher
FS-503/Saddle Stitcher SD-501/Perfect Binder PB-501 sets an output mode
and changes output tray position.
The following punch/folding patterns are available:
- Punch:
2 or 4 holes can be punched in sheets for filing purposes. Set left/right/
top position according to the placement of sheets.
- Folding:
Six folding types are available - Z-Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out,
Double Parallel, Gate, and Folding. Choose to print outside the fold (outside print) or inside (inside print) for each folding mode except Z-fold.
This section describes how to set intermediary processing for punching
holes in copies and folding copies.
80 mm
Z-Fold
Letter Fold-out
Gate
Letter Fold-in
Double Parallel
Folding
80 mm
9-28
9.6.1
Punching File Holes in Copies

Copies will be punched in this mode. Follow the procedures below to select
2- or 4-hole punch and punch position.
Specifications for Punching Copies:
- Punch holes: 2 / 4
- Punch hole diameter: 2-hole 6.5 mm / 4-hole 8.0 mm
- Punch hole pitch: 80 mm
- Hole position adjustment range: 4 mm (error 0.2mm)
- Paper size:
- 2-hole: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8K, 16K, 12"x18",
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
- 4-hole: A3, B4, A4, B5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x11", 8K, 16K
- Punch waste capacity: 10,000 punches
- Tab paper and other kinds of paper placed on the post inserter can also
be punched.
- Punching can be combined with the folding function.
- Punched sheets will be delivered to Finisher FS-503s primary (main) tray
/ secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub) tray on the left side of
Folding Unit FD-501.
Touch [Punch] on the Copy Screen

The Output Application Icon shows the number of punch holes and
punch position.
If you want to change number of punch holes and position, proceed to

the following steps.

9-29
9
2
Touch [Output Application].

Touch [Punch] and select the number of punch holes and position.
The Hole-Punch Screen appears.
Touch any punch key to select it.
9-30
Touch [OK].
!
Details
If you touch [Cancel], it returns to the previous setting.

If you touch [Function Off], punch output will be turned off but the selected punch settings will be kept in memory.

Screen.
2
Reminder
Punched sheets will be delivered to Finisher FS-503's primary (main) tray

/ secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub) tray on the left side of
Folding unit FD-501. Be careful not to exceed the capacity of each tray
when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be
caused.

9-31
9
9.6.2
Folding Copies
Copies will be folded in this mode. Follow the procedures below to select
from six folding types.
Specifications for Folding Copies:
- Folding types: Z-Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double Parallel,
Gate, Folding
- Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 8K, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R
- Paper weight:
- Z-Fold / Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Folding: 50 - 130g/m2
- Double Parallel / Gate: 50 - 130 g/m2
- Sheets placed on the post inserter can also be folded.
- Folding can be combined with the punching function.
- Normally folded or Z-folded sheets will be delivered to the Finisher FS503s primary (main) tray / secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub)
tray on the left side of Folding unit FD-501.
- Using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel, or Gate, the folded
sheets will be delivered only to the secondary (sub) tray on the left side
of Folding unit FD-501.

9-32
Touch [Folding] to select a folding type.

The Folding Mode Screen appears.
Touch any punch key to select it.
Touch [OK].
!
Details
If you touch [Cancel,] it returns to the previous setting.

If you touch [Function Off], folding output will be turned off but the selected folding settings will be kept in memory.

Screen.
2
Reminder
Normally folded or Z-folded sheets will be delivered to Finsiher FS-503's

primary (main) tray / secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub) tray
on the left side of Folding Unit FD-501. Using Letter fold-in, Letter foldout, Double parallel, or Gate, the folded sheets will be delivered only to
the secondary (sub) tray on the left side of Folding unit FD-501.
Be careful not to exceed the capacity of each tray when selecting the

9-33
9
9.7
Using Saddle Stitcher SD-501
9.7.1
Making Folded Booklet

Machine with the Saddle Stitcher SD-501 installed provides Fold & Staple
mode in combination with Booklet feature to make two-sided signature
booklet, folded and stapled at two positions (saddle stitched) in the centre.
Use Trimming mode to trim the edge that opens the booklet, if desired.
Specifications for Fold&Staple / Trimming
- Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, B5R, F4, 8K, 16KR, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11"R, Wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- Max. number of folded & stapled sheets: Varies according to the paper
weight to be used. For details, refer to Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity on
page 3-5.
- Saddle stitcher tray capacity: Varies according to the number of folded &
stapled sheets. For details, refer to Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity on
page 3-5.
- Staple position: Variable (90 ~ 165 mm)
- Stapling method: Inline clinch
- Trimming width: 2 ~ 10 mm
Fold & Staple
9-34
Fold & Staple and Trimming
Touch Output Application on the Copy Screen.

Touch [Fold&Staple], then select to use Trimming or not.

The Fold&Staple Screen will be displayed.
Touch [Trimming] or [Non Trimming] to select it.
Touch [OK].
The Output Application Screen will be restored.

9-35
!
Details
If you touch [Cancel], the previous setting will be restored.

Touching Function Off will deselect the Fold&Staple (and Trimming)
mode, however, the specified setting will be kept in memory.

The output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed on the
Copy Screen.
Booklet function in the Application setting has been selected automatically.
Withdraw the Saddle stitcher tray.

-
9-36
!
Details
The folded and stapled (and trimmed) sets will be delivered into the Saddle stitcher tray. If the tray is not fully withdrawn, the machine will detect
that the tray is filled up, even with less number of finished sets than that
specified in specifications.
2
Reminder
stand opened.

9-37
9
9.7.2
Folding Copied Set

Machine with the Saddle Stitcher SD-501 installed provides Multi Centre
mode to double-fold up to 5 sheets of copied set, or Multi Letter mode to fold
it inside in three.
Using Multi Letter, the print side can be specified on the screen.
Specifications for Multi Centre / Multi Letter
- Paper weight: Multi Centre 50 - 244 g/m2, Multi Letter 50 - 130 g/m2
- Paper size: Multi Centre 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R, A3, B4, A4R,
B5R, F4, 8K, 16KR, Wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- Multi Letter 8.5x11R, A4R
- Max. number of folded sheets: 5 sheets max. (80 g/m2)
- Tray capacity: Multi Centre (Saddle stitcher tray) 30 sets
- Multi Letter (Multi-folding tray) 30 sets
Multi Centre
+ Non Trimming
9-38
Multi Centre
+ Trimming
Multi Letter
+ Inside Print
Multi Letter
+ Outside Print

Touch [Multi Centre] or [Multi Letter] to select it.

-
If [Multi Centre] is selected, the [Multi Centre Screen] will be displayed to specify whether or not to trim the edge of the folded
sheets.
Touch [Trimming] or [Non Trimming] to select it.

Touch [OK].

9-39
9
-
If [Multi Letter] is selected, the Multi Letter Screen will be displayed

to specify the print side.
Touch [Outside Print] or [Inside Print] to select it.

Touch [OK].
!
Details
If you touch [Cancel], the previous setting will be restored.

Touching [Function Off] will deselect the mode, however, the specified
setting will be kept in memory.

The output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed on the
Copy Screen.
With [Multi Centre] selected, Booklet function in the Application setting
has been selected automatically.
9-40
If [Multi Centre] is selected, withdraw the Saddle stitcher tray.

-
!
Details
The double-folded sets will be delivered into the Saddle stitcher tray. If
the tray is not fully withdrawn, the machine will detect that the tray is filled
up, even with less number of finished sets than that specified in specifications.
The triple-folded sets will be delivered into the Multi-folding tray.
2
Reminder
stand opened.

9-41
9
9.8
Using Post Inserter on Folding Unit FD-501

This function uses the post inserter on Folding Unit FD-501 to attach a cover.
Using Sheet Insertion function, cover sheets loaded in the top/bottom tray of
the post inserter can be attached as a front cover, back cover or insertion
sheet to output copies. In order to create a stapled book with a cover and
chapter title pages.
You can also use the Booklets Cover with Blank Sheet mode and Sheet Insertions Cover mode in combination to make a double-covered booklet.
Use the Perfect Binding mode to attach a cover loaded in the top/bottom tray
of the post inserter, in order to create a perfect-bound book.
Specifications for Post Inserter on Folding Unit FD-501:
- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 12"x18",
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", standard tab paper,
wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
- Paper: PPC paper, fine paper, coated paper, trace paper
- For the paper size, weight, and type of covers used in Perfect Binding
mode, see p. 3-3 to p. 3-8.
- Upper/lower paper feed tray capacity: Maximum 500 sheets each
(80 g/m2 paper)
- Multi-feed detection function is provided.
9-42
9
Covers and
insertion sheets
Copied set with

covers attached in
staple mode
Copied set with

covers and
insert sheets
attached
Cover sheet
Body set with cover

attached in perfect
binding mode
Place paper on the upper and lower

trays of the post inserter.
Upper tray
Lower tray
2
Reminder
Do not load more than 500 sheets (80 g/m2) for each of the upper and
lower trays. Do not load above the load limit line on the guide plate.

9-43
9
2
Use the sheet insertion or booklet function to place a cover sheet.
2
Reminder
Copies will be delivered to the primary (main) tray of Finisher FS-503. Be

careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the print
quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.
9-44
To prevent small cover sheet from skewing

The small cover sheet may be skew, when loading it in the upper/lower tray
of the post inserter.
Three paper rollers are attached to the upper/lower tray respectively.
To lock the roller both sides, prevent paper from skewing.
Push the both roller lock levers to inside to lock them.
2
Reminder
Besure to lock both sides, when locking the paper rollers.

Do not lock the paper rollers normally.

9-45
9
9.9
Using Folder/Finisher Functions Manually

If the optional Folding Unit FD-501 and the Finisher FS-503 / Saddle Stitcher
SD-501 are installed, you can load paper in the lower tray of the post inserter
and manually punch, fold, and/or staple copies.
Specifications for Using Folder/Finisher Functions Manually:
- When using folder/finisher functions manually, paper should be placed
only in the upper tray of the post inserter.
- Multi-feed detection is a feature that automatically stops the machine if
more than one sheet is fed at a time. The post inserter is designed to detect multi-feeding.
Coated paper and other kinds of smooth surface paper may activate this
function even if a single sheet is fed, stopping the machine. Should this
case occur frequently, press the Multi-Feed Detection button and light up
the lower lamp, in order to turn the function OFF.
- Paper specifications for 1 or 2 stapling
Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 8K, 16K, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
Paper weight: 50 - 244 g/m2
Number of sheets to be stapled: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
- Paper specifications for punching
Paper size:
2-hole: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8K, 16K, A5R, 12"x18",
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"
4-hole: A3, B4, A4, B5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x11", 8K, 16K
- Paper specifications for folding
Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 8K, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R
Paper weight:
Z-Fold / Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Folding: 50 - 130 g/m2
Double Parallel / Gate: 50 - 130 g/m2
- Paper specifications for fold&staple
Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, B5R, F4, 8K, 16KR, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11"R, Wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)
Number of sheets to be folded&stapled: Maximum number of folded and
stapled sheets varies according to the paper weight. For details, refer to
p. 3-5.
9-46
Multi-Feed
Detection
Function
ON
1 Stapling
2 Holes Punch
Z-Fold
Function
OFF
2 Stapling
3 Holes Punch
Letter
Fold out
Multi-Feed
Detection button
Punch selection
button
Staple Selection
button
Double
Parallel
Gate
Folding
Start/Stop button
Fold Selection
button
Place paper in the upper tray of the

post inserter.
-
Letter Fold-in
Upper tray
1 or 2 stapling:
Place paper face up.
Punching:
Place paper face up.
Folding:
Place the surface to be inside the
fold face up.
Fold&Staple: Place the surface to be inside the fold face up.
Align the guide plate with the paper.

9-47
9
2
Select a mode.
Fold Selection
Staple Selection
button
button
Punch selection
button
When selecting 1 or 2 stapling / fold/staple, press the Staple selection button to turn on the desired mode lamp.
When selecting 2- or 4-hole punching, press the Punch selection
button to turn on the desired mode lamp.
When selecting folding (from 6 styles), press the Fold selection button to turn on the desired mode lamp.
!
Details
Punching and stapling can be combined. When combining them, turn on

the lamps for both functions.
9-48
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
Start/Stop button
If multi-feeding is detected and the

machine stops even if single sheet is
fed, press the Multi-Feed Detection
button to turn on the lamp below.
ON
OFF
Multi-Feed Detection button
!
Details
To interrupt the operation, press the Start/Stop button again.
2
Note
Using Fold&Staple mode, the finished sets will be delivered to the saddle
stitcher tray of Saddle stitcher SD-501. Be sure to withdraw the saddle
stitcher tray, and open the tray stand when fully withdrawn. For details,
refer to Selecting an Output Tray on page 9-8.
!
Details
To fold or fold&staple booklet-styled prints manually, arrange the printed

sheets as shown below before placing them into the post inserter.

9-49
9
9.10
Using Perfect Binder PB-501

The machine with the optional Perfect Binder PB-501 installed automatically
attaches a copied set with a cover sheet to make a perfect-bound book, applying a dab of glue in the centerline of the cover sheet to fix the spine.
In the Perfect Binding mode, both simplex and duplex copying are available
for the body set, and also the cover sheet can be blank, simplex-printed or
duplex-printed, and even trimmed to match with the thickness of the body
set to cover.
The binding direction can be selected from left and right.
2
Reminder
Use only the paste GC-501 for this binder.

Handle melted hot paste only with great care.
In order to prevent degradation of paste owing to heating, ensure that the
machine is turned off when it is not in use. It is recommended that you
adjust the time settings for the low power mode and shut-off mode to the
main body to suite the usage of the Perfect Binder, since they apply to
the binder as well.
Left binding
(When right binding,
the cover is upside down.)
Body set
Back side of front cover
Cover lead edge
adjustment
Back side of back cover

Head
Cover
Cover trimming
Front side of front cover Spine width
Foot
Front side of back cover
9-50
Even number originals
Body set: simplex, Cover print: Off

Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Body set: duplex, Cover print: Off

Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Body set: duplex, Cover print: On, copver print side: simplex
Body set: duplex, Cover print: On, copver print side: duplex
Body set

Cover
9-51
9
Odd number originals
Body set: simplex, Cover print: Off

Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Body set: duplex, Cover print: Off

Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Body set: duplex, Cover print: On, copver print side: simplex
Blank
Blank
Blank
Body set: duplex, Cover print: On, copver print side: duplex
Blank
Body set
9-52
Cover
Specifications for Using Perfect Binder PB-501

-
Warm-up/Low Power/Shut-Off
The perfect binder requires longer warm-up time than that required for
the main body, while the Low Power/Shut-Off mode activates at the
same time on main body and perfect binder.
We recommend you to specify the time to activate the Low Power/ShutOff mode in view of the frequency to use the perfect binder.
Paper tray
Body: Tray 1 to 5
Cover: Tray 1 to 5 (available for Cover Print), Cover feeding tray of Perfect
binder (unavailable for Cover Print), Upper/Lower tray of the post inserter
on Folding unit (unavailable for Cover Print)
Paper size
Body: Standard sizes A4, B5, A5, 16K, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5" (A3, B4, A4R,
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8K when using Z-Fold mode)
Wide sizes A4W, B5W, A5W, 8.5"x11"W, 5.5"x8.5"W
Custom sizes*1 150 x 140 mm min. to 307 x 221 mm max.
Cover: Custom size*1
Length (head to foot): Same as that of body set (within +5 mm)
Width: Book width x 2 + body sets thickness (1 mm or more) + (3 mm or
more of trimming width if Trimming mode is specified)
The maximum size accommodable in each tray is as follows.
Tray 1 to 5*2: 150 x 281 mm min. to 324 x 460 mm max.
Cover feeding tray of Perfect binder: 150 x 281 mm min. to 330 x 472 mm
max.
Upper/Lower tray of the post inserter on Folding unit: 182 x 281 mm min.
to 330 x 483 mm max.
Paper weight
Body: 62 ~ 91 g/m2 (*3Available weight can be specified from 62 ~ 71
g/m2 to 72 ~ 91 g/m2.)
Cover: 72 ~ 161 g/m2 (*3Available weight can be specified from 72 ~ 91
g/m2, 92 ~ 130 g/m2, to 131 ~ 161 g/m2.)
Number of sheets to be bound: 10 sheets min. to 300 sheets max., or
within 30 mm thick*4
Covers fed from tray 1 to 5 can be simplex- or duplex-printed, while those
loaded in the cover feeding tray of Perfect binder or the upper/lower tray
of post inserter on Folding unit cannot be printed.
Fine Adjustment
Cover Lead Edge Adjustment adjusts the position of front cover and body
set in widthwise direction in the range from 12.8 mm to +12.8 mm in 0.1
mm increments.
Cover Trimming Adjustment adjusts the trimming width in the range from
5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in 0.1 mm increments.
Cover Image Shift Adjustment adjusts the position of image to be printed
on the front cover when using Cover Print mode.

9-53
9
-
Use Cover Trimming function to trim the cover by the amount automatically estimated from the following formula, in the range from 3 mm to 40
mm in 0.1 mm increments.
(Cover width) (Body width 2) (Spine width)
For specifications of the secondary (sub) tray, see p. 3-3 to p. 3-8.
*1: Specify the custom size of body set from the Paper Presetting Screen.
For details, refer to Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper Presetting) on page 6-53.
Specify the custom size of covers from the Perfect Binding Screen. For
details, see following pages.
*2: For 8.5"x11" body set to be bound with a cover sheet fed from tray 1
to 5, the maximum thickness will be less than 30 mm.
Cover Trimming Off: 460 (216 2) = 28 mm
Cover Trimming On: 460 (216 2) (Trimming width 3 mm) = 25 mm
If thickness of 8.5"x11" body set is more than that mentioned above, use
the cover feeding tray of Perfect binder or the tray of post inserter on
Folding unit to attach a cover.
*3: You can specify the paper weight available for body sets and covers
in Perfect Binding mode. For details, refer to 01 Useful Paper Weight Select on page 17-43.
*4: The minimum/maximum number of sheets to be bound in Perfect
Binding can be changed according to the paper weight of body set. For
details, refer to 02 Paper Count Limit for Perfect Binding on
page 17-45.
Also, the machine can be set to detect the thickness of body set and to
stop the binding operation temporarily if the width of the cover to be used
is unsuitable for the body set. For details, refer to 03 Stop Setting for P.
B. Cover Unfit Length on page 17-47.
9-54
Load paper for body sets and covers in each tray to be used.
-
Load paper for body sets in one of the tray 1 to 5.

When printing on covers, also load cover sheets in one of the tray
1 to 5.
If cover print is not required, load cover sheets in one of the tray 1
to 5, cover feeding tray of Perfect binder, and upper/lower tray of
post inserter on Folding unit.
While the Perfect binder is warming up, the Machine Status Screen
will prompt you the current warmup status of the machine.
2
Reminder
Custom paper size is to be used as cover. Be sure to check the precise

dimensions in order to specify them during this procedure.
If Cover Trimming is desired, be sure to use the size that secures 3 mm
to 40 mm of trimming width.
When using the Post Inserter, touch [For P.B. Cover] on the Machine Status Screen to highlight it.

9-55
9
2
Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen, select the tray loaded
with paper for body sets, and change the paper setting as required.
The paper size will be detected automatically.

If paper weight specified for the tray loaded with paper for body sets is
inadequate, the binding operation cannot be performed. Select one
from 62-71g and 72-91g.
!
Details
The binding operation may not be performed even if the paper weight
mentioned above is specified. For details, refer to 01 Useful Paper
Weight Select on page 17-43.
The number of body set may be limited depending on the selected paper
weight. For details, refer to 02 Paper Count Limit for Perfect Binding on
page 17-45.
9-56
Touch [Output Application], then touch [Perfect Bind].
The Perfect Binding Screen will be displayed.

9-57
9
4
Select the tray loaded with covers, then specify the paper setting.
-
Touch Cover Tray to display the Cover Tray Screen.
Touch the tray loaded with covers in step 1 to highlight it.
!
Details
If any other tray than tray 1 to 5, the Cover Print setting in step 5 will be
limited to Cover Print Off.
9-58
Touch [Change Paper Set] to display the Tray Setting Screen.
Enter the cover paper dimensions.

Touch [Size Setting] to display the Size Setting Screen.
Use the screen keypad or arrow keys + and , to enter the dimensions of the covers loaded in step 1, then touch [OK].
2
Reminder
Be sure to enter the cover paper dimensions precisely; otherwise a message may be displayed to prompt you that the specified size is inadequate, or the trimming function may not be performed properly.

9-59
9
-
Specify the paper type and weight.

Touch [Change] to display the Change Setting Screen.
Touch [Type] to select the desired paper type, then touch [OK].
9-60

-
Touch [Weight] to select the desired paper weight, then touch [OK].
If unsuitable selection is made, the binding operation will not be
performed.
Select the desired one from 72-91g, 92-130g and 131-161g.
!
Details
The binding operation may not be performed even if one of the paper
weight mentioned above is specified. For details, refer to 01 Useful Paper Weight Select on page 17-43.
-
To recall the paper setting previously registered, touch [Type/

Weight] to display the Register Screen, select the desired key, then
touch [OK].
Touch [Close].

9-61
9
-
Touch [OK] on the Cover Tray Screen.
Specify the cover print setting.

This setting is available when one of the tray 1 to 5 is specified as the
cover tray source.
Select [On] to print on covers, or [Off] to attach blank covers.
Also select [Simplex] to print only on the front side, or [Duplex] to have
both front and back sides printed.
2
Note
For details of finished result with each setting specified, refer to Using
Perfect Binder PB-501 on page 9-50. The original image to be printed
on cover varies depending on whether the original count is odd or even.
9-62
Specify the spine width.
Touch [Spine Width (1-30 mm)] to display the Spine Width Screen.
Use the screen keypad, arrow keys + and ,, or the control panel
keypad to enter the desired value, then touch [OK].
Specify the cover trimming setting.

-
Touch [On] to trim the cover, or [No] to deactivate this function.
!
Details
If the trimming width estimated by the machine does not fall within the
range from 3 to 40 mm, a message will be displayed to inform you that
the trimming mode is unavailable.
In this case, adjust the cover or spine width to enable this setting.
9-63
9
8
Make fine adjustments for the lead edge, trimming width, and image
position of the cover.
-
Touch Fine Adjustment to display the Fine Adjustment Screen.
To adjust the lead edge of the cover, touch [Cover Lead Edge Adj.]
Use [+5] to select positive/negative, then use the screen keypad,
arrow keys + and ,, or the control panel keypad to enter the desired value.
To adjust the trimming width, touch [Cover Trimming Adj.].
To adjust the image position of the cover, touch [Cover Image Shift
Adj.].
Touch [Front] or [Back] to select the printed side, then [Up/Down]
or [Right/Left] to select the direction to be adjusted.
Touch OK to return to the Copy Screen.
10

-
When making double-sided copies, select [1-2] or [2-2].

If the original count exceeds 100, use Memory Scan mode.
9-64
11
Proof copy is recommended before making multiple sets.
After proof copying, the thickness of body set will be displayed on the
Perfect Binding Screen. Use this information if making any adjustment.
12
Position originals.
-
13
If [Cover Print On] is selected, refer to Using Perfect Binder PB501 on page 9-50.

Copying does not start while the Perfect binder is warming up.
When warmup is completed, the machine operation starts automatically.
2
Reminder
Never open the front door of the Perfect binder while the machine operation is in process; otherwise the machine immediately stops the operation and paper jam may be caused.
!
Details
If the cover width has been specified improperly, the machine temporarily
stops its operation with a popup menu displayed to ask you whether or
not to continue the operation.
Machine manager can set the machine to display/disappear this popup
menu. For details, refer to 01 Useful Paper Weight Select on
page 17-43.

9-65
9
14
Take out the perfect-bound books

from the perfect binder tray, press
the feeding button to move them forward.
Open the perfect binder tray cover.
!
Details
The perfect binder tray cover will not

open while the machine operation is in
process, and also the feeding button
will not function.
Take out the books.
Then close the perfect binder tray

cover.
9-66
9.11
Using Two Copiers in Tandem

Tandem mode enables your primary (master) machine to work in tandem
with the secondary (tandem) machine for the purpose of providing faster
completion of large copying jobs. Two units working in tandem distribute a
job in half the time of non-tandem mode.
The two copiers should be connected in either way described below.
- Connect the two copiers directly using a crossover cable. In this case,
other network functions provided to the copier will be unavailable.
- Connect each of the two copiers to the hub in a network using straightthrough cables.
!
Details
Use the straight-through or crossover cables of Category 5 or of the later

standard to connect the machines.
Service setting is required to use the tandem mode. Contact your service
representative, if desired.
Specifications for Tandem Mode:
- The combination of the two copiers can be either the two bizhub PRO
1050 copiers, two bizhub PRO 1050P printers, or bizhub PRO 1050 copier and bizhub PRO 1050P printer.
- The combination of the two copiers can be either the two bizhub PRO
1050e copiers, two bizhub PRO 1050eP printers, or bizhub PRO 1050e
copier and bizhub PRO 1050eP printer.
- Two copiers should have the same optional configuration.
- The copier with the [Tandem] key highlighted on the Output Application
Screen will be the master machine, turning both copiers into the tandem
mode.
- Select the copying conditions, scan originals, and press [Start] on the
master machine to operate both copiers in tandem to complete a job.
- Auto low power/Auto shut-off may function while tandem mode is selected. For details, refer to page 9-69.
- Auto reset may function while tandem mode is selected.
- Initially, the tandem mode will be released automatically if Auto reset is
activated on the master machine; however, machine manager can set the
machine to activate the tandem mode as initial setting.
- Apply this setting to the master machine only, if desired. Setting on both
copiers will deactivate the tandem mode.

9-67
9
-
To use the User Authentication function on the two copiers in tandem

mode, the same user/section setting is required on both copiers. In this
case, copying will be available by entering the user/section password in
the master machine only. The password will be transmitted to the tandem
machine automatically so as to enable the copying operation.For details,
refer to 03 Use Auth./Volume Track on page 17-51.
The image data stored in HDD can be output in tandem mode copying.
Tandem mode is unavailable if Security Strengthen mode is activated.
Turn power on the two copiers, then touch [COPY] to display the Copy
Screen.
-
Confirm that both copiers are ready to copy with the Copy Screen
displayed.
Touch [Output Application] on the Copy Screen of either copier.

The Output Application Screen will be displayed.
Touch [Tandem] to highlight it, then touch [OK].
9-68
The copier with [Tandem] highlighted will become the master machine;
the other copier will function as the tandem machine. The Master icon
displays on the Copy Screen of the master machine to indicate that the
two units are ready to work in tandem mode.
!
Details
The Tandem icon will display on the Copy Screen of the tandem machine
when [Start] is pressed on the master machine to start the tandem printing operation.
The tandem mode cannot be selected/continued in the cases shown below.
The message Please wait/ Reserve is not available in Tandem machine,
Tandem machine error/ Please check tandem machine, or Please check
tandem machine will be displayed, as required.
- The tandem mode cannot be selected while the tandem machine is in the
off state, due to Auto shut-off. Press [Power Save] to release it.
- Selected tandem mode will be released automttically when the tandem
machine activates Auto shut-off. Press [Power Save] to release it, then
select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure.
- When any problem occurs in the tandem machine, such as a paper misfeed or lack of paper, the tandem machine will be unavailable for printing;
however, the problem will not cause tandem mode to be released. Take
the appropriate troubleshooting measures to be ready for copying.
- Tandem printing job cannot be started if 100 reserve jobs (not in tandem
mode) are entered on the tandem machine. Wait until the reserve jobs are
completed on the tandem machine.

9-69
9
4
Select the desired copying conditions on the master machine.
!
Details
Ordinary copying operation is still available on the tandem machine during the tandem mode setting.
2
Reminder
Corresponding tray sizes on the master and tandem machines should be

the same when using multiple trays for a single job.
Enter print quantity on the master machine, using the keypad.

When a print quantity amount of 100 is entered, the master and tandem
machines will each copy and output 50 sets.
!
Details
Print quantity must be set for 2 or more copies to activate the tandem
mode.
When the print quantity entered is an odd number, the master machine
will copy and output one sheet/set more than the tandem machine to accommodate the job.

on the platen glass of the master machine.
9-70
Press [Start] on the control panel of the master machine.

The Tandem icon will display on the Copy Screen of the tandem machine to indicate that the two copiers will start working in tandem.
The tandem mode will be released automatically when the tandem

mode copying is completed, and the Master and Tandem icons on
each Copy Screen will disappear.
!
Details
Entering reserve job during Tandem mode copying

If scanning of the next reserved job is performed during the tandem mode
copying, that job will also be performed in the tandem mode. Up to 100
jobs including the present job can be reserved.
Interrupt mode during Tandem mode copying
Interrupt copying is available only on the copier with [Interrupt] pressed.
The tandem mode copying on the copier in interrupt mode will be suspended until the interrupt copying is completed.
Tandem mode and Power Save functions
If the tandem mode is selected while the tandem machine is in Auto low
power mode, the power saving mode will be released automatically.
The tandem mode will not be selected when the tandem machine is
turned off by Auto shut-off. Release the Auto shut-off mode by pressing
[Power Save].
If Auto low power is activated on the tandem machine during the tandem
job setting, the power saving mode will be released automatically when
printing job starts.

9-71
If Auto shut-off is activated on the tandem machine during the tandem

job setting, the tandem mode will be released automatically.
Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the master
machine activates Auto low power/Auto shut-off.
Press [Power Save] to release Auto shut-off if required, then select the
tandem mode again to restart the procedure.
9-72
9.11.1 To Stop Scanning/Printing

To cancel the tandem copying job
Press [Stop] on the control panel of the master machine.

The scanning/printing job stops immediately, and the popup menu appears on the Copy Screen of the master machine to ask you whether
to continue or terminate the job. At this time, the tandem mode is not
released.
Touch [Continue] to go on, or [Exit] to delete all the scanned data and
to release the tandem mode.
To cancel the job in the tandem machine only
Press [Stop] on the control panel of the tandem machine.

The tandem machine stops the current operation immediately, and the
popup menu appears on the Copy Screen of the tandem machine to
ask you whether to continue or cease the operation. At this time, the
tandem mode is not released.
Touch [Continue] to go on, or [Exit] to delete all the data transmitted to

the tandem machine and to release the tandem mode.
The master machine will take over the remaining print quantity and
complete the job.

9-73
9
9.11.2 Troubleshooting
When a paper jam, SC-code (E-code, F-code) trouble or unloaded paper

occurs on either the master or tandem machine
Remove the mishandled paper, take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to correct the problem, or add paper.
When the trouble is cleared, the machine will restart printing for the remaining print quantity.
When memory overflow occurs on either the master or tandem machine
On the master machine

The scanning job will stop immediately, and the tandem copying job will be
suspended on both copiers. At this time, the tandem mode is not released.
Take the same measure to be applied for single copier referring to If Memory Full Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) on page 20-13.
On the tandem machine

The tandem machine will start the tandem copying job when the memory becomes available after completing some reserve jobs.
If the memory of the tandem machine cannot be available despite the elapse
of time, the tandem mode will be released on the tandem machine.
When the power is turned off on either the master or tandem machine:
The tandem mode will be released automatically in either case. Restart the
procedure from the first step.
9-74
10
Advanced Information
Copier
10
10.1
Checking Feature Selections by Proof Copying
10
Use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results
of the copying selections.
Specifications for Proof Copy:
- Proof copy is available when using ADF, or when using Memory Scan
mode for multiple originals or originals to be scanned from original glass.
Select the desired copy conditions on the Copy Screen, then position
originals in the ADF.
Or, use Memory Scan mode to scan all originals.
Press [Proof Copy] on the control panel.
A sample copy will be output while scanning originals in the ADF.

If Memory Scan mode has been used, a sample set will be delivered
immediately.

10-3
10
The screen for checking the job settings will be displayed.
Touch [Close]. The Copy Screen will be restored.
Change the settings or print quantity, as required.

The setting keys that cannot be changed or released will appear
dimmed to show inactivity.
!
Details
If the desired setting cannot be changed, press [Stop] to delete all the
data in memory.
Press [Start].
The machine will start printing.
10-4
10.2
10
Checking Feature Selections Before Copying (Check

Mode)
Display the Check Screen to check the feature selections you made, and use
Proof Copy to make a sample copy if needed, before making multiple copies.
This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the copying selections.
Specifications for Check Mode:
- Proof copy is available when using ADF, or when using Memory Scan
mode for multiple originals or originals to be scanned from original glass.
Select the desired copy conditions on the Copy Screen.
Press [Mode Check] on the control panel to display the Check Screen.

10-5
10
-
Check the job settings on the screen.

If [Next] is active on the screen, touch it to proceed to the next
page.
If making any setting change from the Check Screen, proceed to
the next step.
If releasing any application function from the Check Screen, proceed to step 4.
If a sample copy is needed, proceed to step 5.
If settings are OK, proceed to step 7.
Change the settings from the Check Screen.
Touch the desired copying condition key (Basic Setting/ Output Application/ Special Image/ Application) on the Check Screen, then
touch [Change Setting].
The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copying
condition selected. Change the setting as desired, then press
[Check] to restore the Check Screen to return to the checking
steps.
!
Details
When [Bookmark] has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting

the application function key will jump to that screen. See p. 11-6 for details.
2
Reminder
Do not press [Stop] or [Reset] to change the setting, or all the settings will
restore the initial condition.
10-6
-
10
If making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 5.

To start printing without proof copying, proceed to step 7.
Release Application functions.

-
Touch the desired application function key on the Check Screen to

highlight it, then touch [Release Setting].
The confirmation screen will appear on the Check Screen.

Touch [Yes] to cancel the function, or [No] to restore.
!
Details
The following application functions can be released by touching [Release

Setting]: Program Job, No Image Area Erase, Neg. Pos. Reverse, Image
Centering, All-Image Area, Overlay.
-
If making a sample copy, proceed to the next step.

To start printing, proceed to step 7.
!
Details
The image data can be corrected on a PC using PageScope Jobproofer.

For details, refer to the CD enclosed with bizhub PRO 1050/1050e copier
main body.

10-7
10
5
Make a sample copy.

-
Position originals in the ADF. Or, use Memory Scan mode to scan
all originals.
Press [Proof Copy] on the control panel or touch [Proof Copy] on
the Check Screen.
A sample copy will be output.
!
Details
Press [Stop] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned image data will not be deleted from memory.
-
You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof copying.
!
Details
If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [Stop] to delete all the
data in memory, then press [Reset] to restart the job setting.
-
If any setting change is required, return to step 3, then repeat proof

copying, as required.
If the copy result is satisfactory, touch [Close] on the Check Screen
to return to the Copy Screen, then proceed to the next step.
Change the print quantity, as required.
Position originals, then press [Start].

If proof copying has been made, the machine will simply start printing
without scanning originals.
10-8
10.3
10
Interrupt Copying
Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple
job. When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the previous job
restore automatically and the Copy Screen displays.
Specification for Interrupt Mode:
- The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions:
Machine is not operating printing or scanning job.
Overlay Memory is in use.
he Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs.

Already using Interrupt mode.
- Reserve job cannot be operated in Interrupt mode.
- Auto Low Power or Auto Shut-off will not function during Interrupt mode.
Press [Interrupt] on the control panel.
The [Interrupt] LED starts flashing, then keeps lighted when machine is ready for Interrupt mode.

10-9
10
-
The Copy Screen for Interrupt copying will be displayed.
Set copy conditions, as desired.

All copy conditions except Reserve mode can be specified.
Position original(s), then press [Start] to start the interrupt copying.
When Interrupt copying is completed, press [Interrupt] again.

The [Interrupt] LED turns out and the settings of the initial job will be restored.
Press [Start] to resume copying.
10-10
10.4
10
Storing and Recalling Job Conditions (Mode Memory)

Use Mode Memory to store up to 30 frequently used copy job settings, which
can be recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical
names.
10.4.1 Storing Job Conditions

Follow the procedure below to store the copy job setting.
Specifications for Storing Job Conditions:
- Available settings: Basic setting, Original Setting, Special Image, Application, Output Application, Print quantity
- Stored job is given a job number (01 ~ 30) and alphabetical name (dispensable).
- Up to 30 jobs can be stored.
- Stored job can be registered to the Function key.
Make job selections from the Copy Screen.
Press [Mode Memory] on the control panel.
The Mode Memory Screen will be displayed.

10-11
10
3
Touch [Store].
The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.
Review the settings, then touch [OK].
The Mode Memory Screen will be restored.
!
Details
If any correction is required, touch [Cancel] to return to the Copy Screen.

Make new selections, then restart the operation from step 2.
10-12
Touch the desired job key, then touch [OK].
10
The job keys numbered from 01 to 18 are displayed on the screen.

Touching [Next] will display the keys from 19 to 30.
A blank keys without a lock icon ( ) indicate that no job is stored
under that key, and a named job without a lock icon ( ) displayed
can be overwritten.
The key with a lock icon ( ) displayed is locked and cannot be selected.
Touch [OK] to proceed to the Name Input Screen.
Enter a job name, then touch [OK].
Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch panel alphabet keypad.
Use arrow keys * and ) to move the cursor, and use Shift to enter
upper case letters or symbols.

10-13
10
-
Touch [OK].
The Mode Memory Screen will be restored.
Check that the job name has been correctly entered.
!
Details
If you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch [OK]. The key displays
16 asterisks (*) in place of a name.
10-14
10
10.4.2 Recalling Stored Job Settings

Follow the procedure below to recall jobs that are already stored.
Specifications for Recalling Job Conditions:
- The Mode Memory Screen can be displayed only from the Copy Screen.
If any other screen such as Machine Status Screen is displayed, pressing
[Mode Memory] will be ignored.
Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen, then press [Mode Memory] on the control panel.
Touch a job number key to select a job you want to recall.

10-15
10
-
The job keys numbered from 01 to 18 are displayed on the screen.

Touching [Next] will display the keys from 19 to 30.
The desired job can also be selected by entering two-digit number
from the control panel keypad.
Touch [Job Check].
The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings.
Touch [OK].
The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Copy
Screen.
Position original(s), then press [Start] to print.
10-16
10.5
10
Recalling Previous Job Settings

Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job settings.
Specifications for Recalling Previous Job Settings:
- Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as the previous job settings. Non-completed job or reserve job settings cannot be recalled, even if the setting operations have been made last.
- The previous job settings can be recalled even after the machine power
is turned off then on.
Press [Mode Memory] on the control panel.

10-17
10
2
Touch Pre-Job Recall.
The [Job Check] key will appear on the screen.
Touch [Job Check] to review the settings.

-
The Job Recall Check Screen will be displayed.

Check the settings of the previous job on the screen.
2
Note
Recalled settings can be altered from this screen. For details, Change
the settings from the Check Screen. on page 10-6.
Touch [OK].
The settings of the previous output job will be recalled on the Copy
Screen.
Position original(s), then press [Start].
10-18
10.6
10
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)

The Help Screen provides you with the information about copy job setting
procedure, toner and paper supply, and control panel and touch panel key
operation.
Help Screen comprises the following menu items.
- 01 Copy
provides information on function and operation of the keys on Copy
Screen.
- 02 Scanner
provides information on function and operation of the keys on Scanner
Screen.
- 03 Store
provides information on function and operation of the keys on Store
Screen.
- 04 Recall
provides information on function and operation of the keys on Recall
Screen.
- 05 Job List
provides information on function and operation of the keys on Job List
Screen.
- 06 Machine
provides information on function and operation of the keys on Machine
Status Screen.
- 07 Hard keys
provides information on function and operation of the keys on control
panel.
- 08 Parts and supplies
provides information on adding toner, loading paper, adding staples, and
emptying punch trash basket.
- 09 Weigth Convert
provides information on paper weight, converting grams per meter (g/m2)
to pounds (lb) and kilograms (kg).
The items 01~09 will be displayed on top page of the Help Screen.
Screen key information (01~06) can also be displayed from each screen by
pressing [Help] on the control panel.
To reach item 07, 08, or 09 from any subordinate Help Screens, touch [Top
Menu] to display the top page, then select the desired item.

10-19
10
10.6.1 To Display Help Screen
%
Pressing [Help] when Machine Status Screen is displayed:
Pressing [Help] when Copy Screen is displayed:
10-20
10
Top Page of the Help Screen:

This screen appears when [Top Menu] on the subordinate Help Screen is
touched.

10-21
10
10.7
Adjusting Response Time of Touch Keys

(Accessibility)
This machine can sets the desired interval between touching the screen key
and machine response in advance.
Pressing the Accessibility key on the control panel will select this interval, so
that the machine will respond to the touch key operation only when the key
is kept touched for a specified period of time.
This function is convenient for physically handicapped users who have difficulty in touching keys with accuracy.
!
Details
For details, refer to 06 Key Response Time on page 16-11.

Specifications for Accessibility:
- Response time can be selected from Normal/ 0.5 second/ 1 second/ 2
seconds/ 3 seconds.
Press [Accessibility] on the control panel.
The Accessibility LED lights in green to indicate that the specified response time is set on the machine.
!
Details
If Normal is selected as response time, pressing [Accessibility] will not

make any change in the touch key operation.
10-22
10
To deactivated this function, press [Accessibility] for one second or

longer.
The Accessibility LED goes off, and normal response time will be restored in touch key operation.

10-23
10
10-24
11
Machine Status Screen

Setting
POD Administrator
Machine Status Screen Setting
11
11.1
Machine Status Screen Setting Outlines
11
The [Paper Set], [Adjustment], and [Controller] keys are located at the bottom
of the Machine Status Screen, to display each setting screen.
Paper Set
The Paper Set popup screen is displayed.
Specify each tray size, register/delete paper type/weight setting, and also set
air assist function on/off from this screen. For the details, refer to Paper Setting Outlines on page 12-3.

11-3
11
!
Details
You may set the other settings on another screen while specifying the paper setting. Press the tab key to switch the screens.
11-4
11
Adjustment
The Adjustment mode menu screen is displayed.
Adjust the settings of Image Control and Output options. For the details, refer
to Machine Adjustment Outlines on page 13-3.
After completing the Adjustment mode settings, touch [Return] to exit the
Adjustment mode.
You cannot set the other settings while specifying the Adjustment mode.
Controller
The Controller Setting Menu Screen is displayed.
Specify the settings concerning the Print Controller. For the details, refer to
Function Overview on page 14-3.
Touch the [MACHINE] tab to exit the Controller Setting mode.
11-5
11
11-6
12
Paper Setting
POD Administrator
Paper Setting
12
12
Paper Setting
How to operate Paper Setting to be designated for paper tray
12.1
Paper Setting Outlines

This machine provides the optimum print result according to each characteristics of copy paper by specifying paper size, paper type/weight, and air assist function for each tray (Tray Setting).
The paper type/weight can be programmed in advance, and then applied to
each tray as required (Register Type/Weight).
The programmed properties can also be altered and newly registered at any
time.
12.1.1 Setting Items in Paper Setting

Paper Setting includes three setting items; paper size, paper type/weight,
and air assist function.
Select one of the following four items as paper size.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard Size
Custom Size
Wide Size Paper
Tab Paper
Set paper type/weight by specifying the following five items and paper name.
1. Type
Select one of the following nine types.
Coated A, Coated B, Fine, Normal, Book/News, Embossed, User, Blank
Insert, OHP
2. Weight
Select one of the following eight types.
40 - 49 g, 50-61g, 62-71g, 72-91g, 92-130g, 131-161g, 162-209g, 210244g, 245-300g
!
Details
For details of paper type specifications, refer to Paper type and weight
on page 12-7.

12-3
Paper Setting
12
3. Coloured Paper
Select one of the following six types.
White, Transparent, Yellow, Pink, Blue, Green
4. Hole-Punch
Select either condition.
With Punch Hole or No Punch Hole
5. Both Sides Adjustment
Specify the Vertical zoom, Horizontal zoom, Up/Down shift amount, and
Right/Left shift amount for both front and back pages.
- Vertical zoom: 0.5% to -0.5% (in 0.05% increments)
- Horizontal zoom: 10% to -10% (in 0.1% increments)
- Up/Down shift amount: 10 to -10mm (in 0.1mm increments)
- Right/Left shift amount: 10 to -10mm (in 0.1mm increments)
Use the Air Assist function to blow air to the paper from the guide plate inside
the tray in order to prevent feeding troubles which a specific paper type
tends to cause.
Select one of the following three conditions.
- Auto: Activate the function according to the paper feed timing.
- On:
Always activate the function.
- Off:
Always deactivate the function.
Paper Type Specifications
The following six paper types are provided according to the plainness of paper.
- Coated A
- Coated B
- Fine, Normal
- Book/News
- Embossed
The special paper types that are not included in the above six types are set
separately.
- Blank Insert
- OHP, User
The following describes the specifications of each paper type.
Coated A
The coated paper is an art paper or coated paper, applied approximately 20
to 40g of coating per 1 m2 to on top of both side of fine paper. The coated
paper is mostly used for luxury art books, calendars, car brochures, books,
magazines, leaflets, and posters. Always specify [Coated A] to a tray to
which the coated paper is loaded.
12-4
Paper Setting
12
Coated B
Specify [Coated B] when overlay printing on the offset printed coated paper.
If a trouble occurs in feeding the coated paper when [Coated A] is specified,
select [Coated B].
!
Details
When using the overlay printed paper, you are required to specify specific
settings besides [Coated B] to the tray to which this type of coated paper
is load. Contact your sales representative.
Fine
The Fine paper is a non-coated paper generally used for offset printing. The
fine paper has a high degree of whiteness and used for various purposes.
Specify [Fine] to a tray to which the fine paper is loaded.
Normal
The Normal paper is used for copying in general and is called "PPC paper."
The normal paper is usually not a recycled paper. Specify [Normal] to the tray
to which the normal paper or the recycled paper for copying is loaded.
Book/News
The Book/News paper is used for a body part of a book. It is a highly opaque
paper to prevent prints to be seen from the back, or a cream-coloured paper
for ease of reading. Specify [Book/News] to a tray to which this type of paper
is loaded.
Embossed
The Embossed paper has a non-smooth surface on which a toner is hard to
be fixed. Specify [Embossed] to a tray to which this type of paper is loaded.
Blank Insert
Blank Insert is not a category of the paper type. This is only fed without being
printed. When the Cover With Blank Sheet, Blank Insert, or OHP interleave
blank function is used, specify [Blank Insert] to a tray to which a paper already printed and not copied by this machine is loaded, or a blank paper only
to be fed is loaded.
User
When a paper type other than that of which can be specified on this machine
is used, use this function. For the details, contact your service representative.

12-5
Paper Setting
12
OHP
Specify [OHP] to a tray to which transparent films are loaded.
Weight is classified into eight types as shown in the following table.
12-6
Paper Setting
12
Paper type and weight

Coated A
Coated B
Fine
40 ~
49 g/m
Normal
Book/
News
Embossed
(Disable)
(Disable)
50 ~
61 g/m
62 ~
71 g/m
72 ~
91 g/m
92 ~
130 g/m
131 ~
161 g/m
162 ~
209 g/m
210 ~
244 g/m
(Disable)
245 ~
300 g/m
(Disable)
Pattern
Description
Air Assist becomes activated.
Tray adjustment (installing an assist plate, etc.) is required by your service representative.
Able to be specified only to Tray 4.
Copying speed becomes a little slow. Printing speed is 90 sheets per minute when
printing A4 in the simplex print mode.
Copying speed becomes slow. Printing speed is 63 sheets per minute when printing A4 in the simplex print mode.
Copying speed may be slower depending on paper size and environment of the
machine.

12-7
Paper Setting
12
Paper Weight Conversion Chart
Inch
g/m
Paper type, Basic size

Bond
17x22
432x559
Cover
20x26
508x660
Index
25.5x30.5
648x775
Bristol
22.5x28.5
572x724
Tag
24x36
610x914
Book
25x38
635x965
lb
lb
lb
lb
lb
lb
50.0
13.3
18.5
27.7
22.8
30.8
33.8
52.3
13.9
19.4
29.0
23.9
32.2
35.4
54.2
14.4
20.1
30.0
24.7
33.3
36.7
60.2
16.0
22.3
33.3
27.5
37.0
40.7
64.0
17.0
23.7
35.4
29.2
39.4
43.3
66.3
17.7
24.6
36.7
30.3
40.8
44.9
68.7
18.3
25.4
38.0
31.4
42.3
46.5
72.3
19.3
26.8
40.0
33.0
44.5
48.9
75.9
20.2
28.1
42.0
34.7
46.7
51.3
80.0
21.3
29.6
44.3
36.5
49.2
54.1
83.7
22.3
31.0
46.4
38.2
51.5
56.6
88.0
23.4
32.6
48.7
40.2
54.1
59.5
90.0
24.0
33.3
49.8
41.1
55.4
60.9
98.3
26.2
36.4
54.4
44.9
60.5
66.5
100.0
26.6
37.0
55.4
45.7
61.5
67.6
104.7
27.9
38.8
58.0
47.8
64.4
70.8
108.0
28.8
40.0
59.8
49.3
66.4
73.1
110.0
29.3
40.7
60.9
50.2
67.7
74.4
120.0
32.0
44.4
66.5
54.8
73.8
81.2
127.9
34.1
47.4
70.8
58.4
78.7
86.5
130.0
34.6
48.1
72.0
59.4
80.0
87.9
140.0
37.3
51.8
77.5
63.9
86.1
94.7
150.0
39.9
55.5
83.1
68.5
92.3
101.5
160.0
42.6
59.2
88.6
73.1
98.4
108.2
170.0
45.3
62.9
94.2
77.6
104.6
115.0
180.0
47.9
66.7
99.7
82.2
110.7
121.8
190.0
50.6
70.4
105.2
86.8
116.9
128.5
200.0
53.3
74.1
110.8
91.3
123.1
135.3
210.0
55.9
77.8
116.3
95.9
129.2
142.1
220.0
58.6
81.5
121.8
100.5
135.4
148.8
230.0
61.3
85.2
127.4
105.0
141.5
155.6
12-8
Paper Setting
Inch
g/m
12
Paper type, Basic size
Bond
17x22
432x559
Cover
20x26
508x660
Index
25.5x30.5
648x775
Bristol
22.5x28.5
572x724
Tag
24x36
610x914
Book
25x38
635x965
lb
lb
lb
lb
lb
lb
240.0
63.9
88.9
132.9
109.6
147.7
162.4
250.0
66.6
92.6
138.5
114.2
153.8
169.1
260.0
69.2
96.3
144.0
118.7
160.0
175.9
270.0
71.9
100.0
149.5
123.3
166.1
182.7
280.0
74.6
103.7
155.1
127.9
172.3
189.4
290.0
77.2
107.4
160.6
132.4
178.4
196.2
300.0
79.9
111.1
166.1
137.0
184.6
202.9
!
Details
The Help Screen provides the paper weight conversion table. Press
[Help] on the control panel to display the Help Screen, if desired.

12-9
Paper Setting
12
12.1.2 Recommended Setting of Paper Type/Weight
It is recommended that paper type/weight should be registered for each paper to be used, so that the setting change can be made according to the environment (temperature, humidity, paper condition, etc.) on the basis of
registered settings for each tray.
Recommended Setting Procedure
1. Register the paper type/weight according to the paper type to be used.
2. Specify the paper size, registered condition, and whether to use the air
assist function for each tray.
3. Make setting change on the paper type/weight for each tray, as required,
according to the environment and paper condition.
4. If the changes made are considered to be a new standard, make change
in registration or make it a new registration.
!
Details
Service representative can make adjustments for all trays at the same
time. Contact your service representative, if desired.
Refer to a label on a paper package when registering the paper conditions.
12-10
Paper Setting
12.2
12
Register Paper Type/Weight

Follow the procedure below to register paper type/weight according to the
paper type to be used.
Procedure
Touch [Paper Set] - [Register Type/Weight].

12-11
Paper Setting
12
2
Touch the key to be registered. The Input Condition Screen will be displayed.
12-12
Paper Setting
12
Touch [Type] to display the Type popup menu, then select the desired
paper type.
!
Details
For details, refer to Paper Type Specifications on page 12-4.
Touch [Name] on the Input Condition Screen, then enter the name of
the paper to be used.

12-13
Paper Setting
12
!
Details
The same name as the paper type specified is displayed on the screen.
To alter it, enter the new paper type name. For details on entering texts
in the field, see the appendix.
Touch [Weight] on the Input Condition Screen, then select the desired
paper weight.
!
Details
For details, refer to Paper type and weight on page 12-7.
Touch [Coloured Paper] on the Input Condition Screen, then select the
colour of the paper to be used.
12-14
Paper Setting
12
10
11
Touch [Hole-Punch] on the Input Condition Screen, then touch [With

Punch Hole] if the paper has punch holes.
12

12-15
Paper Setting
12
13
Touch [Both Sides Adj.] on the Input Condition Screen, then enter the
adjustment value as follows.
Touch [Front] or [Back] on the Front and Back Page Adjustment

Screen to select the printed side.
Select the adjustment item (vertical zoom, horizontal zoom, vertical
shift, and horizontal shift.)
Touch [+ 5 -] to specify the value to be positive or negative.
Use the touch panel keypad or arrow keys (,) and (+) to enter the
desired adjustment value.
!
Details
For details, refer to Setting Items in Paper Setting on page 12-3.
14
Touch [OK].
15
Touch [OK] on the Input Condition Screen to complete the setting.The

Input Condition Screen will be restored.
16
Touch [Close]. The Machine Status Screen will be restored.
12-16
Paper Setting
12.3
12
Delete Paper Type/Weight

Follow the procedure below to delete the paper type/weight previously registered.
Procedure
Touch [Paper Set] - [Delete Type/Weight].

12-17
Paper Setting
12
2
Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desired paper type/weight from

the list, then touch the key to highlight it.
Touch [OK].
The popup menu will appear to confirm that the selected key is to be
deleted.
- Touch [Yes] to delete it, or touch [No] to cancel.
If more than one paper type/size is to be deleted, repeat steps 2

and 3.
12-18
Paper Setting
12.4
12
Set Paper Size, Conditions, Air Assist Function for a

Tray
Specify the paper sizes, programmed paper type/weight, air assist function
for each tray.

12-19
Paper Setting
12
Procedure
Touch [Paper Set] - [Tray Setting].
Touch the tray key (Tray 1 to 5) to be specified.
Touch [Size Setting]. The Size Setting Screen will be displayed.
Follow the procedure for each setting.
12-20
Paper Setting
12
Setting Standard Size
1. Touch [Standard Size] to highlight it.

2. If selected tray will be loaded with one of the following sizes, touch
[Search Size Set] to display the Search Size Set Screen, then touch the
desired size key.
5.5x8.5, 8.5x11R, 8x13, 8.12x13.2, 8.25x13, 8.5x13
!
Details
If 5.5x8.5 is selected on the Search Size Set Screen, the machine will automatically detect 5.5x8.5 instead of A5. Similarly, 8.5x11R will be detected instead of A4R, 8x13/8.12x13.2/8.25x13/8.5x13 will be detected
instead of 8.5x14.

12-21
Paper Setting
12
3. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Tray Setting Screen will be restored.
4. Touch [OK] on the Size Setting Screen to complete the setting.
5. Proceed to step 5. (p. 12-27)
Setting Custom Size
1. Touch [Custom Size] to highlight it.

2. Touch the vertical/horizontal size key, then use the touch panel keypad
orarrow keys (,) and (+) to enter the desired size. From the minimum size
of 100 x 140 mm to the maximum size of 324 x 460 mm can be set.
3. Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired image
position.
4. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Tray Setting Screen will be restored.
2
Reminder
The smallest size of the custom size can be changed. Contact your service representative for details.
12-22
Paper Setting
12
Setting Wide Size Paper
1. Touch [Wide Size Paper] to highlight it.

2. Touch the desired wide size key to highlight it.
3. Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired image
position.
4. Touch [Input Size] to display the Size Input Screen.
5. Touch the vertical size key, then use the touch panel keypad or arrow
keys (+) and (,) to enter the vertical size.
The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical size of
the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximum
of 324 mm.
6. Touch the horizontal size key, then use the touch panel keypad or arrow
keys (+) and (,) to enter the horizontal size.
The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal size
of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximum of 460 mm.

12-23
Paper Setting
12
!
Details
When setting wide size, be sure to specify the precise dimensions of paper to be used. The dimensions of the wide size selected in step 2 are not
correctly set in the initial setting.
7. Touch [Select Size] to return to the Select Size Screen.
8. Touch [OK] on the Size Setting Screen to complete the setting. The Tray
Setting Screen will be restored.
12-24
Paper Setting
12
Setting Tab Paper
1. Touch [Tab Paper] to highlight it.

2. Touch the desired tabbed paper size key to highlight it.
3. If setting the custom tabbed paper size, touch [Custom Size] to display
the Size Setting Screen.
12-25
Paper Setting
12
4. Touch the vertical/horizontal/index size key, then use the touch panel
keypad or arrow keys (+) and (,) to enter the desired size.
5. Touch [Number of Tabs] to display the Number of Tabs Screen, then use
the touch panel keypad or arrow keys (+) and (,) to enter the number of
tabs. Setting range is from 1 to 5.
6. Touch [OK] to complete the setting.
7. Touch [OK] on the Size Setting Screen to complete the setting. The Tray
Setting Screen will be restored.
12-26
Paper Setting
12
Touch [Type/Weight] on the Tray Setting Screen.
Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desired paper type/weight from

the list, then touch the key to highlight it.

12-27
Paper Setting
12
7
Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Tray Setting Screen will be restored.
Touch [Air Assist ]on the Tray Setting Screen.
Touch [Auto,] [On], or [Off] to highlight it.
10
11
Touch [Close] on the Tray Setting Screen. The Paper Set Screen will be
restored.
12
Touch [Close] on the Paper Set Screen. The Machine Status Screen will
be restored.
12-28
Paper Setting
12.5
12
Change Paper Type/Weight Specified for a Tray

The paper size and air assist function can be changed with the same procedure as setting.
To change paper type/weight already designated for a tray, follow the procedure below.
!
Details
Front and Back Page Adjustment is required to execute every time the
paper type is changed or as daily maintenance, because a shrinkage ratio
varies depending upon the paper type, paper brand, and the temperature
and/or humidity of a storage location.

12-29
Paper Setting
12
Procedure
Touch [Paper Set] - [Tray Setting].
Touch [Change] to display the Change Setting Screen.
12-30
Paper Setting
12
Touch the key of the setting item to be changed.

12-31
12
12-32
Paper Setting
Paper Setting
12
To change it, follow the same procedure as registering the paper conditions. For details, refer to Register Paper Type/Weight on
page 12-11.
To output a chart for the Front and Back Page Adjustment, proceed to
the next step.
To output a chart for the Front and Back Page Adjustment, touch [Both
Sides Adj.] on the Change Setting Screen. Follow the procedure below
to set the adjustment value.
1. Touch [Front] or [Back] on the Front and Back Page Adjustment Screen
to select the printed side, then touch [Chart Adjustment].
2. Touch [Copy] tab to display the Copy Screen.
3. Press [Start] to output a chart.
With Front side selected:
Use a scale to measure. Enter the adjustment value from the screen keypad.
Setting range:
X (horizontal) - 10 (left) to + 10 (right), Y (vertical) - 10 (top) to + 10 (bottom), 1 step = 0.1 mm
12-33
Paper Setting
12
With Back side selected:

Measure the positional gap between the front side and back side.
Setting range:
X (horizontal) - 10 (left) to + 10 (right), Y (vertical) - 10 (top) to + 10 (bottom), 1 step = 0.1 mm
4. Touch [Adjustment Start].
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the desired result is obtained.
To newly register the modified setting, touch [Register]. To simply

change the setting, proceed to step 10.
Touch the desired registration key on the Register Screen.
The Input Name Screen will be displayed. Enter the desired name.
12-34
Paper Setting
12
10
If selected key has already been named, that name will be displayed.
Change it in this step, if desired. For details of entering texts in the field,
see the appendix.
11
Touch [OK]. To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].
12
13
Touch [Close] to return to the Paper Set Screen.
14

12-35
12
12-36
Paper Setting
13
Adjustment
POD Administrator
Adjustment
13
Adjustment
13.1
Machine Adjustment Outlines
13
The following adjustments for image control are included in the Machine Adjustment functions.
- 01 Magnification Adjustment
Provide controls for image magnification.
- 02 Timing Adjustment
Provide controls for image timing.
- 03 Centering Adjustment
Provide the centering control to the direction of paper feed.

13-3
Adjustment
13
13.2
01 Magnification Adjustment
01 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1>
In the printer control, perform this adjustment to control the magnification for
Side 1 to the direction of paper feed.
!
Details
This adjustment is a baseline for both sides adjustment enabled in Tray

Setting and Register Type/Weight.
13-4
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Magnification Adjustment].
Touch [01 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1>] to display the

Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> Screen.
Touch the [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen.
Load A3 paper into the tray, then press [Start] to output the sample pattern (No. 16).
Measure the resultant magnification to the direction of paper feed.
205.7
Paper feed
direction
If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab

to return to the Adjustment Screen.

13-5
Adjustment
13
7
Use the touch panel keypad to enter an appropriate value, then touch
[Set].
Available range: -10 (short) to +10 (long), 1 step = 0.05%.
Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the desired result is obtained.
Touch [Return] to restore the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen.
13-6
Adjustment
13
02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>

Side 2 to the direction of paper feed.
!
Details
This adjustment is a baseline for both sides adjumstment enabled in Tray

Setting and Register Type/Weight.

13-7
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>] to display the

Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> Screen.
Select the required paper size using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] selected each time, the display will switch as follows:
Tray1 Tray2 PFU upper tray PFU middle tray PFU lower tray
Touch the [COPY] tab.
Load A3 paper into the tray, then press [Start] to output the sample pattern (No. 16).
Measure the resultant magnification to the direction of paper feed.
205.7
Paper feed
direction

[Set].
Available range: -10 (short) to 0 (long), 1 step = 0.05%.
10
13-8
Adjustment
13
03 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1>

Side 1 perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.

13-9
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [03 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1>] to display the Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> Screen.
Select A3 paper, then press [Start] to output the sample pattern (No.
16).
Measure the resultant magnification perpendicular to the direction of

paper feed.
Paper feed
direction
190

[Set].
Available range: -10 (short) to +10 (long), 1 step = 0.1%.
13-10
Adjustment
13
04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>

Side 2 perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.

13-11
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>] to display the Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> Screen.
Select the required paper size using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] selected each time, the display will switch as follows:
Tray1 Tray2 PFU upper tray PFU middle tray PFU lower tray
16).
Measure the resultant magnification perpendicular to the direction of

paper feed.
Paper feed
direction
190

[Set].
Available range: -5 (short) to 0 (long), 1 step = 0.1%.
13-12
Adjustment
13.3
13
02 Timing Adjustment
01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>
Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing for Side 1.
2
Reminder
Perform this adjustment after completing Printer Drum Clock Adjustment

<SIDE1>.

13-13
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [02 Timing Adjustment].
Touch [01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>] to display the

Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1> Screen.
Select the required tray using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] selected
each time, the display will switch as follows:
All Tray1 offset Tray2 offset - PFU upper tray offset PFU middle
tray offset PFU lower tray offset
16).
Measure the resultant restart timing.
20
Paper feed
direction
13-14
Adjustment
13

[Set].
Available range: -30 (short) to +30 (long), 1 step = 0.1 mm.
10
Touch [Return] to restore the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen.

13-15
Adjustment
13
02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>
Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing for Side 2.
2
Reminder
Perform this adjustment after completing Printer Drum Clock Adjustment

<SIDE2>.
13-16
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>] to display the

Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2> Screen.
Select the required tray using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] selected
each time, the display will switch as follows:
All Tray1 offset Tray2 offset - PFU upper tray offset PFU middle
tray offset PFU lower tray offset
16).
Measure the resultant restart timing.
20
Paper feed
direction

[Set].
Available range: -30 (short) to +30 (long), 1 step = 0.1 mm.
10

13-17
Adjustment
13
03 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing in scanning the original
with the original glass.
13-18
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [03 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment] to display the Scanner

Restart Timing Adjustment Screen.
Select A3 paper, place the original of which a misalignment can be easily monitored on the original glass, then press [Start].
Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.
If there is the misalignment between the original and the output, touch
the [ADJUSTMENT] tab to return to the Adjustment Screen.
[Set].
Available range: -40 (fast) to +40 (slow), 1 step = 0.1 mm.

13-19
Adjustment
13
04 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing in scanning the original
with ADF.
13-20
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [04 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment] to display the ADF Restart
Timing Adjustment Screen.
Select the desired paper side using [Next] or [Back]. Each time [Next]
is selected, the display will switch as follows:
SIDE 1 - SIDE 2
2
Note
"SIDE 1" refers to the right side of the paper, while "SIDE 2" refers to the
reverse side.
Select A3 paper, place the original of which a misalignment can be easily monitored, then press [Start].
Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.
If there is the misalignment between the original and the output, touch
the [ADJUSTMENT] tab to return to the Adjustment Screen.
[Set].
Available range: -50 (fast) to +50 (slow), 1 step = 0.1 mm.
10

13-21
Adjustment
13
13.4
03 Centering Adjustment
01 Printer Centring Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to control image centring to the direction of paper
feed.
13-22
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [03 Centring Adjustment].
Touch [01 Printer Centring Adjustment] to display the Printer Centring

Adjustment Screen.
16).
Fold the output sheet at the centre to the direction of paper feed and
measure the distance between the lines on both sides.

[Set].
Available range: -64 (forward) to +63 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm.
Touch [Return] to restore the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen.

13-23
Adjustment
13
13.5
Finisher Adjustment Outlines

Use this function to make fine adjustments on Finisher options.
!
Details
The target adjustment items vary depending upon the configuration of installed options.
-
01 Stapler Position Adjustment

Adjust the dislocation of sheets delivered to the tray and centre position
of staples processed by the Staple Finisher FS-503.
02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment

Make adjustments on punching functions operated by the Folding Unit
FD-501.
03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment

Make adjustments on folding functions operated by the Folding Unit
FD-501.
04 Stacker Adjustment
Make adjustments on the Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/502.
05 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment

Make adjustments on the Saddle Stitcher SD-501.
06 Perfect Binder Adjustment

Make adjustments on the Perfect Binder PB-501.
07 Trimmer Count Adjustment

Select the coutn of the trimmer receiver of the Saddle Stitcher SD-501.
13-24
Adjustment
13.6
13
01 Stapler Position Adjustment

01 Stapling Centre Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the centre position of copied/printed sheets and
of staples processed by the Staple Finisher FS-503.
The paper width adjustment is supposed to be completed before this adjustment.

13-25
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [01 Stapler Position

Adj.].
Touch [01 Stapling Center Position Adjustment] to display the Stapling

Centre Position Adjustment Screen.
Press [Start]. A sample copy will be output.
Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then
touch [Set].
Available range: -20 (forward) to +20 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm
Fold the output sheet in two on the centre to the direction of paper feed
and check misalignment (a) of the stapling centre position.
1
a
2
If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT]

tab. Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 6 until the desired result is
obtained.
Touch [Return] to restore the Stapler Position Adjustment Mode Menu

Screen.
13-26
Adjustment
13
02 Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment if stapled sheets are not aligned neatly processed
when Straight/Staple mode is selected on the Staple Finisher FS-503.

13-27
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment ]- [01 Stapler Position

Adj.].
Touch [02 Paper Width Adjustment] to display the Paper Width Adjustment Screen.
Touch [Straight Mode] or [Staple Mode] to select the adjustment mode.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray.
If [Straight Mode] has been selected in step 3, press [Start].

If [Staple Mode] has been selected in step 3, touch [Staple] and then
press [Start].
Open the finisher door, then pull out

the stapler unit.
-
Check the clearance between fixing plates and output paper.
2
Note
When paper length is 239 mm or longer, the stapler unit cannot be pulled
out. In this case, remove the paper before pulling out the stapler unit, then
return the paper to the original position.
13-28
Adjustment
13
Check misalignment (a), in which misalignment occurs if the paper

width setting is larger than the actual width, or paper curving (b), in
which a sample set is curved if the paper width setting is smaller than
the actual width has occurred.
[Straight Mode]
[Staple Mode]
If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.
10
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted. Touching

[Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows.
11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8.5x11 - A4 - B5 - A5 5.5x8.5 - 8x13 - 8.125x13.25 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K - 16K - 12x18 A3W - B4W - A4W - A4WR - B5W - A5W - 12x18W - 11x17W 8.5x11W - 8.5x11WR - 5.5x8.5W - Non-Standard
11
touch [Set].
Available range: -20 (wide) to +20 (narrow), 1 step = 0.1 mm
2
Note
Make the width between fixing plates narrower than the paper width.

13-29
Adjustment
13
12
Remove the output paper, then close the finisher door.
13
If desired adjustment result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab, then repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 12 until the desired result is obtained.
14
Touch [Return] to restore the Stapler Position Adjustment Mode Menu

Screen.
13-30
Adjustment
13.7
13
02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the specific paper size if punch holes processed
by the Folding Unit FD-501 dislocate largely.

13-31
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Multi Folder

(Punch) Adj.].
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify the set
number to 10, then press [Start]. A sample pattern will be output.
Check the diameter of penetrated holes when output sheets are piled
up.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted.

Touching [Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows.
All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - B5R - 8.5x11 - A4 A5R - B5 - A5 - 5.5x8.5 - 8x13 - 8.12x13.2 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K 16K - 16KR - 12x18
touch [Set].
2
Note
If the setting is too wide, the centre position of punch holes may dislocate. If the setting is too narrow, the position of punch holes may vary.
Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 8 until the desired result is obtained.
10
Touch [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) Adjustment

Mode Menu Screen.
13-32
Adjustment
13
02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the position of punch holes to the direction of paper feed.

13-33
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Multi Folder

(Punch) Adj.].
Touch [02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment] to display the

Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify

[Punch], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
Check the distance (a) from the edge of the feeding sheet to the centre
position of the punch hole.
a

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - B5R - 8.5x11 - A4 A5R - B5 - A5 - 5.5x8.5 - 8x13 - 8.12x13.2 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K 16K - 16KR - 12x18
Select the desired hole type.
touch [Set].
10
13-34
Adjustment
13
11
If adjustment in any other hole type or paper size is required, repeat

steps from 3 to 10.
12
Touch [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) Adjustment

Mode Menu Screen.

13-35
Adjustment
13
13.8
03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment

01 Folding Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the folding position processed by theFolding
Unit FD-501.
13-36
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Multi Folder (Fold)

Adj.].
Touch [01 Folding Position Adjustment] to display the Folding Position

Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Folding], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
Check the misalignment (a) of the edge of the feeding sheets.

Touching [Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows:
All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18
touch [Set].
Available range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm
Paper feed
direction
2
Note
When misalignment (a) of step 5 has occurred, enter the "+" value.
10
Touch [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment Mode

Menu Screen.

13-37
Adjustment
13
02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Letter Fold-in mode processed by the Folding Unit FD-501.
2
Reminder
When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with
the Double Fold adjustment.
The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while
that of Double Fold is calculated from the position of the first fold line,
therefore a distance (b) in step 5 will be altered by changing the position
of either Single Fold or Double Fold.
13-38
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment] to display the Letter

Fold-in Position Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Letter

Fold-in], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
Check a distance (a) and distance (b) on the output sheet.
a
2
1
Paper feed
direction

13-39
Adjustment
13
7

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18
Touch [Double Fold].
touch [Set].
2
Note
The distance (a) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value is entered, and
decrease when the "-" value is entered.
10
Touch [Single Fold]. Repeat step 9.
2
Note
The distance (b) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value is entered, and
11
12

Menu Screen.
13-40
Adjustment
13
03 Letter Fold-out Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Letter Fold-out mode
processed by the Folding Unit FD-501.
!
Details

13-41
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [03 Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment] to display the Letter Foldout Position Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Letter

Fold-out], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
2
Paper feed
direction
13-42
Adjustment
13

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18
Touch [Single Fold].
touch [Set].
2
Note
10
Touch [Double Fold]. Repeat step 9.
2
Note
11
12

Menu Screen.

13-43
Adjustment
13
04 Double Parallel Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Double Parallel folding
mode processed by the Folding Unit FD-501.
2
Reminder
the Single Fold adjustment.
13-44
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [04 Double Parallel Position Adjustment] to display the Double

Parallel Position Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Double

Parallel], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
b
1
2
Paper feed
direction

13-45
Adjustment
13
7

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18
touch [Set].
2
Note
The distance (a) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value is entered, and
increase when the "-" value is entered.
10
2
Note
The distance (b) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value is entered, and
11
12

Menu Screen.
13-46
Adjustment
13
05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Z-Fold mode processed
by the Folding Unit FD-501.
2
Reminder
the Single Fold adjustment.

13-47
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment] to display the Z-Fold Position

Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [ZFold], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
b
2
Paper feed
direction
13-48
Adjustment
13

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18
touch [Set].
2
Note
10
2
Note
11
12

Menu Screen.

13-49
Adjustment
13
06 Gate Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Gate folding mode processed by the Folding Unit FD-501.
2
Reminder
When adjusting Single Fold, Double Fold and Triple Fold at a time, be
sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment.
that of Double Fold is calculated from the position of the first fold line, and
that of Triple Fold is calculated from the position of the second fold line,
therefore a distance (a), distance (b) and distance (c) in step 5 will be altered by changing the position of any fold position.
13-50
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment ]- [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Multi Folder (Fold)

Adj.].
Touch [06 Gate Position Adjustment] to display the Gate Position Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Gate],

then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
Check a distance (a), distance (b) and distance (c) on the output sheet.
1
a
3
2
b
c
Paper feed
direction

13-51
Adjustment
13
7

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18
touch [Set].
2
Note
The distance (a) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value is entered, and
10
Touch [Double Fold] and [Triple Fold] to set in the same manner respectively.
2
Note
In Double Fold, the distance (b) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value
is entered, and decrease when the "-" value is entered.
In Triple Fold, the distance (c) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value
is entered, and increase when the "-" value is entered.
11
12

Menu Screen.
13-52
Adjustment
13.9
13
04 Stacker Adjustment
Perform this adjustment when output sheets are not aligned in a perpendicular position to the direction of paper feed processed by the Large Capacity
Stacker LS-501/502.

13-53
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Stacker Adj.].
Specify [A3] then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
If output sheets are misaligned, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the desired Stacker No..
touch [Set].
Available range: -20 (narrow) to +20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1 mm
10
Touch [Return] to restore the Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu Screen.
13-54
Adjustment
13
02 Paper Length Adjustment

Perform this adjustment when output sheets are not aligned to the direction
of paper feed processed by the Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/502.

13-55
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Stacker Adj.].
Touch [02 Paper Length Adjustment] to display the Paper Length Adjustment Screen.
Specify [A3] then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
If output sheets are misaligned, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the desired Stacker No..
touch [Set].
Available range: -20 (narrow) to +20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1 mm
10
Touch [Return] to restore the Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu Screen.
13-56
Adjustment
13
13.10 05 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment

01 Stapling Centre Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the centre (folding) position of copied/printed
sheets and of staples processed by the Saddle Stitcher SD-501.
The paper width adjustment (06) and folding position adjustment (04) are
supposed to be completed before this adjustment.

13-57
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [05 Saddle Stitcher

Adj.].
Touch [01 Stapling Centre Adjustment] to display the Stapling Centre

Position Adjustment Screen.
Select the Fold&Staple mode, then press [Start].

A sample copy will be output.
Check misalignment (a) of the folded line and stapling position.
[1]
a
[2]
If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT]

tab.
13-58
Adjustment
13
touch [Set].
Available range: -20 (forward) to +20 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm
Touch [Return] to restore the Saddle Stitcher Adjustment Mode Menu

Screen.

13-59
Adjustment
13
02 Stapling Paper Width Adjustment
Perform this adjustment if stapled sheets are not aligned neatly processed
by the Saddle Stitcher SD-501.
13-60
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [02 Stapling Paper Width Adjustment] to display the Staple Paper Width Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, select

Fold&Staple and then press [Start].
A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.
Check misalignment (a), in which misalignment occurs if the paper

width setting is larger than the actual width, or paper curving (b), in
which a sample set is curved if the paper width setting is smaller than
the actual width has occurred.

All Size - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - B5R - 8x13 8.12x13.2 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K - 16KR - 12x18 - A3W - B4W - A4WR
- B5WR - 12x18W - 11x17W - 8.5x11WR - Special
touch [Set].

13-61
Adjustment
13
!
Details
The following limitation is put on the paper width setting according to the
actual paper width.
Actual paper width
Minimum value
Maximum value
~ 222 mm
91 mm
Actual width minus 91 mm
222 mm ~ 290 mm
Not limited
Not limited
290 mm ~
Not limited
165 mm
Using paper size of which actual width is less than 222 mm such as A4R,
the staple pitch will be set to 91 mm automatically even if the value shorter than 91 mm of staple pitch is entered.
10

Screen.
13-62
Adjustment
13
03 Staple Pitch Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the staple pitch processed by Saddle Stitcher
SD-501.

13-63
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment] to display the Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen.

Fold&Staple, then press [Start].
Check the staple pitch (a) of the sample sheet.
If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the ADJUSTMENT tab.

touch [Set].
Available range: -20 (wide) to +20 (narrow), 1 step = 1 mm
10

Screen.
13-64
Adjustment
13
04 Folding Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the double-folding position processed by the
Saddle Stitcher SD-501.

13-65
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [04 Folding Position Adjustment] to display the Folding Position

Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Multi

Centre, then press [Start].
Check the misalignment (a) of the edge of the feeding sheets.
Paper feed direction

touch [Set].
2
Note
When misalignment (a) of step 5 has occurred, enter the "+" value.
13-66
Adjustment
10
13
Screen.

13-67
Adjustment
13
05 Three-Fold Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the three-folding positions processed by the

Saddle Stitcher SD-501.
2
Reminder
the Double Fold adjustment.
13-68
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [05 Three-Fold Position Adjustment] to display the Three-Folding Position Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify Multi

Letter, then press [Start].
a
[2]
[1]
b
Paper feed direction

13-69
Adjustment
13
7
Touch[Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted.

All Size - A4R - 8.5x11R
Touch [Double Fold].
touch [Set].
2
Note
10
Touch [Single Fold]. Repeat step 9.
2
Note
11
12

Screen.
13-70
Adjustment
13
06 Fold Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment if folding position processed by the Saddle Stitcher
SD-501 dislocates in the folded set.

13-71
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [06 Fold Paper Width Adjustment] to display the Fold Paper
Width Adjustment Screen.
Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify the

number of sheets to 5, then press [Start].
A sample pattern will be output.
Check that any dislocation is found in the output set.

touch [Set].
2
Note
If the setting is too wide, the distance of misalignment may be larger.
10
11

Screen.
13-72
Adjustment
13
07 Trimming Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to increase/decrease the trimming width.

13-73
Adjustment
13
Procedure

Adj.].
Touch [07 Trimming Adjustment] to display the Trimming Adjustment

Screen.

Fold&Staple, then press [Start].
Check the trimmed width (a) from the edge of the feeding sheet.
2.0 mm or more

touch [Set].
10

Screen.
13-74
Adjustment
13
!
Details
Enter the value so that the cover should be cut more than 2.0 mm.
If All Size is selected as paper size, the entered adjustment value will be
applied to all sizes. If specific paper size is selected, adjustment value will
be the sum of the entered value and the value previously specified for All
Size.

13-75
Adjustment
13
13.11 06 Perfect Binder Adjustment
01 Cover Trimming Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to increase/decrease the trimming width of the right

cover page determined in Perfect Binding mode.
2
Reminder
Be sure to perform 02 Cover Lead Edge Adjustment before this adjustment.
13-76
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [06 Perfect Binder Adjustment].
Touch [01 Cover Trimming Adjustment] to display the Cover Trimming

Adjustment Screen.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the tray (Main Tray or PB Tray) to feed
the cover.
Select the PB tray or desired main body tray if selected in step 3, then
press [Start].
A sample pattern of perfect-bound book will be output.
Check that the edge of the right cover page is neatly aligned with that
of the left cover page.
Left cover page
Right cover page
Trimming position

13-77
Adjustment
13
8
touch [Set].
Available range: -128 (short) to +127 (long), 1 step = 0.1 mm
10
Touch [Return] to restore the Perfect Binder Adjustment Mode Menu

Screen.
13-78
Adjustment
13
02 Cover Lead Edge Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the position of left cover page determined in Perfect Binding mode.

13-79
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [02 Cover Lead Edge Adjustment] to display the Cover Lead
Edge Adjustment Screen.
Touch [Main Tray] or [PB Tray] to select the tray to feed the cover.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size of the body set to be attached with the cover.
All Size - 8.5x11 - 5.5x8.5R - A4 - A5R - B5 - A5 - 5.5x8.5 - Special 16K - 8.5x11W - 5.5x8.5W - A4W - A5W - B5W
press [Start].
Check that the edge of the left cover page extends out of the body set
by the desired amount.
Left cover page
Length differential
Edge of the left cover paper
Body pages
Right cover page
touch [Set].
Available range: -128 (short) to +127 (long), 1 step = 0.1 mm
10
13-80
Adjustment
13
11

Screen.
!
Details
Size.

13-81
Adjustment
13
03 Spine Corner Forming Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to regulate the position when forming the spine corner of the cover.
13-82
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [03 Spine Corner Forming Position Adjustment] to display the

Spine Corner Forming Position Adjustment Screen.
Select the PB tray or desired main body tray, then press [Start].
Check that the position of spine corner of the cover is formed uniformly
against the scanning direction.
Left cover page
Right cover page
Spine
Horizontal scanning direction
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select (F) or (R) for the adjustment.
touch [Set].
Available range: -128 (down) to +127 (up), 1 step = 0.1 mm
10

Screen.

13-83
Adjustment
13
04 Pasting Start Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the position to start pasting on the body set.
13-84
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [04 Pasting Start Position Adjustment] to display the Pasting

Start Position Adjustment Screen.
Touch [Go Ahead] or [Go Back] to select the direction to start pasting.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size of the body set.
All Size - 8.5x11 - A4 - B5 - A5 - 5.5x8.5 - 16K - A4W - B5W - A5W 8.5x11W - 5.5x8.5W - Special
Check that the pasting on the body set starts in proper position.
Body pages
Start position of
backward pasting
Start position of
frontward pasting
touch [Set].
Available range: -128 (early) to +127 (late), 1 step = 0.1 mm
10

13-85
Adjustment
13
11

Screen.
2
Reminder
Size.
13-86
Adjustment
13
05 Pasting Finish Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the position to finish pasting on the body set.

13-87
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [05 Pasting Finish Position Adjustment] to display the Pasting

Finish Position Adjustment Screen.
Touch [Go Ahead] or [Go Back] to select the direction to finish pasting.
Check that the pasting on the body set finishes in proper position.
Body pages
Finish position of
frontward pasting
Finish position of
backward pasting
touch [Set].
10
13-88
Adjustment
13
11

Screen.
!
Details
Size.

13-89
Adjustment
13
06 Paste Formation Finish Position Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the position to finish equalizing the paste applied
on the body set.
13-90
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [06 Paste Formation Finish Position Adjustment] to display the

Paste Formation Finish Position Adjustment Screen.
Check that the pasting on the body set finishes to be equalized in proper position.
touch [Set].
10

Screen.
!
Details
Size.

13-91
Adjustment
13
07 Temperature Adjustment
Perform this adjustment to control the condition of paste to be dried by setting the temperature on the following sensors inside the melt tank.
-
Melt Tank -Top: Melt tank temperature sensor/ Up (TH2)

Melt Tank -Mid: Melt tank temperature sensor/ Md (TH3)
Melt Tank -Low: Melt tank temperature sensor/ Lw (TH4)
Pasting Roller: Pasting roller temperature sensor (TH1)
2
Reminder
Do not make unnecessary change of the temperature setting inside the

melt tank.
13-92
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [07 Temperature Adjustment] to display the [Temperature Adjustment Screen].
Check that the paste applied on the body set is dried properly.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the position to set the temperature.

Touching Next continuously will change the position as follows.
Melt Tank Top - Melt Tank Mid - Melt Tank Low - Pasting Roller
touch [Set].
Available range:
Melt Tank -Top 10 to 200 C
Melt Tank -Mid 140 to 200 C
Melt Tank -Low 140 to 200 C
Pasting Roller 140 to 200 C

13-93
Adjustment
13
9
10

Screen.
13-94
Adjustment
13
08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the width in horizontal scanning direction of the
body set.
!
Details
Use this adjustment if the horizontal scanning direction is unequal on all

pages of the body set. If unequalness appears mainly on the latter half of
body pages, use 09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment instead.

13-95
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment] to display the Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment Screen.
Check that the horizontal scanning direction is equal on every page of

the body set.
If it is not equal on all pages, proceed to the next step.
If unequalness appears on the latter half of body pages while the
former half shows equalness, use 09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment.
touch [Set].
13-96
Adjustment
13
10

Screen.
!
Details
Size.

13-97
Adjustment
13
09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
Perform this adjustment for the width in horizontal scanning direction of the
body set.
!
Details
Use this adjustment if the horizontal scanning direction is unequal on the

latter half of body pages. If unequalness appears on all pages, use 08
Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment instead.
13-98
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment] to display the Clamp CD Width

Adjustment Screen.
Check that the horizontal scanning direction is equal on all pages of the
body set.
If unequalness appears on the latter half of body pages while the
former half shows equalness, proceed to the next step.
If it is not equal on all pages, use [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adjustment].
touch [Set].

13-99
Adjustment
13
9
10

Screen.
!
Details
Size.
13-100
Adjustment
13
10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the horizontal scanning position of the body set
and cover.

13-101
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment] to display the Cover

Up/Down CD Width Adjustment Screen.
Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the tray (Main Tray or PB Tray) to feed
the cover.
press [Start].
Check that the horizontal scanning position of body set matches with
that of the cover.
touch Set.
10

Screen.
!
Details
Size.
13-102
Adjustment
13
11 Clamp FD Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the width in vertical scanning direction of the
body set.

13-103
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [11 Clamp FD Position Adjustment] to display the Clamp FD Position Adjustment Screen.
Check that the vertical scanning direction is equal on all pages of the
body set.
touch Set.
10

Screen.
!
Details
Size.
13-104
Adjustment
13
13.12 07 Trimmer Count Adjustment

Very often used, the trimmer receiver of the Saddle Stitcher SD-501 may be
worn out sooner than expected, with the result that the trimming mode may
not function properly.
Perform this adjustment to select the count of the trimmer receiver from 300,
500, and 700 times, so that the machine could slightly change the position
of trimmer receiver after the set count has passed in order to improve its
functionability.
!
Details
The 07 Trimmer Count Adjustment key is not displayed by default. If this

key is desired for making this adjustment, contact your service representative.

13-105
Adjustment
13
Procedure
Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [06 Trimmer Count Adjustment] to display the Trimming Receiver Count Screen.
Touch the display count key to highlight it.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Finisher Adjustment Screen.
13-106
14
Controller Setting
POD Administrator
Controller Setting
14
14
Controller Setting
14.1
Function Overview
Setting change concerning the printer controller is available from the Controller Setting Menu Screen.
Touch [Controller] on the Machine Status Screen. The Controller Setting
Menu Screen will be displayed.
The menu comprises the following settings.

01 Report Type
Use this function to print out the report type selected from the screen. For
details, refer to 01 Report Type on page 14-3.
Menu Items
Description
Setting Options
Configuration Page Print
Print the configuration page to

check the firmware version
and network settings.
---
PCL Demo Page Print
Print the PCL demo page.
---
PS Demo Page Print (machine

with option)
Print the PS demo page.
---
PCL Font List
Print the PCL font list.
---
PS Font List (machine with

option)
Print the PS font list.
---

14-3
Controller Setting
14
02 Printer Setting
Various printer settings are available from this screen. For details, refer to 02
Printer Setting on page 14-10. It may not operate properly depending upon
the combination of settings selected.
Menu Items
Description
Setting Options (default is highlighted)
No.
Specify the default output setting

for each number.
1-6 (1)
01 Basic Setting
The following default settings are used unless otherwise specified by the printer driver.
01 PDL
Select the page description language to be initially used.
Auto, PCL, PS, TIFF
02 Paper Feed Tray
Select the paper feed tray to be initially used.

The selectable items vary depending upon the configuration of
installed options.
Auto, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray
Select the exit tray to be initially

used.
Auto, Stacker Auto, Stacker 1
04 Duplex
Select to allow double-sided

printing.
OFF, ON
05 Binding
Select the binding position to be

initially used.
Top, Left, Right
06 Staple
Select the staple position to be initially used.
OFF, 1 Staple (Left), 1 Staple
07 Punch
Select the punch position to be initially used.
OFF, 2 Holes, 4 Holes
08 Center Staple/
Center Fold/ Trimming
Select the initial setting for each

function.
(Folding & Stapling and Trimming
are not supported in this version.)
OFF, Z-fold (A3/B4/11x17/8K), Z-
09 Offset
Select to use the offset function.
ON, OFF
10 Output Order
Select to exit face up or face down

in initial state.
Face Down, Face Up
11 Page Order
Select the print page order in initial state.
1 to N, N to 1
12 Print Number
Specify the print quantity in initial

state.
1 to 9999
13 Collate
Select to use the Sort mode.
Collated, Uncollated
03 Output Tray
14-4
4, Tray 5
Main, Stacker 1 Sub, Stacker 2

Main, Stacker 2 Sub, Multi Folder
Main, Multi Folder Sub, Saddle
Stitcher, Stapler Main, Stapler
Sub
(Right), 2 Staple
fold (8.5x14), Fold&Staple,

Fold&Staple/Trim, Center fold,
Center fold OUT, Letter fold, Letter fold OUT, Zigzag, Zigzag OUT,
Double parallel, Double parallel
OUT, Gate fold, Gate fold OUT,
Multi letterfold, Multi letterfold
OUT, Multi center fold
Controller Setting
14
Menu Items
Description
14 Paper Size
Select the paper size to be initially

used.
When specifing tabs, select the
number of tabs as well.
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 8x13, 8.25x13,

8.125x13, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14,
8.5x13, 8.5x11, 5.5x8.5, A3W,
B4W, A4W, B5W, 12x18W,
11x17W, 8.5x14W, 8.5x11W,
5.5x8.5W, 8K, 16K, 8.5x11Tab,
A4Tab
15 Orientation
Select the orientation of the image

printed on copy paper.
Portrait, Landscape
16 Banner Option
Select to print the banner page.
OFF, ON
17 Banner Tray
Select the paper feed tray for

printing banner page.
The selectable items vary depending upon the configuration of
installed options.
Auto, Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray

4, Tray 5
18 Convert Paper Size
Select to change the paper size.
OFF, 8.5x11/11x17 to A4/A3, A4/

A3 to 8.5x11/11x17
Specify the desired combination

function.
OFF, 2 in 1, 2 repeat, 2 repeat-re-
20 Booklet
Select to use the Booklet function.
OFF, ON
21 Adhesive Binding
Select to use the Adhesive binding mode.
OFF, ON
22 Print Position
Select the initial print position.
Rear Edge, Center, Lead Edge
23 Pile Permission
Select to permit piling up the output sheets.
OFF, ON
01 Font Source
Select the medium of font source.

Internal: Standard font
Disk: Downloaded font
Soft: Software font
Internal, Disk, Soft
02 Font Number
Specify the area of available font

number according to the font
source.
0 to 999
03 Symbol Set
Specify the symbol set.
DESKTOP, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,

ISO21, ISO4, ISO6, ISO60, ISO69,
ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, LEGAL,
MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL,
PC8, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC850,
PC852, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINL1,
WINL2, WINL5
04 Form lines
Specify the number of lines per

page.
5 to 128 (64)
05 Font point size
Specify the font size by point.
0.44 to 99.75 (12.00)
06 Font pitch
Specify the font pitch.
0.44 to 99.95 (10.00)
19 Combination
versal(L), 2 repeat-reversal(R), 2
repeat-reversal(U), 2 repeat-reversal(D)
02 PCL Setting

14-5
Controller Setting
14
Menu Items
Description
07 CR/LF Mapping
Select the line feed code.
OFF, CR, LF, CRLF
01 Print PS Error
Select to print the error report

when an error occurs while rasterizing PostScript data.
OFF, ON
02 PDF % PS Conversion error control
Select to print error pages produced by the memory overflow

when printing a PDF file.
OFF, ON
01 Auto Paper Select
Select to use APS function.
OFF, ON
02 Image Position
Select the image position to be

printed on a page.
Left, Center
03 PS Setting(Option)
04 TIFF Setting
03 Select Printer Setting

Select the default port number, and specify the output format for each port.
For details, refer to 03 Select Printer Setting on page 14-6.
Menu Items
Description
Setting Options
Default (9100)*1
Select the default port number.
1 to 6 (1)
Port 2 (9112)*1
Select the number for Port 2.
1 to 6 (1)
Port 3 (9113)*1
1 to 6 (1)
Port 4 (9114)*1
1 to 6 (1)
Port 5 (9115)*1
1 to 6 (1)
Port 6 (9116)*1
1 to 6 (1)
* 1: Port No. (9100, etc.) is the initial setting. For details, refer to 02 Printer Setting on page 14-4.
04 Spool
Select to spool the job to HDD. For details, refer to 04 Spool on page 14-6.
Menu Items
Description
Setting Options
Spool
Select to spool the job to HDD.
Auto, Enable, Disable
14-6
Controller Setting
14
05 Interface Setting
Set the timer to terminate the interface. For details, refer to 05 Interface Setting on page 14-7.
Menu Items
Description
Setting Options
Parallel Timeout
Set the timer to terminate the parallel port.
10 to 300 seconds (60)
Network Timeout
Set the timer to terminate the network port.
10 to 300 seconds (60)

14-7
Controller Setting
14
14.2
01 Report Type
Use this function to print out the report type selected from the screen.
Procedure
Touch [Controller] - [01 Report Type].
Touch the desired report type key to select it.
Touch [Execute].
The Controller Setting Menu Screen will be restored, and the Data LED
on the control panel blinks to indicate that the printing operation is in
progress.
To return to the previous screen, touch [Return].
14-8
Controller Setting
14
If further changes are required, touch the desired key.

Touch the [MACHINE] tab to complete the setting and restore the Machine Status Screen.

14-9
Controller Setting
14
14.3
02 Printer Setting
Use this function to register the desired output form. Six types can be specified at maximum.
Specify the setting number (1 to 6) first, then specify the following four printer
settings for that number.
-
01 Basic Setting specifies basic settings for printer.

02 PCL Setting specifies the settings concerning printer protocol.
03 PS Setting specifies the setting concerning PS error print.
04 TIFF Setting specifies the settings concerning TIFF image.
Procedure
Touch [Controller] - [02 Printer Setting].
Specify the setting number.
14-10
Controller Setting
%
14
Use the touch screen keypad to enter the setting number for your setting.
Available range is from 1 to 6.
Touch [Set] to complete the setting. If wrong number is entered, touch
[Reset] to reenter the correct number.
Perform the Basic Setting.

14-11
Controller Setting
14
%
%
Touch [01 Basic Setting]. The Basic Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.
Make the desired setting. Touch [Next] or [Forward] to scroll to the desired item.
The following settings are used unless otherwise specified by the printer driver.
- 01 PDL:
Select the page description language to be initially used.
- 02 Paper Feed Tray:
Select the paper feed tray to be initially used.
- 03 Output Tray:
Select the exit tray to be initially used.
- 04 Duplex:
Select to allow double-sided printing.
- 05 Binding:
Select the binding position to be initially used in double-sided printing.
- 06 Staple:
Select the staple position to be initially used.
- 07 Punch:
Select the punch position to be initially used.
- 08 Center Staple/Center Fold/Trimming:
Select the initial setting for each function.
- 09 Offset:
Select to use the offset function.
- 10 Output Order:
Select to exit face up or face down in initial state.
- 11 Image Order:
Select the print page order in initial state.
- 12 Print Number:
Specify the print quantity in initial state.
- 13 Sort:
Select to use the Sort mode.
- 14 Paper Size:
Select the paper size to be initially used.
- 15 Orientation:
Select the orientation of the image printed on copy paper.
- 16 Banner Option:
Select to print the banner page.
- 17 Banner Tray:
Select the paper feed tray for printing banner page.
- 18 Convert Paper Size:
Select to change the paper size.
- 19 Combination:
Specify the desired combination function.
14-12
Controller Setting
-
14
20 Booklet:
Select to use the Booklet function.
21 Adhesive Binding:
22 Print Position:
Select to use the Adhesive binding mode.

Select the initial print position.
-
23 Pile Permission:
Select to permit piling up the output sheets.

Touch [Return] to complete the setting and restore the Printer Setting
Screen.
Perform the PCL Setting.
Touch [02 PCL Setting]. The PCL Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.
Make the desired setting.
- 01 Font Source:
Select the medium of font source.

14-13
Controller Setting
14
-
02 Font Number:
Specify the font number available from the font source.
03 Symbol Set:
Specify the symbol set.
04 Form lines:
Specify the number of lines per page.
05 Font point size:

Specify the font size by point.
06 Font pitch:
07 CR/LF Mapping:
Specify the font pitch.
Select the line feed code.

Screen.
Perform the PS Setting (option).
Touch [03 PS Setting]. The PS Setting Screen will be displayed.
14-14
Controller Setting
%
%
%
14

- 01 Print PS Error :
Select to print the error report when an error occurs while rasterizing PostScript data.
- 02 PDF % PS Conversion error control :
Select [OK] to stop printing error pages resulted from the memory
overflow.
Touch [ON] to complete the setting. The PS Setting Screen will be restored.
Screen.
Perform the TIFF Setting.
Touch [04 TIFF Setting]. The TIFF Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

14-15
Controller Setting
14
%
%
%

- 01 Auto Paper Select:
Select to use APS function.
- 02 Image Position:
Select the image position to be printed on a page.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The TIFF Setting Menu Screen will
be restored.
Screen.
Touch [Return] on the Printer Setting Screen. The Controller Setting

Menu Screen will be restored.

14-16
Controller Setting
14.4
14
03 Select Printer Setting

Select the default port number, and specify the output format for each port.
Procedure
Touch [Controller] - [03 Select Printer Setting].
Touch the key to be specified, then use the touch screen keypad to enter the desired number. Available range is from 1 to 6. To designate the
default port number, touch [Default(9100)], then enter the desired port
number.
Touch [Set] to complete the setting. If wrong number is entered before

touching [Set], touch [Reset] to reenter the correct number.
Touch [Return]. The Controller Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

14-17
Controller Setting
14
5

14-18
Controller Setting
14.5
14
04 Spool
Select to enable, disable, or automatically perform the spool function.
Procedure
Touch [Controller] - [04 Spool].
Touch the desired key to select it.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Controller Setting Menu

Screen will be restored.


14-19
Controller Setting
14
14.6
05 Interface Setting
Set the time for Parallel Timeout and Network Timeout.
Procedure
Touch [Controller] - [05 Interface Setting].
Touch [Parallel Timeout] or [Network Timeout].
Use the touch screen keypad to enter the time, then touch [Set].
The available range is from 10 to 300. When the time outside this range
is entered as touching [Set], the time initially entered is designated.
If the wrong number is entered before touching [Set], touch [Reset] to

reenter the correct number.
Touch [Return]. The Controller Setting Menu Screen will be restored.
14-20
Controller Setting
14

14-21
14
14-22
Controller Setting
15
Utility Screen Settings
POD Administrator
15
15.1
Utility Screen Setting Outlines
15
Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility Menu

Screen.
The Utility Screen includes two types of setting items: one in which a user
can set and the other in which a machine manager is required to enter a
password.
This section describes the user setting and the machine manager setting
separately in two parts.

15-3
15
!
Details
The machine manager setting can be established by the user in the initial
setting.
It is recommended to assign the machine manager who will be the sole
person to control the machine manager setting. Please contact your
service representative to set up your password.
Return and Exit on the Utility screen
Touch [Return] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the screen before pressing [Utility/Counter] on the
control panel.
Menu Items that can be disabled on the Utility screen
The following items can be disabled so that users cannot access them from
the Utility screen. Contact your service representative, if desired.
- Utility > Touch Screen Adjustment
- Utility > System Setting > Default Screen Setting > JOB List
15-4
15
Lists of the function settings

01 System Setting
Setting options
(default is highlighted)
01 Language Setting
Select the language used in the LCD.
English
02 Buzzer Setting
01 Buzzer On/Off, Volume Setting
Set the buzzer sound (the touch key sound) as touching the screen.
ON/OFF, Big/Small
02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting

Select the duration of the buzzer sound when the machine stops due to no paper and mishandled paper.
OFF/3 seconds/5 seconds/10 seconds
03 1SHOT Indication Time

Select the SHOT indication time to be displayed in the
message indication area of the touch panel.
3 seconds/5 seconds
04 Default Screen Setting

Select the initial screen to be displayed when the power
switch is turned on.
Machine/JOB List/Copier
05 Auto Reset Setting

Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a
copying job until the machine returns to the initial condition, without selecting any key on the touch panel or the
control panel.
Off/60 seconds/120 seconds/180

seconds/240 seconds/300 seconds/360 seconds/420 seconds/
480 seconds/540 seconds
06 Key Response Time

Select the key response time.
Normal/0.5 seconds/1 seconds/
07 Change User Password

Change a user password which the user has registered
for user authentication.
Enter new password
08 Function Key Setting

Specify copy conditions for the function keys displayed
on the Copy Screen.
Five keys

2seconds/3 seconds
15-5
15
02 Function Setting
Setting options
01 Feed Tray Setting

01 Feed Tray Auto Selection
Select ATS for each tray and the priority of the detection when ATS functions.
ATS/APS Switch (Trays 1 to 5): Off,

Tray Priority: Tray1/Tray2/Tray3/
Tray4/Tray5
02 ATS Permit
Set ATS on or off.
ON/OFF
03 Auto Paper Type

Set the paper type to be selected when ATS functions.
Paper Type (Normal)/

Weight (62-71g, 72-91g)/
Coloured Paper (White)/
Hole-Punch (No Hole-Punch)
02 Each Function Setting

Image Shift Decimal Point
Select On/Off to enter a decimal point for image shift.
Decimal On/Decimal Off
Printer Prohibit Timer

Select the interval time that printing via PC is prohibited after touching the touch keys.
Off/15 seconds/30 seconds/60

seconds/90 seconds
Needless Tab Paper Exit

Select whether or not to discharge the oddments of a
set of tabbed sheets automatically.
On/Off
Auto Image Shift (Tab Print)

Select whether or not to print the standard-sized original having tab part image printed on the right edge
properly onto tabbed copy paper by shifting the
scanned image 12.5 mm to the reicht side.
On/Off
03 Density Setting
01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode
Select the default density setting for each Enhance
Mode.
0 - 5 (Text & Photo:2, Low Contrast:3, Photo:2, Text:2)
02 User Density Setting

Preset the density level which is frequently used.
Two levels
03 Photo Mode Density Setting

Select the density level set in EE (Auto Density Setting) when the Photo Mode is selected.
Lighter/Normal/Darker
04 Image Density Selection

Set the image density lighter or set the maximum dark
level darker, without degrading the image quality.
+1 - -5 (7 levels)
04 Preset Zoom
Preset the magnification ratio which is frequently used.
15-6
Three types
02 Function Setting
15
Setting options
05 Tandem Setting
01 Tandem Machine One Time Data Read
Set the tandem machine to receive all the data tranmitted from the master machine before starting to
print.
ON/OFF
02 Tandem Machine Wait/Proof

Set the master machine to transmit the data to the
tandem machine at the time when the master machine starts scanning the data for proof copying.
Permit/Prohibit
03 Tandem Machine Shift Data Setting

Set the tandem machine to use the same shift value
used on the master machine.
Master Machine Shift data/Tan-
04 Tandem setting after JOB completion

Select to continue or release the tandem mode after
the current tandem job is completed.
Continue/Release
06 User Paper Selection

Select the user paper setting to be used when "User" is
specified as paper type.

dem Machine Shift data
User Paper1/User Paper2/User

Paper3
15-7
15
03 Copy Setting
Setting options
01 Reset Setting
01 Initial Setting
Set the initial setting when the machine is reset.
Copy Initial Setting (Original Setting/

Special Image/Zoom/Output Application/Copy Mode/Paper Presetting/Rotation/ADF)
02 Reset Function Setting

01 AUTO RESET Key Setting
Set the on-screen indication which is displayed when
pressing [Reset].
The factory default setting is Full Auto, and the initial
setting is the settings defined in 01Initial Setting.
Full Auto/Initial Setting
02 Each Reset Setting

This setting is enabled when Initial Setting is selected
in 01 AUTO RESET Key Setting. Set the copying
conditions preset to either Mode Memory 30 or Copy
Initial Setting.
Initialize Set/Mode Memory(30)
03 Finisher Mode for Full Auto

Select the Finisher mode when Full Auto is selected
as pressing [Reset].
Uncollated/Collated/Staple & Collate/Fold & Staple/Folding/Face UP/

Face Down
03 Initial by Key Counter Insert

Select to reset the copying conditions to the initial
setting when inserting the key counter and the copy
card.
On/Off
15-8
03 Copy Setting
15
Setting options

Auto select of Booklet copy
Set the machine to automatically select the Booklet
mode when Stapling & Folding or Folding mode is selected.
Auto Select/Not Auto Select
Original Glass AMS

Set the machine to detect the size of the original and
select the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size.
On/Off
ADF AMS
Set the machine to automatically select an appropriate ratio for copying when detecting the original size
placed on the ADF.
On/Off
Orig. Glass Auto Size Select

Set the machine to automatically select the same size
of copy paper as the original placed on the original
glass.
On/Off
ADF Auto Size Select

Set the machine to automatically select the same size
of copy paper as the original placed on the ADF.
On/Off
Select Tray when APS Cancel

Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS
is released.
APS Select Tray/Tray1/Tray2/

Tray3/Tray4/Tray5
Org./Out Bind Direction Set

Set the machine to conform the binding direction of
the originals and printed sets each other.
On/Off
Stapling Auto Reset

Set the stapling setting on or off when pressing [Reset].
On/Off
Original Binding Direction

Select to reset or save the original direction setting
made on the Special Original Screen and the bind position setting made on the Output Mode Screen after
completion of each copying job.
Not Release/Release Per JOB
Status Hold When Auto Reset

When Auto Reset functions, select to reset the Platen/
RADF mode to the initial setting, or save the previous
setting.
Hold/Not hold

15-9
15
04 Scanner Setting
Setting options
01 Default Address Setting

Select the default destination to be displayed when selecting the Scanner Screen.
E-Mail/HDD/FTP/SMB

File Form Setting (E-Mail)
Select the default file form when transmitting in EMail.
Package PDF/Division PDF/Package TIFF/Division TIFF
File Form Setting (HDD)

Select the default file form when saving in HDD.
File Form Setting (FTP)

Select the default file form when transmitting to FTP.
File Form Setting (SMB)

Select the default file form when transmitting in SMB.
Default Resolution Setting

Select the default scanning quality.
600dpi/400dpi/300dpi/200dpi
Special Image/Density Setting

Specify the scanning density level from AES and 9
manual setting selvels. Also select the desired Special
Image mode according to the original shifted.
AE/Manual setting (9 levels)

Text&Photo/Low Contrast/Photo/Text
05 Touch Screen Adjustment

Check the touch screen and realign the position of the touch sensor that may have shifted.
15-10
15

01 System Setting
01 Power Save Setting
Auto Low Power/ Auto Shut Off
Set the interval time of Auto Low Power and Auto
Shut Off modes.
02 Time and Date Setting
Time/Summer Time/Diff. Time Setting
Set the present time, summer time, and difference in
the time setting.
Auto Low Power: 5 min. to 240 min.:
15 min., Auto Shut Off: OFF to 240

min.: OFF/90 min.
Setting Time
03 Weekly Timer Setting

01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting
Enable or disable the weekly timer function.
Weekly Timer Off
02 Timer Setting
Set the On/Off times in hours and minutes.
03 Timer Action On/Off Setting
Set the On/Off condition of the machine for a given
month.
04 Lunch Hour Off Setting
Set the machine to turn off and then on during the
lunch break.
05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt
The password is required to enter when using the machine by interrupting the Weekly Timer mode. Use this
function to set the password.
0000 (4 digits)
04 Management List Print

Mode Memory List
Output the list of programmed contents of Mode
memory.
User Management List
Output the list of contents registered by the user.
Use Management List
Output the list of service modes, account values, and
ROM version of the machine.
Font Pattern List
Output the list of font patterns used with this machine.
Audit Log Report
Output the audit log report of the security mode.

15-11
15
05 Operation Prohibit Set
Lock/Delete Mode Memory
Lock/unlock or Delete a mode memory that has been
programmed.
Permit/Prohibit
Change Send Address

Permit/prohibit to enter send address manually on the
Scanner Screen.
Permit/Prohibit
Change Preset Zoom

Permit/prohibit to alter already programmed magnification ratio.
Permit/Prohibit
Change Overlay Memory

Permit/prohibit to delete or overwrite a title of programmed overlay image.
Permit/Prohibit
Scanner Function (E-Mail)

Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data via E-Mail.
Permit/Prohibit
Scanner Function (HDD)

Permit/prohibit to save scanned data in HDD.
Permit/Prohibit
Scanner Function (FTP)

Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to FTP.
Permit/Prohibit
Scanner Function (SMB)

Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data in SMB.
Permit/Prohibit
06 Expert Adjustment
01 Original Scan Area Setting
Set to delete the outside area of the original.
Erase Outside of Original/On -
02 ADF Frame Erasure Setting

Set to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.
None/1mm/2mm/3mm/4mm/5mm
03 Non Image Area Erase Setting

Set the detail settings to erase the outside area of the
original.
Erase Mode:Oblique Erase/Rectable Erase/Auto

Original Density:Five levels/Auto
APS/AMS Only/Except Orig. Glass

(1:1)
07 Size Setting
Original Size Search
Set the detected paper type of the original.
A/B Series/Inch Series/Only A series/Full Size
Orig. Glass Small Size

Set the smallest size when copying by placing the
original on the original glass.
A5/5.5x8.5/B5/A4/8.5x11
08 Annotation Setting
Newly register an annotation, or edit/delete the annotation previously registered.
15-12
15

09 Perfect Binding Setting
01 Useful Paper Weight Select
Specify the paper weight available for each of body
and cover when using Perfect Binder.
P. B. Body 62-71/72-91
Cover 72-91/92-130/131-161
02 Paper Count Limit for Perfect Binding

Specify the minimum and maximum paper count to
be bound each for paper weight.
62-71 g Minimjm 10, Maximum 300

72-91 g Minimum 10, Maximum 300
92-130 g Minimum 10, Maximum
200
03 Stop Setting for P.B. Cover Unifit Length

Set the machine to stop/continue the current job
when the cover width is not suitable for the body paper size and thickness.
Temporary Stop/Not Temporary

Stop
02 Manager/Machine Register
01 Machine Manager Register
Register the name of the machine manager and the
extention number. The registered contents are displayed on the Counter Screen.
Name Input: 8 digits/Extension

Number Input: 5 digits
03 User Auth./Volume Track

01 Authentication Method
01 Authentication Setting
Set the authentication method and the number of
sections to be managed.
User Authentication (Off), Section

Authentication (Off), Section Name
Input (Off), User/Section Auth.Connect (Off), Password Input Timing
(At JOB Complete), Section Dirstibute Number (1000)
02 Section Management Setting

Set the section management against each mode and
the machine condition when reaching the copy limit.
Copy/Printer, Scanner, Limit

Reached Stop Setting (Immediately/After Print/Warning Only
02 Volume Track
Set the volume track setting. Change, Add or Delete
is available.
Section No./Section name/Password/Limit
03 User Authentication Set

Register, Change, Add or Delete the user authentication when the User Authentication is set in "01>01 Authentication Setting."
User No./User Name/Password/Belong Section/Useable Function

(Copy, Scanner, Store/Recall, Printer)
04 Non register/Output Set

Set to count the output of non-registered users and
sections.
On/Off

15-13
15
04 Network Setting
01 Machine NIC Setting (For details, p. 17-68)
Set the NIC settings.
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Gateway
Address/IP Address (Server PC)/
Line Speed Setting
02 Controller NIC Setting (For details, p. 17-70)

01 TCP/IP (For details, p. 17-83)
Set the TCP/IP settings.
02 NetWare (For details, p. 17-87)
Set the NetWare settings
03 IPP (For details, p. 17-91)
Set the IPP settings.
04 FTP (For details, p. 17-94)
Set the FTP settings.
05 SNMP (For details, p. 17-96)
Set the SNMP settings.
06 SMB (For details, p. 17-98)
Set the SMB settings.
07 AppleTalk (For details, p. 17-100)
Set the AppleTalk settings.
08 E-Mail (For details, p. 17-102)
09 HDD (For details, p. 17-108)
Set the duration for which scanned data is stored before automatically deleted.
10 Alert Mail (For details, p. 17-110)
Specify the alert mail settings.
11 CSRC (For details, p. 17-112)
Specify the CSRC settings for services used by a customer engineer.
12 AP I/F (For details, p. 17-117)
Specify the AP I/F settings.
13 PSWC (For details, p. 17-119)
Set to use PSWC.
14 Network Setting Clear (For details, p. 17-121)
Restore the network settings to the factory default
setting.
15 SNMP Trap (For details, p. p. 17-123)
Specify the SNMP Trap settings.
15-14
15

05 Copy/Printer Setting
01 JOB Offset Operating
Set the machine to offset the copies/printouts of different jobs.
On/Off
02 Continuation Print (Print)

Set the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in
succession.
On/Off
03 Page No. Position (Booklet)

Set the page number position when using Booklet
with Page Numbering in Stamp.
On(Outside Page Print)/Off
04 Fixing Prerotation Set

The fixing heat adjustment may be necessary as altering the paper type and the weight. The machine rotates the fixing roller before printing starts, in order to
print at the appropriate temperature for the specific
paper type and the weight.
Rotation On/Rotation Off
05 Image Auto Rotation

When the trays contain only the paper size different
from the original, rotate the image of the original and
adjust to fit into the copying paper size.
On - Always/On - APS/AMS Only/

On - APS/AMS/Reduce Only
06 Interruption Suspend
Set the timing to interrupt the present job when pressing [Interrupt] while copying.
When Current Set Complete/Stop

Immediately
07 Copy Reserve Operation

Set the timing for the reserve job either by setting on
the Copy Reserve Confirmation Screen, or by placing
the original on the original glass.
Enabled by Operation/Enabled by
08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)

Set to stop scanning when pulling out the tray.
On/Off
09 Continuation Print(Copy)
Set the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in
succession.
On/Off
10 Original Glass SDF

Set the exit direction when copying one set of the
original on the original glass.
Face Up/Face Down
11 SDF Auto Setting
On/Off
Set Original
06 System Connection
01 User Call
Touch [Start] when calling CSRC.

Start
15-15
15
07 Security Setting
01 Machine Manager Password
Change the machine manager password which is registered in the Service mode menu.
00000000
02 HDD Management Setting

01 Folder Box List/Delete
List the details of the folder box, and delete it.
List and delete the details.
02 HDD Data Auto Delete Period Setting

Set the period of time to keep data so that it will be
deleted automatically when specified period has
passed.
Not Delete/12 hours/1 day/2 days/3

days/7 days/30 days
03 Change HDD Lock Password

Change the password when accessing data stored in
HDD.
03 Security Strengthen mode
Set the Security Strengthen mode.
08 Scanner Address Register
15-16
On/Off
Edit or delete the registered scanner
address.
16
User Setting
POD Administrator
User Setting
16
16
User Setting
16.1
01 System Setting
16.1.1 01 Language Setting

Select the language used in the touch panel.
The initial setting is American English.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [01 Language Setting].
Select the desired English mode.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Utility Menu
Screen.

16-3
User Setting
16
16.1.2 02 Buzzer Setting
01 Buzzer ON/OFF, Volume Setting
Set the buzzer sound (the touch key sound) as touching the screen, and also
select the buzzer volume.
16-4
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [02 Buzzer Setting].
Touch [01 Buzzer On/Off, Volume Setting].
Touch [On] to highlight it. Adjust the Buzzer volume, as desired. Touch
[Small] or [Big] to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys. Touch
[Off] to highlight it. The buzzer will go off.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Buzzer Setting
Screen.
Touch [Return] to restore the Utility Menu Screen.

16-5
User Setting
16
02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting
Select the duration of the buzzer sound when the machine stops.
16-6
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [02 Buzzer Setting].
Touch [02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting].
Select the desired time to highlight it.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Buzzer Setting
Screen.

16-7
User Setting
16
16.1.3 03 1SHOT Indication Time
Select the SHOT indication time to be displayed in the message indication

area of the touch panel, such as Original size A4.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 1 SHOT Message Indication Time].
Touch [3 seconds] or [5 seconds] to highlight it.
Screen.
16-8
User Setting
16
16.1.4 04 Default Screen Setting

Select the initial screen to be displayed when the power switch is turned on.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [04 Default Screen Setting].
Select the desired initial screen to highlight it.
Screen.

16-9
User Setting
16
16.1.5 05 Auto Reset Setting
Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the
machine returns to the initial screen, without selecting any key on the touch
panel or the control panel.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [05 Auto Reset Setting].
Screen.
16-10
User Setting
16
16.1.6 06 Key Response Time

Select the response time between touching the key and the machine responses to it.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Key Response Time].
Screen.

16-11
User Setting
16
16.1.7 07 Change User Password
Change a user password which the user has registered for user authentication.
!
Details
The changed password is reflected to the user authentication setting description.
16-12
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [07 Change User Password].
Enter the user name and the password then touch [OK].
Enter a new user password in [New Password]. Reenter the new user
password in [Check Input].
Screen.

16-13
User Setting
16
16.1.8 08 Function Key Setting
Assign up to five job settings previously stored using Mode Memory. The
registered settings can be recalled simply by touching the corresponding
function key.
!
Details
The job setting to be registered to a function key should firstly be registered using Mode Memory. For details, refer to Storing and Recalling
Job Conditions (Mode Memory) on page 10-11.
16-14
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [08 Function Key Setting].
On the left side of the Function Key Setting Screen, touch to highlight
the function key (F1 - F5) to be registered or deleted.
Register or delete Mode Memory job settings.

To register a job setting:
- Touch the arrow keys (,) and (+) to display the desired Mode Memory item key.
- Touch to select the Mode Memory item key to be registered.
- Touch [<Entry]. If the function key selected in step 2 has already
been used for another Mode Memory job setting, a popup menu
appears to confirm that the key will be overwritten.
- Touch [Yes].

16-15
User Setting
16
To delete a job setting:

- Touch [Delete].
- A popup menu appears to confirm that the Mode Memory job setting will be deleted from the selected function key.
- Even though deleted from the function key, the job setting still remains in Mode Memory.
- Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.
Screen.
16-16
User Setting
16.2
16
02 Function Setting
16.2.1 01 Feed Tray Setting

01 Feed Tray Auto Selection
Select the tray size setting to be detected when ATS functions. You may also
select the priority of the detection for each tray.

16-17
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [02 Function Setting] - [01 Feed Tray Setting].
Touch [01 Feed Tray Auto Selection].
Touch to highlight the desired tray key under [ATS/APS Switch]. The
selected tray is automatically detected when ATS functions. The trays
not selected will not be detected even when ATS functions.
The selected tray will be displayed under [Tray Priority] as the tray key.
Touch to highlight the desired tray key under [Tray Priority], then
change its priority by using the arrow keys (,) and (+).
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Feed Tray Setting
Menu Screen.
16-18
User Setting
16
16.2.2 02 ATS Permit

Set ATS On or Off.

16-19
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [02 ATS Permit].
Select [On] when ATS is used, and [Off] when ATS is not used.
Menu Screen.
16-20
User Setting
16
16.2.3 03 Auto Paper Type

Select the paper type setting of the tray which is automatically selected when
ATS functions. When the paper type that is not specified with this function is
designated to the tray that is automatically selected by ATS, the machine indicates the paper type unmatched.

16-21
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [03 Auto Paper Type].
Select the paper type of the tray which is automatically selected when
ATS functions. Touch to highlight the desired type of keys under [Paper
Type], [Weight], [Colored Paper], and [Hole-Punch]. You may choose
more than one key for each item.
Menu Screen.
16-22
User Setting
16
16.2.4 02 Each Function Setting

Use this function to make the following four settings.
- Select to enter a decimal point for image shift.
- Select the interval time that printing via PC is prohibited after touching a
touch key on the touch panel.
- Select whether or not to discharge the oddments of a set of tabbed
sheets automatically.
- Select whether or not to print the standard-sized original having tab part
image printed on the right edge properly onto tabbed copy paper by
shifting the scanned image 12.5 mm to the right side.
Procedure
Touch [02 Function Setting] - [02 Each Function Setting].

16-23
User Setting
16
2
Touch [Decimal On] or [Decimal Off] to specify image shift in decimal

point or not. Select the desired interval time key of the right side of
[Printer Prohibit Timer] to set the timer.
Touch [On] or [Off] for each of Needless Tab Paper Exit and Auto Image
Shift (Tab Print) to specify whether or not to use those functions.
Screen.
!
Details
The Needless Tab Paper Exit key may not be displayed depending on the
finisher type mounted on the machine.
16-24
User Setting
16
16.2.5 03 Density Setting

01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode
Select the desired copy density level manually from nine levels on the Copy
Screen, and also shift each of nine density levels to three levels lighter or
three levels darker.
Density shift can be applied to each Enhance modes: Auto (Text/photo), Low
Contrast, Photo, and Text.

16-25
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [02 Function Setting] - [03 Density Setting].
Touch [01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode].
Touch the desired numeric key (from 0 to 5) for each Enhance mode to
specify the desired Density shift.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Density Setting
Menu Screen.
16-26
User Setting
16
02 User Density Setting

The copy density level is divided into 16 levels between Darker and Normal,
and between Normal and Lighter, respectively. Select and preset two levels
from the 32 levels. The preset density level setting can be recalled from Special Image on the Copy Screen.

16-27
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [02 User Density Setting].
Touch [User Density 1] or [User Density 2]. Touch [Darker] or [Lighter]

to select the desired density level to preset either between the darkest
and normal or between normal and the lightest.
Output density level sample sheet. Select the sample sheet from each
sample output level of [1-4], [5-8], [9-12], and [13-16], and touch the
[COPY] tab. Place the original on the original glass, and press [Start] on
the control panel. Repeat this step when outputting more than one
sample sheet for each level. Check the sample sheet and enter the desired density level using the touch panel keypad on the right side. The
number entered will be displayed in the box above [Set Density].
To output the sample sheet of the specified density level, touch [Set
Density] then touch the [COPY] tab. Place the original on the original
glass, and press [Start] on the control panel.
Menu Screen.
16-28
User Setting
16
16.2.6 03 Photo Mode Density Setting

Set the density level of Photo Mode to be specified in AE.

16-29
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [03 Photo Mode Density Setting].
Select the desired density key from [Lighter], [Normal] and [Darker].
Menu Screen.
16-30
User Setting
16
16.2.7 04 Image Density Selection

Select the image density on the Copy Screen. Adjust the image density of
any dark part of the original to darker (maximum dark) or lighter, just like offset printing. Similar to printing materials such as books, this feature is useful
to make texts lighter in order to ease the eye strain.

16-31
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [04 Image Density Selection].
Touch the desired density key to highlight it.
Menu Screen.
16-32
User Setting
16
16.2.8 04 Preset Zoom

Set three types of the preset zoom on the Preset Zoom Screen. The initial
setting for Preset Zoom1 is 4.000, Preset Zoom2 is 2.000, and Preset Zoom3
is 0.500.
Procedure
Touch [02 Function Setting] - [04 Preset Zoom].
Touch the desired preset key (from 1 to 3) and display the desired
zoom ratio on the right side of the keys using the touch panel keypad.
Screen.

16-33
User Setting
16
16.2.9 05 Tandem Setting
The following settings are provided for the tandem output mode, which is
specified on the master machine and used to distribute plural number of print
quantity among two machines (master and tandem).
01 Tandem Machine One Time Data Read: On/Off
Select [Off] so that both master and tandem machines start printing at the
same time, while the master machine continues scanning the image data.
Select [On] so that the tandem machine will be kept waiting till it receives all
the image data transmitted from the master machine, while the master machine already started to print.
02 Tandem Machine Wait/Proof: Permit/Prohibit

Select [Prohibit] so that the master machine starts proofcopying without
transmitting the image data to the tandem machine. In this case, the tandem
machine receives the data and starts printing when normal printing job has
been started.
Select [Permit] so that the master machine transmits the scanned image data
to the tandem machine and both machines start proofcopying at the same
time.
03 Tandem Machine Shift Data Setting: Master Machine Shift data/Tandem Machine Shift data
Select [Master Machine Shift data] so that the tandem machine uses the
same shift value used on the master machine.
Select [Tandem Machine Shift data] so that the tandem machine independently uses the shift value specified on it. If Prohibit is selected in 02 Tandem
Machine Wait/Proof, the shift value specified on the tandem machine cannot
be used because the master machine transmits the scanned image data
which already reflect its shift value.
04 Tandem setting after JOB completion: Continue/Release

Select [Continue] so that the tandem mode remains to be specified after the
tandem printing job is completed.
Select [Release] so that the tandem mode will be released after the tandem
printing job is completed.
16-34
User Setting

16
16-35
16
16-36
User Setting
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [02 Function Setting] - [05 Tandem Setting].
Touch the item key (from 01 to 04) and make a selection for each.
-
Touch [01 Tandem Machine One Time Data Read], select [On] or
[Off], then touch [OK].
Touch [02 Tandem Machine Wait/Proof], select [Permit ]or [Prohibit], then touch [OK].
Touch [03 Tandem Machine Shift Data Setting], select [Master Machine Shift data] or [Tandem Machine Shift data], then touch [OK].
Touch [04 Tandem setting after JOB completion], select [Continue]
or [Release], then touch [OK].

16-37
User Setting
16
16.2.1006 User Paper Selection
Select the user paper setting to be used when User is specified as paper
type.
!
Details
For details of three types of user paper setting previously registered, contact your service representative.
Procedure
Touch [02 Function Setting] - [06 User Paper Selection].
Touch the desired User Paper key (from 1 to 3) to highlight it.
Screen.
16-38
User Setting
16.3
16
03 Copy Setting
16.3.1 01 Reset Setting

Set the copying condition as desired when the machine is reset. Also select
whether to reset the machine or not when inserting a key counter or a copy
card under the following reset conditions.
Resetting the machine:
- when the power is turned off
- when Auto Reset is on
- when Power Save is on
- when copying becomes available by entering the password when User
Authentication/Section Authentication is on
- when a key counter or a copy card is inserted
- when pressing [Reset] on the control panel
01 Initial Setting
Besides the factory default setting (Full Auto), you may set the copying condition as the initial setting as desired.
Full Auto copying condition:
- Original Setting: standard
- Special Image: standard
- Auto Zoom: On
- Zoom: 1.000
- Output Application: See 02 Reset Function Setting
- Copy Mode: 1-1
- Auto Paper Select: On
- Rotation: On
- ADF: On

16-39
16
16-40
User Setting
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [03 Copy Setting] - [01 Reset Setting].
Touch [01 Initial Setting].
Set the following setting items in initial conditions: Original Setting,

Special Image, AES On/Off, Zoom, Output Application, Copy Mode,
Auto Paper Select/Paper Presetting, and Rotation On/Off.
Follow the same procedure as setting it on the Copy Screen.
Touch [ADF] to select the ADF mode as the initial setting.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Reset Setting
Menu Screen.

16-41
User Setting
16
02 Reset Function Setting
When the machine is reset, select the copying conditions from the factory
default setting (Full Auto), Initial Set which is set at 03 Copy Setting - 01 Reset Setting - 01 Initial Setting, or the copying condition which is preset to
Mode Memory 30. In addition, alter Output Application of Full Auto as desired.
16-42
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [02 Reset Function Setting].
Select the copying conditions when resetting the machine.

-
AUTO RESET Key Setting:

Touch [Full Auto] to set to the factory default setting (Full Auto).
Touch [Initial Setting] to set as 03 Copy Setting - 01 Reset Setting
- 01 Initial Setting.
Each Reset Setting:
Touch [Mode Memory(30)] to set to the copying conditions preset
to Mode Memory 30.
In order to specify the setting selected in [01 Initial Setting] of [03
Copy Setting] as the copying conditions when reset, select [Initialize Set].
2
Note
When [Initial Setting] is selected for [AUTO RESET Key Setting], [Each
Reset Setting] becomes enabled.
Select Output Application for Full Auto.

Touch any key on the right side of [Finisher Mode for Full Auto].
Menu Screen.

16-43
User Setting
16
03 Initial by Key Counter Insert
Select to reset or not when inserting the key counter and the copy card.
16-44
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [03 Initial by Key Counter Insert].
Touch [On] to reset and [Off] not to reset, when inserting the key counter or the copy card.
Menu Screen.

16-45
User Setting
16
The following features can be provided by switching the setting.

-
Auto select of Booklet copy

Set the machine with SD-501 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when Stapling & Folding or Folding mode is selected.
Original Glass AMS

The machine detects the size of the original and selects the appropriate
magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size.
ADF AMS
After detecting the original size placed in the ADF, the copier automatically selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when copy size is selected
manually.
Original Glass APS

The machine automatically selects the same size of copy paper as the
original placed on the original glass.
ADF APS
The machine automatically selects the same size of copy paper as the
original placed in the ADF.
Select tray when APS cancel

Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released.
Orig./Out Bind Direction Set

Set the machine to conform to the binding direction of the originals and
printed sets each other.
Stapling Auto Reset

Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode On.
Original Binding Direction

Select to reset or save the original direction setting made on the Special
Original Screen and the binding position setting made on the Output
Mode Screen after completion of each copying job.
Status Hold When Auto Reset

When Reset functions, select to reset the Platen/ADF mode to the initial
setting, or save the previous setting.
16-46
User Setting

16
16-47
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [03 Copy Setting] - [02 Each Function Setting].
Select On/Off or touch the desired key to each item on the left side of
the screen.
There are two setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] to switch
between the screens.
Screen.
16-48
User Setting
16.4
16
04 Scanner Setting
16.4.1 01 Default Address Setting

Select the default destination of the image scanned when selecting the
Scanner Screen.
Select one from the following four destinations:
- E-Mail (E-Mail address)
- HDD (Box No.)
- FTP (FTP server address)
- SMB

16-49
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [04 Scanner Setting] - [01 Default Address Setting].
Touch the desired key for the destination.
Screen.
16-50
User Setting
16

Select the default settings for the file form, resolution, and original density/
image type when selecting the Scanner Screen.
-
File Form Setting (E-Mail)

Select the data form for transmitting scanned data attached to an e-mail,
from Package PDF, Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.
File Form Setting (HDD)

Select the data form for saving scanned data to HDD from Package PDF,
Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.
File Form Setting (FTP)

Select the data form for transmitting scanned data to an FTP server from
Package PDF, Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.
File Form Setting (SMB)

Select the data form for transmitting scanned data to a public folder from
Package PDF, Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.
Default Resolution Setting

Select the default scanning quality from 600dpi, 400dpi, 300dpi, and
200dpi.
Special Image/Density Setting

Specify the scanning density level from AE and 9 manual setting levels.
Also select the desired Special Image mode according to the original
type.

16-51
User Setting
16
Procedure
Touch [04 Scanner Setting] - [02 Each Function Setting].
Touch the desired key to each item on the left side of the screen.
Screen.
!
Details
When transmitting simultaneously to multiple destinations, the file form

setting cannot be specified individually.
When transmitting simultaneously, the file form setting will be selected in
the following priority: E-Mail>HDD>FTP>SMB
16-52
User Setting
16.5
16
05 Touch Screen Adjustment

Use this function to check the touch screen and realign the position of the
touch sensor that may have shifted.
!
Details
The Touch Screen Adjustment Screen can be accessed also by pressing

[5] of the control panel keypad with the Utility Menu Screen displayed.
Service can set the machine to forbid users to access this function from
the menu and to display the Touch Screen Adjustment Screen only when
pressing [5] with the Utility Menu Screen displayed. Contact your service
representative for details.
Procedure
Touch [05 Touch Screen Adjustment].
Touch the + symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corner
on the screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen.
Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line
of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line.
Touch each [Check Button] at the upper left and lower right corners on
the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally.

16-53
User Setting
16
5
If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3,
or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment procedure from steps 2 to 4 or contact your service representative.
Press [1] of the control panel keypad to return to the screen before
pressing [Utility/Counter] on the control panel.
16-54
17
Machine Manager Setting
POD Administrator
17
17.1
Machine Manager Setting Outlines
17
This section describes the items which the machine manager can set on the
Utility/Counter Screen, and the procedure of setting these items.
In the initial condition, the machine manager setting can be specified without
entering the machine manager password.
The machine manager setting associates with changing of touch panel expansion and machine management. It is recommended to assign the machine manager who will be the sole person to execute operations that are
explained in this section.
!
Details
Please contact your service representative to set up your machine manager password.

17-3
17
How to access the Machine Manager Setting Menu
Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility Menu

Screen.
17-4
17
Touch [06 Machine Manager Setting].
The Machine Manager Setting Menu is displayed.

When the Password Input Screen is displayed, enter the eight-digit machine manager password then touch [OK].
Set each function items.

17-5
17
17.2
01 System Setting
17.2.1 01 Power Save Setting

Specify Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off when setting the Power Save
mode manually, and select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto
Low Power and Auto Shut Off.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [01 Power Save Setting].
Specify the Power Save mode to be set manually by pressing [Power

Save] on the control panel, by selecting [Auto Low Power] or [Auto Shut
Off].
17-6
17
Select the interval of time that must elapse before turning to Auto Low
Power automatically.
-
Touch the arrow keys (,) and (+) in each area to select a specific
waiting period before activating Auto Low Power.
The initial setting is 15 minutes.
2
Note
The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto
Shut Off setting.
If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power, Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.
Select the interval of time that must elapse before turning to Auto Shut
Off automatically.
-
Touch the arrow keys (,) and (+) in each area to select a specific
waiting period before activating Auto Shut Off.
The initial setting is 90 minutes.
2
Note
If the period of time selected for Auto Shut Off is shorter than that of for
Auto Low Power, the period of time for Auto Low Power will be forcibly
reset to the same period of time as Auto Shut Off. Auto Low Power will
not function.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Machine Manager
Setting Menu Screen.

17-7
17
17.2.2 02 Time and Date Setting
Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.
The default setting for the summer time is off.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [02 Time and Date Setting].
Adjust the time.

The time indicated by the machine is displayed in the upper line and ordered by date, month, year, and time (in 24-hour expression).
- Enter the time by using the touch panel keypad.
- Touch [Set] to move the highlighted section to the number to be
changed. Repeat the same procedure for month, date, and time.
17-8
Set the summer time.

-
17
The summer time is initially deactivated.

To activate the summer time (Daylight Savings Time) function,
touch [Summer Time] to highlight it. The Present time will gain one
hour.
The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference information at the same time when an e-mail is received.
To set this function, follow the procedure below.
- Touch [Diff. time setting] to display the Difference in Time Setting
Screen.
- Touch [+ 5 -] to display + when the local time is earlier than the
Universal time, or - when the local time is later.
- Use the touch panel keypad to enter the time difference between
the Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area.
(e.g. Enter -0600 for six hours later than the Universal time.)
- Touch [OK] to return to the Time and Date Setting Screen.

17-9
17
17.2.3 03 Weekly Timer Setting
This function can be accessed only by the machine manager.

The Weekly Timer is a machine management function that shuts down power
to the machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not
required.
In addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function.
If the Weekly Timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact your
service representative.
Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer
- The power plug is inserted into the socket.
- The power switch is turned on.
- The current date and time are correctly set.
17-10
17
01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting

Enable and disable the Weekly Timer function.

17-11
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [01 Weekly
Timer On/Off Setting].
Touch [Weekly timer On] to activate Weekly Timer, or touch [Weekly

timer Off] to deactivate Weekly Timer. The default setting is [Weekly
Timer Off].
The selected key will be highlighted.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
Touch [Return] to restore the Machine Manager Setting Menu Screen.
17-12
17
02 Timer Setting
Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day
of the week or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/
Off time for a certain day of the week.

17-13
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [02 Timer Setting].
When the Timer Setting Screen is displayed, the On-time of Monday is

always highlighted.
Enter a two-digit On-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a two-digit On-minute
(ex. 7 min. is 07) using the touch panel keypad, and then touch [Set].
Touching [Set] repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday On,
Monday Off, Tuesday On, Tuesday Off.
2
Note
If On-time and Off-time are the same, the power will not be turned on.
If the setting is 00:00~00:00, you will not be able to set the machine off/
on condition for specific days.
When setting Sunday Off-time, Monday On-time is highlighted again.
To set the On/Off time collectively for more than one day of the week,
touch [Block Set] to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective
Setting Screen.
17-14
17
When this screen is displayed, the On and Off times are always set at
00:00~00:00.
-
Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one
can be selected at a time.
Enter the On-time and Off-time using the touch panel keypad, and
then touch [Set] after each entry.
Touch [OK] on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen or on the
Weekly Timer On/ Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete the
setting, and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. If other
Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu
item from 1 to 5.

17-15
17
03 Timer Action On/Off Setting
Use this function to set the timer On/Off for a given day of a given month. Set
the On-Off condition for specific days individually or collectively for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month.
2
Note
The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and

Off for Sundays.
17-16
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [03 Timer Action On/Off Setting].
Use the arrow keys (,) and (+) to scroll to the desired month. Touch
the key for the desired day to activate the timer on the calendar displayed on the centre of the screen.
To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the
week, touch [On] or [Off] for the desired day at the bottom of the
screen. If you touch an already-highlighted key, it will not be changed.
If any change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer Action
Change Confirmation popup screen will be displayed.
-
Touch [Yes] to change the timer action, or touch [No] to cancel.

The Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen will be restored.
Touch [OK] on the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen to complete the
setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.

17-17
17
04 Lunch Hour Off Setting
The Weekly Timer function turns the machine On and Off once a day. Use the
Lunch Hour Off Setting to shut down the power during the lunch break and
then turn it on again according to the Weekly Timer function setting. Only one
off-time interval can be programmed.
2
Note
The factory default setting is [Function Invalid].
17-18
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [04 Lunch Hour
Off Setting].
Touch [Function Valid] to activate the Lunch hour off function. Set Offtime and Restart time using the touch panel keypad, and then touch
[Set] after each entry.
Touch [Function Invalid] to deactivate the Lunch Hour Off function. The
time setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected.

17-19
17
05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt
Use this password setting mode to establish a four-digit password required

for using the Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows
the timer function to be interrupted without entering the password.
17-20
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt].
Use the touch panel keypad to enter a four-digit password.
2
Note
When the password setting is 0000, Timer Interrupt can be used simply
by turning the machine off, then on. In this case, you will be asked to enter the duration of use (a period of time to turn the machine power on).

17-21
17
17.2.4 04 Management List Print
Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.
Mode memory list
Programmed contents of Mode memory
User management list

Home position settings selected by user
17-22
17
Use management list

Information controlled by user authentication or division authentication
Font pattern list

Font patterns used in the machine

17-23
17
Audit log report
Audited log
17-24
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [04 Management List Print].
Touch any key to print the list.
Press the [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen.
Press [Start] on the control panel to start printing the selected list.
To suspend printing, press [Stop]. Touch the [UTILITY] tab to return to
the Management List Print Screen.

17-25
17
17.2.5 05 Operation Prohibit Set
Use this function to permit or prohibit programmed contents of Mode memory.

- Lock/Delete mode memory:
Lock/unlock or delete a mode memory that has been programmed. The
settings of a locked mode memory cannot be changed.
- Change send address:
Permit/prohibit to enter send address manually on the Scanner Screen.
- Change preset zoom:
Permit/prohibit to alter already programmed magnification ratio.
- Change overlay memory:
Permit/prohibit to delete or overwrite a title of programmed overlay image.
- Scanner function (E-Mail):
Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data via E-Mail.
- Scanner function (HDD):
Permit/prohibit to save scanned data in HDD.
- Scanner function (FTP):
Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to an FTP server.
- Scanner function (SMB):
Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to a public folder.
17-26
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [05 Operation Prohibit Set].
Select [Permit] or [Prohibit] of Mode memory.

-
Touch [Lock/Delete Mode Memory].

The programmed name is displayed on the right side of the Mode
memory number, when the setting is already programmed.
Touch the key on the left side of the desired Mode memory number.
Use the arrow keys to scroll to the desired Mode memory number,
if required.
Touching the locked key will clear the locking mark and release
locking.
Touching the key with a name not entered will not lock the key and
will not display the lock mark.

17-27
17
-
Touch the Mode memory number you want to delete. Use the arrow
keys to scroll to the desired Job number, if required. Touch [Delete].
Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Mode
memory.
2
Note
Locked Mode memory is deleted and a lock is canceled. Note that Mode
memory once deleted cannot be recalled.
30 Mode memory can be stored. Use [Next] or [Previous] to display the
desired Mode memory.
-
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Operation Prohibit Setting Screen.
Touch to highlight [Permit] or [Prohibit] for each item.
17-28
17
17.2.6 06 Expert Adjustment

01 Original Scan Area Setting
Select to delete or not the outside area of the original from the following three
ways:
- Erase Outside of Original:
Set the machine any time to delete the outside area of the original.
- On APS/AMS Only:
Set the machine to delete the outside area of the original only when APS
or AMS is activated.
- Except Orig. Glass (1:1):
Set the machine to delete the outside area of the original except when
copying in real size on the original glass.

17-29
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Expert Adjustment] - [01 Original Scan
Area Setting].
Touch the desired key to highlight it.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Expert Adjustment
Menu Screen.
17-30
17
02 ADF Frame Erasure Setting

Set Frame Erasure to function anytime when copying in ADF mode, and set
the amount of the outside area to be deleted.

17-31
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Expert Adjustment] - [02 ADF Frame
Erasure Setting].
Touch the desired amount of outside area to be deleted. Touch [None]

if deleting the outside area is not necessary.
Menu Screen.
17-32
17
03 Non Image Area Erase Setting

Use this function to select the erase mode, and set the density level of the
original (five levels). The default setting is [Auto].

17-33
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Non Image
Area Erase Setting].
Select the erase mode and the density level of the original.
-
Touch [Auto] to automatically select the appropriate settings for the

original placed on the original glass for either mode.
Touch [Oblique Erase] or [Rectangle Erase] to manually select the
erase mode.
Touch any key from five exposure levels to manually select the density level.
2
Note
It may not function appropriately depending upon the original even when
selecting [Oblique Erase] or [Rectangle Erase]. In this case, select [Auto].
Menu Screen.
17-34
17
17.2.7 07 Size Setting

Use this function to select the detected paper type of the original and the
minimum size of the original placed on the original glass.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [07 Size Setting].
Select the paper type to be detected in ADF mode or when the original
is placed on the original glass.
Touch any key on the right side of [Original Size Search].
Select the minimum size of the original to be detected in APS mode.

Touch the desired key to highlight it on the right side of [Orig. Glass
Small Size].

17-35
17
17.2.8 08 Annotation Setting
Use this function to newly register, edit, or delete annotations.

For setting an annotation, the following items are provided:
- Title:
Enter the title of annotation within 12 alphanumerical characters.
- Item1, 2, and 3:
Specify the contents of each item in printing order, from among Type In,
Date/Time, and Annotation No. along with character size and font.
- Type In:
When selecting Type In as an item of the annotation, specify the words
to be printed within 40 alphanumerical characters.
- Date/Time:
When selecting Date/Time as an item of the annotation, specify the style
to be printed.
Date: 5 styles provided (03/11/23, 11/23/03, 23/11/03, Nov 23, 2003,
23 Nov, 2003)
Time: 3 styles provided (No Display, 1:23 PM, 13:23)
- Annotation No.:
When selecting Annotation No. as an item of the annotation, specify
words (referred as Type In) within 20 alphanumerical characters and start
number of Annotation Number (numbering) within 9 alphanumerical characters in a row, and select whether to print Type In and Annotation
Number.
When selecting Annotation Number to be printed, also select the print
form between All Digit and Effective Digit.
- Character Set:
Specify the character size and font of the item to be printed as annotation.
(Character size: 8/ 10/ 12/ 14 point, Font: Gothic/ Ming)
- Combination method for items:
Select whether to print the specified items in a line or in three lines.
17-36

17
17-37
17
17-38

17
17-39
17
17-40
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [08 Annotation Setting].
Register an annotation.
-
Touch a non-registered title key on the Annotation Setting Screen,

then touch [New Register]. The Annotation New Register Screen
will be displayed.
!
Details
If selected title key has already been registered, New Register remains
dimmed and cannot be touched.
-
Specify the title of annotation.

Touch [Title] to display the Input Title Screen, enter the desired title,
then touch [OK].
!
Details
Without the title specified, the [OK] key on the Annotation Setting Screen
remains dimmed and cannot be touched to complete the setting.
-
Touch [Item 1] to specify the first line of the annotation.

Touch one of the key from [Type In], [Date/Time], [Annotation No.],
and [No Print] to select it.
When [Type In] is selected:

The Input Type In Screen will be displayed. Enter the desired words
to be printed, then touch [OK].
When [Date/Time] is selected:

The Date/Time Setting Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired style for each from 5 Date keys and 3 Time keys,
then touch [OK].

17-41
17
-
When [Annotation No.] is selected:

The Annotation Number Setting Screen will be displayed.
Touch [On] or [Off] on the right side of Type In indication to select
whether to print Type In words or not.
To specify the Type In words, touch [Set] on the right side of Type
In indication to display the Input Type In Screen, enter the desired
words, then touch [OK].
Touch [On] or [Off] on the right side of Annotation Number indication to select whether to print the serial number or not.
To specify the Annotation Number, touch [Set] on the right side of
Annotation Number indication to display the Input Annotation
Number Screen, enter the start number, then touch [OK].
Touch [All Digit] or [Effective Digit] to select the print form of the serial number.
Touch the registered title key on the Annotation Setting Screen,

then touch [Edit]. The Annotation Edit Screen will be displayed.
Edit the selected annotation.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting, or touch [Cancel] to clear the
setting.
The Annotation Setting Screen will be restored.
Delete an annotation
-
The key will be highlighted, and the Item 1 will not be printed.
Touch [Character Set] to specify the character size and font type of
the Item 1.The Print Character Setting Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired size from 4 Character Size keys, and font type
between the two [FONT] keys, then touch [OK].
Follow the steps above to specify the Item 2 and Item 3.
Touch [3 Lines] or [1 Line] under the Combination method for items
indication to select the desired print style of the annotation.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting, or touch [Cancel] to clear the
setting. The Annotation Setting Screen will be restored.
Edit an annotation.
-
When [No Print] is selected:
Touch the registered title key on the Annotation Setting Screen,

then touch [Delete]. A popup menu will be displayed to confirm that
the selected register will be deleted.
Touch [Yes] to delete, or [No] to cancel.
17-42
17
17.2.9 09 Perfect Binding Setting

01 Useful Paper Weight Select
Use this function to specify the paper weight available for each of body and
cover when using Perfect Binder.

17-43
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [09 Perfect Binding Setting] - [01 Useful
Paper Weight Select].
Touch the desired paper weight key for each of P.B. Body and Cover
to highlight it.
2
Note
If one of the paper weight selected here is not specified for the tray to be
used in the perfect binding mode, the binding operation will become unavailable with an unsuitable message displayed.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Perfect Binding
17-44
17
02 Paper Count Limit for Perfect Binding

Use this function to specify the minimum and maximum paper count to be
bound each for paper weight.

17-45
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [09 Perfect Binding Setting] - [02 Paper
Count Limit for Perfect Binding].
Touch the desired minimum and maximum count limit keys for each
paper weight to highlight it.
17-46
17
03 Stop Setting for P. B. Cover Unfit Length

Use this function to stop/continue the current job when the cover width is not
suitable for the body paper size and thickness.

17-47
17
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting] - [09 Perfect Binding Setting] - [03 Stop Setting for P. B. Cover Unfit Length].
Touch [Temporary Stop] or [Not Temporary Stop] to highlight it.
17-48
17.3
17
02 Manager/Machine Register
17.3.1 01 Machine Manager Register

Use this function to register the machine manager name and the extension
number which are displayed on the left side of the Utility Menu Screen.

17-49
17
Procedure
Touch [02 Manager/Machine Register] - [01 Machine Manager Register].
Touch [Name Input] to display the Machine Manager Name Input

Screen. Use the touch panel keypad to register the machine manager
name. The eight characters including a hyphen (-) can be entered.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting to return to the previous screen.
Enter the extension number of the machine manager on the right side
of [Extension Number Input] using the touch panel keypad.
-
The five-digit numbers including a hyphen (-) can be entered.

When the extension number is below five digits, enter hyphens to
make it five. If the hyphen is entered as the first number, it is displayed as a space on the Utility Menu Screen. The number which is
entered will be displayed from the last digit, and it is shifted leftward
as a next number is entered.
17-50
17.4
17
03 Use Auth./Volume Track
17.4.1 01 Authentication Method

Use this function to select any function of User Authentication and Volume
Track. Authentication settings can be altered according to the user authentication and volume track settings.
01 Authentication Setting
Establish the authentication settings by combining the following six elements.
- User Authentication:
Enter the user name and the user password.
- Section Authentication:
Enter the section password.
- Section Name Input:
Enter the section name. (Section Name Input cannot be selected when
Section Authentication is set to Off.)
- User/Section Auth. Connect:
When User Authentication and Section Authentication are set to On and
User/Section Auth. Connect is set to On, Section Authentication is not required to enter.
- Password Input Timing:
Set the timing of entering the password.
- Section Distribute Number:
Enter the number of sections. The total number of authentication to be
distributed is 1,000 for both a user and a section. The remaining number
from which the number of sections is subtracted from 1,000 will be distributed as user authentication.
!
Details
It is recommended to distribute authentication for both the user and the

section, otherwise either party cannot be assigned authentication if it is
distributed to only one party.

17-51
17
17-52
17
Procedure
Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [01 Authentication Method] - [01

Authentication Setting].
Select [On] or [Off] on the right side of [User Authentication], [Section

Authentication], [Section Name Input], and [User/Section Auth. Connect].
Select [At Auto Reset] or [At JOB Complete] on the right side of [Password Input Timing].
Touch [Section Distribute Number] to display the touch panel keypad.

Enter the number to distribute using the keypad or the arrow keys (,)
and (+), then touch [OK].
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Authentication

Method Setting Menu Screen.

17-53
17
02 Section Management Setting
Use this function to set Copy/Printer or Scanner jobs managed by the section, and select the machine condition in which the machine stops due to
reaching the copy limit.
!
Details
If [Copy/Printer] or [Scanner] is set to Off when Section Authentication is

set to On on the Authentication Method Setting Screen, the section password is not required to enter for authentication. In this case, job count
and copy limit count will be suspended.
When [Immediately] of [Limit Reached Stop Setting] is selected, the job
is immediately suspended as soon as the copy limit is reached. In this
case, copying conditions, output data, and scanned data will not be hold.
In order to continue the job with the same section password, change the
number of the copy limit which is set to the section password or reset
counting.
When [After Print] is selected, the machine stops after completing the job as
reaching the copy limit. The message Copy limit reached is displayed, and
the machine stops its operation.
When [Warning Only] is selected, the message Copy limit reached is displayed as reaching the copy limit, and the next job can be continuously executed.
17-54
17
Procedure
Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [01 Authentication Method] - [02

Section Management Setting].
Select [On] or [Off] on the right side of [Copy/Printer] and [Scanner], respectively.
Select [Immediately], [After Print], or [Warning Only] on the right side of

[Limit Reached Stop Setting].


17-55
17
17.4.2 02 Volume Track
Use this function to assign a number to each section, and set a section
name, password and limit value to each number. The registered section
management setting is listed on the screen. Select the section management
setting from the list and change, reset or delete the setting.
17-56

17
17-57
17
17-58
17
Procedure
Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [02 Volume Track].
Follow the instructions below for adding, changing and deleting the
section setting, and also resetting the copy count.
To change section settings:
- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to be
changed and touch to highlight it.
- Touch [Change] to display the Change Registered Section Screen.
- Touch the desired item to be changed and display the input screen.
- Enter the new setting. For the details on entering texts in the input
screen, see the appendix. You may enter eight digits for the password, eight characters for the section name, and eight digits for the
copy limit.
- Touch [OK] to complete the setting.
- The message will be displayed when the changed password or section name is duplicated. Touch [No] to accept the duplication, or
touch [Yes] to enter another password or section name.
To add section settings:
- Touch [Add] to display the Add Registered Section Screen.
- Touch [Section No.] to display the input screen, and enter the section number. Touch [OK]. You may enter four digits for the section
number.
- Touch [Section Name] to display the input screen. Enter the section
name and touch [OK]. You may enter eight characters for the section name. For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see
the appendix.

17-59
17
-
Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the password

and touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the password. For
the details on entering texts in the input screen, see the appendix.
Touch [Limit] to display the input screen. Enter the copy limit value
and touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the copy limit.
The message will be displayed when the changed password or section name is duplicated. Touch [No] to accept the duplication, or
touch [Yes] to enter another password or section name.
To delete section settings:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to be deleted
and touch to highlight it.
- Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup screen.
To reset section count:
- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to reset the
count and touch to highlight it.
- Touch [Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup
screen.
- Touch any key to reset. Touch [Cancel] when not resetting.
To reset all count:
- Touch [All Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup
screen.

17-60
17
17.4.3 03 User Authentication Set

Use this function to assign a number to each user, and set a user name,
password and limit value to each number. The registered user setting is listed
on the screen. Select the user setting from the list and change, reset or delete
the setting.

17-61
17
17-62

17
17-63
17
Procedure
Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track - [03 User Authentication Set.
Follow the instructions below for adding, changing and deleting the
user setting, and also resetting the copy count.
To change user settings:
- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to be changed
- Touch [Change] to display the Change Registered User Screen.
- Touch [User Name] to display the input screen. Enter the user name
and touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the user name. For
- Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the password
17-64

-
17
Touch [Belong Section] to display the screen to select a section belong to. Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired section
name, touch to highlight it, then touch [OK].
!
Details
When [User/Section Auth. Connect] is set to On on the Authentication

Method Setting Screen, [Belong Section] can be specified.
-
Touch any key on the right side of [Usable Function] to select the
job necessary to authenticate a newly registered user.
To add user settings:

- Touch [Add] to display the Add Registered User Screen.
- Touch [User No.] to display the input screen. Enter the user number
and touch [OK. You may enter four digits for the section number.
- Touch [User Name] to display the input screen. Enter the user name
and touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the section name.
For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see the appendix.
- Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the password
- Touch [Belong Section] to display the screen to select a section belong to. Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired section
name, touch to highlight it, then touch [OK].
!
Details
When [User/Section Auth. Connect] is set to On on the Authentication

Method Setting Screen, [Belong Section] can be specified.
-
Touch any key on the right side of [Usable Function] to select the
job necessary to authenticate a newly registered user.
To delete user settings:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to be deleted
- Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup screen.

17-65
17
To reset user count:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to reset the
count and touch to highlight it.
- Touch [Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup
screen.
To reset all count:
- Touch [All Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup
screen.

17-66
17
17.4.4 04 Non register/Output Set

Use this function to limit the output setting of an unregistered user or section.
When this function is set to On, only the initial output setting can be set to
any job under a condition of which user authentication and/or section authentication is set to Off.
Procedure
Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [04 Non register/Output Set].
Touch [On] to activate this function, or touch [Off] to deactivate this

function.


17-67
17
17.5
04 Network Setting
17.5.1 01 Machine NIC Setting

Control the NIC settings such as the IP address and line speed of the machine.
17-68
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [01 Machine NIC Setting].
Specify the following items.

Enter numeric values using the touch panel keypad. After entering a
value, touch [Set]. The next item becomes highlighted for setting. Continue in this manner.
- IP Address
Enter the IP address of the machine.
- Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask.
- Gateway Address
Enter the gateway address.
- IP Address (Server PC)
Enter the IP address of the PC on which PageScope Job Editor
Server is installed.
- IP Address (Tandem)
Enter the IP address of the tandem machine working in tandem.
- Line Speed Setting
Specify the line speed of the network. Choose from the options provided.

17-69
17
17.5.2 02 Controller NIC Setting
Specify the controller settings. Various default settings or network settings

can be customized as required.
List of the Network Settings
Specify the settings for connecting a network printer and network scanner,
and the settings for TCP/IP, RAW port numbers, IP Filter (permission/denial),
and ping.
For details, refer to 01 TCP/IP on page 17-83.
Specific setting and Description
Setting options (highlighted: default)
01 TCP/IP
TCP/IP
Specify enable or disable TCP/IP.
DHCP
Specify enable or disable Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP). If Enable is selected, the IP address
is automatically obtained from the DHCP server, in
which case it is not necessary to enter it.
Enable/Disable
Enable/Disable
IP Address
Specify the IP address.
0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
Subnet Mask
Specify the subnet mask.
0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
Default Gateway
Specify as required.
0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
DNS Server1 to 3
Specify DNS server addresses.
0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
DNS Host Name

Specify the DNS host name.
**********
Varied from machine to machine.
Max. 63 characters combining
symbols and alphanumerics can
be used.
DNS Domain Name

Specify the DNS domain name.

be used.
LPD
When Enable is selected, LPD/LPR printing becomes
available.
Enable/Disable
Network Speed
Specify the network transfer rate.
Auto Negotiation/10M Half Du-
TCP/IP RAW port settings (1 to 6)

Specify RAW port numbers and to be used or not.
Use/Not Use
(Set between 1 - 65535.)
TCP/IP Filter permission settings *1 *2

Specify to use the permission settings or not, and the
range in which to permit connections.
On/Off
0.0.0.0 - 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
17-70
plex/10M Full Duplex/100M Half

Duplex/100M Full Duplex

TCP/IP Filter denial settings *1 *2
Specify to use the denial settings or not, and the range
in which to deny connections.
Network Test Ping Address
Perform ping.
17
On/Off
0.0.0.0 - 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
be used.
* 1: f the range of the permission setting is the same as that of the denial setting, the latter setting
overrides the former.
* 2: The functions that are affected by the permission and denial settings are as follows:
HTTP servers (PSWC, IPP), HTTP servers (PSWC with SSL), printing over the network (LPD,
RAW Port, SMB), FTP servers (access to Scan to HDD jobs), SNMP
Specify the settings for connecting network printer, and the NetWare settings. For details, refer to 02 NetWare on page 17-871:
02 NetWare
NetWare
NetWare
If Use is selected, Novell NetWare (IPX/SPX) is enabled as the print server protocol.
Frame Type
Select the frame type.
Operation Mode
Select the required operation mode.
Use/Not Use
Auto Detect/IEEE802.2/
IEEE802.3/Ethernet2/
IEEE802.2SNAP
Pserver/Nprinter/Rprinter
NetWare Pserver Setting

Print Server Name
Enter a print server name.
*********
be used.
1
Print Server Password *
Specify a password for the Novell print server. This
password is shared among all the servers that are
allocated to the print server.

be used.
Polling Interval
Specify the interval with which to poll.
1 - 65535 (1)
Bindery Disable
When Novell NetWare 4.x or later is used, specify to
enable the bindery service. If On is selected, the
print server does not support other print servers
that are connected to the bindery file server.
Bindery File Server Name
Specify the bindery file server name.

On/Off

be used.
17-71
17
NDS Context Name

If Novell Directory Service (NDS) is used, specify a
priority NDS context name. It should be specified as
a full context name, and you cannot use . (period)
at the beginning of the context pass. It is not necessary to enter the container name (print server name).

be used.
NDS Tree Name

If NDS is used, specify the NDS tree name.

be used.
NetWare Nprinter / Rprinter, NetWare Status Setting

Printer Name
Specify the printer name. It is initially set to a particular printer name allocated to the machine.
Printer Number
Specify the printer number.
**********
be used.
Select between 0 and 255.
File Server Name

Specify file server names.
Max. 10 servers can be displayed.
Queue Name
Specify queue names.
Max. 10 queues can be displayed.
* 1: If NetWare has a password allocated by using PCONSOLE or NWADMIN, the print server
must also have a password. If the bindery mode is used, the print server password can only be
set in capital letters. When a password is entered in the field, it must be the same as the one
that is allocated to NetWare by using PCONSOLE or NWADMIN. The password entered here is
stored in the print server setting memory.
17-72
17
Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the IPP settings. For
details, refer to 03 IPP on page 17-91.
03 IPP
IPP
IPP
Specify to use IPP or not.
Use/Not Use
IPP Print Job Accept

Specify to accept IPP print jobs.
Permit/Prohibit
IPP Operation Support Information Setting

Print Job
Specify to enable the function or not.
On/Off
Cancel Job
On/Off
Job Acquisition
On/Off
Enable Job
On/Off
Job Attribute Acquisition

On/Off
Print Attribute Acquisition

On/Off
IPP Printer Information Setting, Printer URI Setting

Printer Name
Specify the printer name.

be used.
Printer Establishment Place

Specify the place in which to install the printer.

be used.
Printer Information
Specify printer information.

be used.
Printer URI
Printer URI's are set.

Max. 8 addresses
17-73
17
Specify to use Scan to HDD/Scan to FTP for transmission, the proxy server
setting, and the passive function. For details, refer to 04 FTP on
page 17-94.
04 FTP
Server *1
Specify to use the machine as an FTP server. If a
TWAIN driver is used to access to Scan to HDD jobs,
select Use.
Use/Not Use
Client *2
Specify to use the machine as a client. If Scan to FTP
is used for transmission to the FTP server, select Use.
Use/Not Use
Proxy Server Address

Specify the proxy server address.
0.0.0.0
be used.
Proxy Server Port No.

Specify the proxy server port number.
1 - 65535 (21)
Passive Function
Specify to use the passive function.
On/Off
Connection Time Out Time

Specify the time out value.
5 - 300 seconds (60)
Port No.
Specify the number of the port that is used to communicate with the FTP server.
1 - 65535 (21)
* 1: By selecting Not Use, access to bizhub PRO 1050/1050e (TWAIN, Visual Count) will be prohibited. It is possible to save Scan to HDD jobs, but clients can no longer obtain them.
* 2: By selecting Not Use, Scan operations are executable, but the transmission from bizhub PRO
1050/1050e to FTP will be disabled.
17-74
17
Specify the SNMP settings. For details, refer to 05 SNMP on page 17-96.
05 SNMP
SNMP *1
Specify to use SNMP or not.
Use/Not Use
Read Community Name

Specify a Read Community Name.
public
be used.
Write Community Name

Specify a Write Community Name.
private
be used.
* 1: Used when communicating with bizhub PRO 1050/1050e using PageScope applications.
Specify the SMB printing setting, and to use Scan to SMB for transmission.
For details, refer to 06 SMB on page 17-98.
06 SMB
Print
Specify to use SMB printing functions.
Use/Not Use
Net BIOS Name

Specify a NetBIOS name as required.
*********
be used.
Print Service Name

Specify a print service name.

be used.
Work Group
Specify a work group name.

be used.
Scan
Select Use when communicating with SMB servers using Scan to SMB.

Use/Not Use
17-75
17
Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the AppleTalk settings.
For details, refer to 07 AppleTalk on page 17-100.
07 AppleTalk
AppleTalk
Selecting Use enables AppleTalk as the print server
protocol.
Use/Not Use
Printer Name
Specify the name of the printer that is used on the AppleTalk network.
**********
be used.
Zone Name
Specify a zone. If no zone exists in such a case as when
using a machine on a network that has no seed router,
leave the field blank.

be used.
Current Zone
Specify the current zone.

be used.
17-76
17
Specify the settings for an e-mail send/receive, division for transmitted data
and authentication, and save the template of titles and bodies frequently
used. For details, refer to 08 E-Mail on page 17-102.
08 E-Mail
E-Mail Send Setting
E-Mail Send
Specify to use e-mail transmission.
SMTP Server Address
Specify the address of the server that is used for email transmission.
On/Off
0.0.0.0
be used.
Port No.
Specify the port number.
1 - 65535 (25)

Specify the time out duration.
30 - 300 seconds (60)
Binary Division
Specify to use binary division for transmitted data.
On/Off
Binary Division Size

Specify the size by which to divide transmitted data.
1 - 150 (x100 Kb) (5)
E-Mail Send Maximum Size

Specify to set the maximum size for e-mail transmission.
0(Off) - 100Mb (0)
Authentication Setting POP before SMTP

Specify to use the POP before SMTP authentication. Specify as required in your own environment.
On/Off
Authentication Setting SMTP Authentication *1

Specify to use the SMTP authentication. Specify as
required in your own environment.
On/Off
POP before SMTP

Specify the duration used for POP before SMTP.
0 - 60 seconds (0)
SMTP Auth. User Name

Specify a user name if Authentication Setting SMTP
Authentication is set to On.

be used.
Password
Specify a password.

be used.
Realm
Specify a realm (domain name). If the SMTP server
with which to communicate supports DIGEST-MD5,
this field must be entered.

be used.
Machine Manager Mail Address

Specify the e-mail address of the Machine Manager.

be used.

17-77
17
08 E-Mail
E-Mail Receive Setting
POP Server Address
Specify an address of the POP server that is used to
receive e-mail.
0.0.0.0
be used.
User Name
Specify a user name that is used to connect to the
POP server.

be used.
Password
Specify a password that is used to connect to the
POP server.

be used.
APOP
Specify to use APOP or not.
Use/Not Use
Port No.
Specify the number of port that is used to communicate with the POP server.
Specify the time out duration.
1 - 65535 (110)
30 - 300 seconds (60)
Title Setting
Max. 5 e-mail titles can be saved for frequent use.
Max. 64 characters can be used.
Sentence Setting
Max. 5 e-mail bodies can be saved for frequent use.
Max. 256 characters can be used.
* 1: The following authentication methods are supported: DIGEST-MD5, CRAM-MD5, LOGIN,

PLAIN
Specify the duration before automatically deleting Scan to HDD data. For details, refer to 09 HDD on page 17-108.
09 HDD
HDD
Specify the duration for which Scan to HDD data are
stored in the printer controller HDD before they are automatically deleted.
17-78
Not Delete/12 hours/1 day/2 days/

3 days/7 days/30 days
17
Specify the Alert Mail settings. For details, refer to 10 Alert Mail on
page 17-110.
10 Alert Mail
E-Mail Transmission
Specify to use e-mail transmission for alert notification.
On/Off
Inform E-Mail Trans. Address

Inform the e-mail address to which to send alert e-mail.

be used.
Information to transmit
Specify items to be included in alert e-mail.
8 items available: Service Call/

Jam/Paper Supply/Toner Supply/
PM Call/Staple Cartridge Supply/
Finisher Tray Full/Dispose of Trash
Basket
Clear All
Specify the CSRC settings. For details, refer to 11 CSRC on page 17-112.
11 CSRC
CSRC Send Setting
CSRC Send
Specify to use CSRC Send or not.
SMTP Server Address
Specify the SMTP server address.
On/Off
0.0.0.0
be used.
Port No.
Specify the port number.
1 - 65535 (25)

Specify the SMTP time out duration.
30 - 300 seconds (60)
Machine Manager From Address

Specify the From address that is used to send email from Controller NIC.

be used.
Authentication Setting POP before SMTP

Specify to use the POP before SMTP authentication. Specify as required in your own environment.
On/Off
Authentication Setting SMTP Authentication *1

Specify to use the SMTP authentication. Specify as
required in your own environment.
On/Off
POP before SMTP

Specify the duration used for POP before SMTP.
0 - 60 seconds (0)
SMTP Authentication User Name

If Authentication Setting SMTP Authentication is
set to On, specify a user name.

be used.

17-79
17
Password
Specify a password.

be used.
Realm
Specify a realm (domain name). If the SMTP server
with which to communicate requires a realm, this
field must be entered.

be used.
CSRC Receive Setting

CSRC Receive
Specify to use CSRC Receive or not.
On/Off
POP Server Address

Specify a POP server address.
0.0.0.0
be used.
User Name
Specify a user name to log in to the POP server.
Max. 63 alphanumerics can be

used.
Password
Specify a password to log in to the POP server.
Max. 15 alphanumerics can be

used.
APOP
Specify to use the APOP function.
On/Off
Port No.
Specify the POP port number.
1 - 65535 (110)

Specify the POP time out duration.
30 - 300 seconds (60)
Auto Check
Specify to check incoming e-mail automatically.
On/Off
Auto Check Interval Time

Specify the interval by which to check incoming email automatically.
CSRC Communication Test
1 - 60 minutes (15)
Start
* 1: The following authentication methods are supported: DIGEST-MD5, CRAM-MD5, LOGIN,

PLAIN
17-80
17
Specify the settings for third party applications. For details, refer to
12 AP I/F on page 17-117.
12 AP I/F
AP I/F
Specify to use AP I/F .
AP I/F over SSL
If SSL is used for PSWC communication, this setting is
enabled.
AP I/F Authentication
Enable the setting to block access to this I / F.
Use/Not Use
Use/Not Use
On/Off
AP I/F Login Name

Required if the AP I/F Authentication is set to On.
Max. 8 characters combining symbols and alphanumerics can be

used.
AP I/F Login Password

Required if the AP I/F Authentication is set to On.
Max. 8 characters combining symbols and alphanumerics can be

used.
AP I/F Port Number

If SSL is not used, the port number specified in this field
will be used.
1 - 65535 (50001)
AP I/F Port Number (SSL)

If SSL is used, the port number specified in this field will
be used.
1 - 65535 (50003)
Specify the PSWC (PageScope Web Connection) setting. For details, refer to
13 PSWC on page 17-119.
13 PSWC
PSWC
Specify to use the PSWC function.
Use/Not Use
Specify the Network Setting Clear setting. For details, refer to 14 Network
Setting Clear on page 17-121.
14 Network Setting Clear

Initialize Execute
Restore the initial network settings specified at the time
of shipment.

17-81
17
Specify the SNMP Trap setting. For details, refer to 15 SNMP Trap on
page 17-123.
15 SNMP Trap
SNMP Trap Tranmission
Specify to transmit SNMP Trap or not.
Authentication Failure Trans
Specify to transmit by SNMP in the case taht any authentication failure in Read Community Name or Write
Community Name of SNMP occurs.
On/Off
On/Off
Trans Address 1 - 5 Setting

Address SNMP Trap Trans
Specify to transmit the SNMP Trap or not.
On/Off
SNMP Trap Trans Address

Specify the SNMP Trap transmission address.
0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)
SNMP Trap Trans Port No.

Specify the SNMP Trap transmission port number.
1 - 65535 (162)
Trans Community Name

Specify the transmission community name.
Max. 15 alphanumerics/symbols
can be used.
Report Items
Select the desired items. (More than one item can
be selected.)
8 items
Service Call/ Jam/ Paper Supply/
Toner Supply/ PM Call/ Staple Cartridge Supply/ Finisher Tray Full/
Dispose of Trash Basket
Clear All
Trans IPX Setting

IPX SNMP Trap Transmission
Specify to transmit the IPX SNMP Trap or not.
On/Off
Trap IPX Network Address

Specify the IPX network address.
00:00:00:00
Alphabet A to F and numbers can
be used (12 digits fixed).
Trans IPX Node Address

Specify the IPX node address.
00:00:00:00:00:00
Within 15 alphanumerics/symbols
Trans IPX Community Name

Specify the IPX community name.
Within 15 alphanumerics/symbols
Report Items
Select the desired items. (More than one item can
be selected.)
17-82
8 items
Service Call/ Jam/ Paper Supply/
Toner Supply/ PM Call/ Staple Cartridge Supply/ Finisher Tray Full/
Dispose of Trash Basket
Clear All
17
01 TCP/IP
Specify the settings for connecting a network printer and network scanner,
and the settings for TCP/IP, RAW port numbers, IP Filter (permission/denial),
and ping.

17-83
17
17-84
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [01 TCP/IP].
For each item, select or enter a required value. Use [Previous] or [Next]
as required.
-
TCP/IP
Select [Enable] or [Disable].
DHCP
IP Address
Touch [IP Address] to display an address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Subnet Mask
Touch [Subnet Mask] to display an address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Default Gateway
Touch [Default Gateway] to display an address input screen. After
entering in the field, touch [OK].
DNS Server 1 to 3
Touch an appropriate key to display an address input screen. After
DNS Host Name

Touch [DNS Host Name] to display the input screen. After entering
in the field, touch [OK].
DNS Domain Name

Touch [DNS Domain Name] to display the input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
LDP

17-85
17
-
Network Speed
Select an appropriate key.
TCP/IP RAW port settings

Touch an appropriate RAW port number to display a touch panel
keypad input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
To specify to use individual ports or not, select [Use] or [Not Use] to
the right of each RAW port key.
TCP/IP Filter permission settings

To specify to use the permission settings or not, select [On] or [Off]
to the right of [Permission Setting]. To specify the range of permitted connections, touch an appropriate setting range key to display
an address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
TCP/IP Filter denial settings

To specify to use the denial settings or not, select [On] or [Off] [Off]
to the right of [Denial Setting]. To specify the range of denied connections, touch an appropriate setting range key to display an address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Network Test Ping Address

To enter an address, touch [Network Test Ping Address] to display
an address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Touch [Send] to perform the network test. Any event of error
prompts [Error] in the message box.
Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the Controller NIC
Touch [Return] to specify other settings, or touch [Exit] to finish setting.
After you have changed the settings, turn off the sub power, then turn
off and on the main power.
!
Details
When you turn off and on the main power, you need to wait at least 10
seconds to turn on after turning off. If you do not allow a sufficient interval
in between, the machine may not run correctly.
17-86
17
02 NetWare
Specify the settings for connecting network printer, and the NetWare settings.
Where Novell NetWare is not used, make sure that [Not Use] is selected.

17-87
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [02 NetWare].
as required.
17-88
17
NetWare Setting
- NetWare
Select [Use].
- Frame Type
Select a frame type.
- Operation Mode
Select an appropriate operation mode.
NetWare Pserver Setting
- Print Server Name
Touch [Print Server Name] to display an input screen. After entering
- Print Server Password
Touch [Print Server Password] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
- Polling Interval
Touch [Polling Interval] to display an input screen. After entering in
the field, touch [OK].
- Bindery Disable
Select [On] or [Off].
- Bindery File Server Name
Touch [Bindery File Server Name] to display an input screen. After
- NDS Context Name
You cannot use . (period) at the beginning of the context pass. It
is not necessary to enter the container name (print server name).
Touch [NDS Context Name] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
- NDS Tree Name
Touch [NDS Tree Name] to display an input screen. After entering
NetWare Nprinter/Rprinter, NetWare Status Setting
- Printer Name
Touch [Printer Name] to display an input screen. After entering in
- Printer Number
Touch [Printer Number] to display an input screen. After entering in
- File Server Name
Maximum 10 file server names can be entered.
- Queue Name
Maximum 10 queue names can be entered.

17-89
17
5
!
Details
17-90
17
03 IPP
Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the IPP settings.

17-91
17
17-92
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [03 IPP].
as required.
IPP Setting
- IPP
Specify to use IPP or not.
- IPP Print Job Accept
Specify to accept IPP print jobs or not.
IPP Operation Support Information Setting
The following items can be specified by selecting [On] or [Off].
- Print Job
- Cancel Job
- Job Acquisition
- Enable Job
- Job Attribute Acquisition
- Print Attribute Acquisition
IPP Printer Information Setting, Printer URI Setting
- Printer Name
- Printer Establishment Place
Touch [Printer Establishment Place] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
- Printer Information
Touch [Printer Information] to display an input screen. After entering
- Printer URI
Maximum eight addresses are set automatically.
!
Details
17-93
17
04 FTP
Specify to use Scan to HDD/Scan to FTP for transmission, the proxy server
setting, and the passive function.
17-94
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [04 FTP].
For each item, select or enter a required value.

-
Server
Select to use an FTP server.
Client
Select to use a client.

Touch [Proxy Server Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Proxy Server Port Number

Touch [Proxy Server Port No.] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Passive Function
Select to use the passive function.

Touch [Connection Time Out Time] to display an input screen. After
Port Number
Touch [Port No.] to display an input screen. After entering in the
field, touch [OK].
!
Details

17-95
17
05 SNMP
Specify the SNMP settings.
17-96
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [05 SNMP].

-
SNMP
Select to use SNMP.
Read Community Name

Touch [Read Community Name] to display an input screen. After
Write Community Name

Touch [Write Community Name] to display an input screen. After
!
Details

17-97
17
06 SMB
Specify the SMB printing setting, and to use Scan to SMB for transmission.
17-98
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [06 SMB].

-
Print
Select [Use] or [Not Use].
Net BIOS Name

Specify if required. Touch [Net BIOS Name] to display an input
screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Print Service Name

Touch [Print Service Name] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Work Group
Touch [Work Group] to display an input screen. After entering in the
field, touch [OK].
Scan
!
Details

17-99
17
07 AppleTalk
Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the AppleTalk settings.
17-100
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [07 AppleTalk].

-
AppleTalk
Selecting [Use] enables AppleTalk as the print server protocol.
Printer Name
The following characters cannot be used as part of the printer
name: (), *, @, -, =, :
Zone Name
Touch [Zone Name] to display an input screen. After entering in the
field, touch [OK].
Current Zone
!
Details

17-101
17
08 E-Mail
Specify the settings for an e-mail send/receive, division for transmitted data
and authentication, and save the template of titles and bodies frequently
used.
17-102

17
17-103
17
17-104
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [08 E-Mail].
Touch [01 E-Mail Send Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to
display the E-Mail Send Setting Screen. Specify the following items,
using [Previous] or [Next] as required. Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen.
-
E-Mail Send
Specify whether to use e-mail transmission.
SMTP Server Address

Touch [SMTP Server Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Port Number
field, touch [OK].



Touch [Binary Division Size] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
E-Mail Send Maximum Size

Touch [E-Mail Send Maximum Size] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Authentication Setting
Select [Off], [POP before SMTP], or [SMTP Auth]..
POP before SMTP

Touch [POP before SMTP] to display an input screen. After entering

Touch [SMTP Auth. User Name] to display an input screen. After
Password
Touch [Password] to display an input screen. After entering in the
field, touch [OK].
Realm
Touch [Realm] to display an input screen. After entering in the field,
touch [OK].
Machine Manager Mail Address

Touch [Machine Manager Mail Address] to display an input screen.
After entering in the field, touch [OK].

17-105
17
3
Touch [02 E-Mail Receive Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen
to display the E-Mail Receive Setting Screen. Specify the following
items. Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-Mail
-
POP Server Address

Touch [POP Server Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
User Name
Touch [User Name] to display an input screen. After entering in the
field, touch [OK].
Password
field, touch [OK].
APOP
Port Number
field, touch [OK].

Touch [03 Title Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to display
the E-Mail Title Setting Screen.
Save an e-mail title.
- Select an appropriate Default Select number.
- Touch [Input] to display an input screen and enter a title.
- After entering the title, touch [OK].
- Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen.
Touch [04 Sentence Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to display the E-Mail Sentence Setting Screen.
Save an e-mail body.
- Select an appropriate Default Select number.
- Touch [Input] to display an input screen and enter a body.
- After entering the body, touch [OK].
- Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen.
Touch [Return] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to specify other settings, or touch [Exit] to finish setting.
17-106
17
!
Details

17-107
17
09 HDD
Specify the duration for which Scan to HDD data are stored in the printer
controller HDD before they are automatically deleted.
17-108
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [09 HDD].
Touch an appropriate key to specify the duration for which data are
stored in HDD before they are automatically deleted.
!
Details

17-109
17
10 Alert Mail
Specify the settings for e-mail error notification.
17-110
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [10 Alert
Mail].
Specify to use e-mail notification, and a destination address to which

to notify.
Select [On] or [Off] to the right of [E-Mail Transmission] to specify to use
e-mail notification.
Touch [Inform E-Mail Trans. Address] to display an input screen. Enter
an address, then touch [OK]. The e-mail address can have maximum
250 characters.
Touch [Next].
Select required items to be included in alert e-mail.
If you need no item to be included, touch [Clear All].
!
Details
17-111
17
11 CSRC
CS Remote Care includes service tools, which you do not necessarily have
to set. Contact your service representative for details.
17-112

17
17-113
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [11 CSRC].
Touch [01 CSRC Send Setting] on the CSRC Setting Menu Screen to
display the CSRC Send Setting Screen. Specify the following items,
using [Previous] or [Next] as required.
Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the CSRC Setting
Menu Screen.
- CSRC Send
- SMTP Server Address
Touch [SMTP Server Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
- Port Number
field, touch [OK]. The range to be used is between 1 and 65535.
17-114

-
17

entering in the field, touch [OK].The range to be used is between 30
and 300 seconds.
Machine Manager From Address

Touch [Machine Manager From Address] to display an input
screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Authentication Setting [POP before SMTP]

Touch [POP before SMTP] under [Authentication Setting] to display
an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Authentication Setting [SMTP Authentication]

POP before SMTP
Touch [POP before SMTP] to display an input screen. After entering
in the field, touch [OK]. The range to be used is between 0 and 60
seconds.

Touch [SMTP Auth. User Name] to display an input screen. After
Password
field, touch [OK].
Realm
Touch [Realm] to display an input screen. After entering in the field,
touch [OK].
Touch [02 CSRC Receive Setting] on the CSRC Setting Menu Screen
to display the CSRC Receive Setting Screen. Specify the following
items, using [Previous] or [Next] as required.
Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the CSRC Setting
Menu Screen.
- CSRC Receive
- POP Server Address
Touch [POP Server Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
- User Name
Touch [User Name] to display an input screen. After entering in the
field, touch [OK].
- Password
field, touch [OK].
- APOP
- Port Number
field, touch [OK].

17-115
17
-

entering in the field, touch [OK]. The range to be used is between
30 and 300 seconds.
Auto Check
If [On] is selected, the interval must be specified.
Auto Check Interval Time

Touch [Auto Check Interval Time] to display an input screen. After
Touch [03 CSRC Communications Test] on the CSRC Setting Menu

Screen to display the CSRC Communications Test Screen.
Touch [Start] to perform the communication test. On completing the
test, touch [Return] to restore the CSRC Setting Menu Screen.
!
Details
17-116
17
12 AP I/F
Specify the settings for AP I/F.

17-117
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [12 AP I/F].

-
AP I/F
AP I/F over SSL

AP I/F Authentication
AP I/F Login Name

Touch [AP I/F Login Name] to display an input screen. After entering
AP I/F Login Password

Touch [AP I/F Login Password] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
AP I/F Port Number

Touch [AP I/F Port Number] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
AP I/F Port Number (SSL)

Touch [AP I/F Port Number (SSL)] to display an input screen. After
!
Details
17-118
17
13 PSWC
Specify to use PageScope Web Connection (PSWC).

17-119
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [13 PSWC].
Touch [Use] or [Not Use] to specify whether you want to use PSWC or
not.
After changing the settings, turn off the sub power, then turn off and on
the main power.
!
Details
17-120
17
14 Network Setting Clear

Recover the initial network settings specified at the time of shipment.

17-121
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [14 Network
Setting Clear].
Touch [Initialize Execute] to recover the initial setting specified at the

time of shipment.
!
Details
17-122
17
15 SNMP Trap
Specify the SNMP Trap settings.
!
Details
Before setting the SNMP Trap, specify to use SNMP in [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [05 SNMP].

17-123
17
17-124
17
Procedure
Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [15 SNMP
Trap].
Specify to use the SNMP Trap transmission and authentication failure

transmission functions.
-
SNMP Trap Transmission

Select [On] or [Off] to transmit SNMP Trap or not.
Authentication Failure Trans

Select [On] or [Off] to transmit by SNMP in the case that any authentication failure in Read Community Name or Write Community
Name of SNMP occurs.
Specify the transmission address.
Trans Address 1 - 5 Setting

Touch the desired key from 1 to 5 of transmission address setting on
the SNMP Trap Setting Screen to display the SNMP Trap Trans Address Setting Screen. Specify the following items, using [Previous] or
[Next] as required.
Touch [OK] to complete the settings.
-
Address SNMP Trap Trans

SNMP Trap Trans Address

Touch [SMTP Trap Trans Address] to display an input screen. After
SNMP Trap Trans Port No.

Touch [SNMP Trap Trans Port No.] to display an input screen. After

17-125
17
-
Trans Community Name

Touch [Trans Community Name] to display an input screen. After
Report Items
Select the desired report items. More than one item can be selected.
Touch [Clear All] if none of them are required.
2
Note
The authentication failure transmission will be performed even if all report

items are cleared.
Trans IPX Setting

Touch [Trans IPX Setting] on the SNMP Trap Setting Screen to display
the SNMP Trap Trans IPX Setting Screen. Specify the following items,
using [Previous] or [Next] as required.
Touch [OK] to complete the settings.
-
IPX SNMP Trap Transmission

Select [On] or [Off] to transmit IPX SNMP Trap or not.
Trans IPX Network Address

Touch [Trans IPX Network Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Trans IPX Node Address

Touch [Trans IPX Node Address] to display an input screen. After
Trans IPX Community Name

Touch [Trans IPX Community Name] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].
Report Items
Select the desired report items. More than one item can be selected.
Touch [Clear All] if none of them are required.
2
Note
The authentication failure transmission will be performed even if all report

items are cleared.
17-126
17
!
Details

17-127
17
17.6
05 Copy/Printer Setting
17.6.1 01 JOB Offset Operating

Set the machine to offset the copies/printouts of different jobs.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [01 JOB Offset Operating].
Touch [On] or [Off] to highlight it.
17-128
17
17.6.2 02 Continuation Print(Print)

Set the machine to output multiple reserved print jobs in succession.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [02 Continuation Print(Print)].

17-129
17
17.6.3 03 Page No. Position (Booklet)
Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside
edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [03 Page No. Position (Booklet)].
Touch [On Outside Page Print)] or [Off] to highlight it.
17-130
17
17.6.4 04 Fixing Prerotation Set

The fixing heat adjustment may be necessary as altering the paper type and
the weight. The machine rotates the fixing roller before printing starts in order
to print at the appropriate temperature for the specific paper type and the
weight.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting - [04 Fixing Prerotation Set.
Touch [Rotation On] or [Rotation Off] to highlight it.

17-131
17
2
Note
If pressing [Start] after altering the paper type and weight when [Rotation
On] is selected, the message Machine is warming up. Is displayed.
Please wait until copying is enabled.
17-132
17
17.6.5 05 Image Auto Rotation

Set this function to activate always, only when APS or AMS is activated, or
only when APS, AMS or reduce is activated.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [05 Image Auto Rotation].
Touch the desired key to highlight it.

17-133
17
17.6.6 06 Interruption Suspend
Select the timing to stop the job in progress when [Interrupt] is pressed. The
timing can be set either to suspend on completing the job in progress or to
suspend by interrupting the job in progress.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [06 Interruption Suspend].
Touch [When Current Set Complete] or [Stop Immediately] to highlight

it.
17-134
17
17.6.7 07 Copy Reserve Operation

Set the timing for the reserve job setting. The timing can be set to either when
specifying on the Copy Reserve Confirmation Screen navigated from the Machine Status Screen, or when displaying the Copy Screen as placing the
original in the ADF.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [07 Copy Reserve Operation].
Touch highlight [Enabled by Operation] or [Enabled by Set Original] to

highlight it.

17-135
17
!
Details
Copy Reserve by placing the original on the original glass

When the Machine Status Screen is displayed, the screen can altered to
the Copy Screen by placing the original in the ADF.
17-136
17
17.6.8 08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)

Select to stop scanning when pulling out the tray during scanning the original.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)].

17-137
17
17.6.9 09 Continuation Print (Copy)
Select the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in succession.
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [09 Continuation Print (Copy)].
17-138
17
17.6.1010 Original Glass SDF

Select to set the exit direction when copying one set of the original placed
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [10 Original Glass SDF].
Touch [Face Up] or [Face Down] to highlight it.

17-139
17
17.6.1111 SDF Auto Setting
Set the machine to feed a single document automatically as placing it in the

ADF in the Memory Scan mode, or feed it by pressing [Start].
Procedure
Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [11 SDF Auto Setting].
17-140
17.7
17
06 System Connection
17.7.1 01 User Call

Use this function to call your service representative for maintenance. Your
service representative is monitoring the machine status as needed basis. The
monitored information will be useful for maintenance.
Procedure
Touch [06 System Connection] - [01 User Call].
Touch [Start].
Touch [Return] to restore the Machine Manager Setting Menu.

17-141
17
17.8
07 Security Setting
17.8.1 01 Machine Manager Password

Set the new machine manager password.
17-142
17
Procedure
Touch [07 Security Setting] - [01 Machine Manager Password].
Touch [Input Manager Password] to display the Input Manager Password Screen.
Enter the new password.
Touch [OK].

17-143
17
17.8.2 02 HDD Management Setting
01 Folder Box List/Delete
The user can create a folder or a box when saving images in a personal, public or secure folder. The machine manager can refer to the name, password,
number or creation time of the folder created by the user, and delete the folder or box if necessary.
17-144

17
17-145
17
17-146
17
Procedure
Touch [07 Security Setting] - [02 HDD Management Setting] - [01 Folder Box List/Delete].
Refer the detailed information of the folder and the box.

-
Touch [Personal Folder], [Public Folder], or [Secure Folder] to refer

to the details of the desired folder or box.
Touch the desired folder to highlight it.
When referring to the information, touch to highlight the folder
which contains the box to be referred to.
When the folder or box to be referred to is not displayed, touch the
arrow keys (,) and (+) on the right side to highlight it.
Confirm that the name of the desired folder or box is displayed at
the upper area of the screen.
Touch [Detail] to display the details.
Touch [Return] to restore the Folder Box List/Delete Screen.
Delete the detailed information of the folder or box.

-
Follow steps (1) and (2) of step 2 to select the folder or box to be
deleted.
Confirm that the name of the desired folder or box is displayed at
the upper area of the screen.
Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup screen.
Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to suspend deleting.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the HDD Management
Setting Screen.

17-147
17
02 HDD Data Auto Delete Period Setting
Specify the period of time (12 hours to 30 days) to keep data so that it will be
deleted automatically when specified period has passed. The initial setting is
Not Delete.
17-148
17
Procedure
Touch [07 Security Setting] - [02 HDD Management Setting] - [02 HDD
Data Auto Delete Period Setting].
Touch the desired period to highlight it.
Touch [Not Delete] to highlight it when not setting the automatically deleting period.
Setting Screen.

17-149
17
03 Change HDD Lock Password
Change the HDD lock password.
2
Note
The HDD Lock Password cannot be changed unless the Security

Strengthen mode is set to On.
17-150
17
Procedure
Touch [07 Security Setting] - [02 HDD Management Setting] - [03

Change HDD Lock Password].
Touch [Current Password] to display the Password Input Screen. Enter

the current password and touch [OK].
Touch [New Password] to display the Password Input Screen. Enter

the new password and touch [OK].
Touch [Check Input] to enter the same new password, then touch [OK].
Setting Screen.

17-151
17
17.8.3 03 Security Strengthen mode
Set the Security Strengthen mode On/Off.
2
Note
In order to set the Security Strengthen mode to On, it is required by your

service representative to set a CE password and a machine manager
password to your machine.
17-152
17
Procedure
Touch [07 Security Setting] - [03 Security Strengthen mode].
Touch [On] when activating this mode, or touch [Off] when deactivating
this mode.
Touch [OK] at the lower right side of the screen to display the Confirmation popup screen.
Touch [Yes] to complete the setting. The machine power will be turned
off, then on.
Touch [No] to cancel the setting. Touch [Cancel] at the lower right side
of the screen to restore the Machine Manager Setting Menu Screen.

17-153
17
17.9
08 Scanner Address Register
17.9.1 01 Send Address Edit/Delete

Change or delete the destination of the scanned image. The following four
addresses can be registered:
- E-Mail (mail address)
- HDD (box No.)
- SMB
The Group of registered E-Mail addresses can be deleted.
17-154

17
17-155
17
Procedure
Touch [08 Scanner Address Register] - [01 Send Address Edit/Delete].
2
Note
In order to delete the group or registered e-mail addresses, touch Group.

Touch the name of the group to be deleted, then touch Delete. The popup
message Delete this destination address? is displayed. Touch Yes or
No and return to the previous screen.
Select the address type to be changed or deleted.

To change/delete the E-Mail destination address:
- Touch [E-Mail].
- Display the Register Name of the destination address using the
search key or the arrow keys (,) and (+).
- Touch the Register Name to highlight it.
- To change, touch [Change] to display the E-Mail Account Screen.
Select the changing item from [Address], [Name] and [Reference
Name], and change it in the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching
[On] or [Off]. Touch [OK].
- To delete, touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation
popup screen. To suspend deleting, touch [No].
17-156
17
To change/delete the HDD destination address:

- Touch [HDD].
- To change, touch [Change] to display the HDD Description Screen.
Select the changing item from [Profile], [Reference Name], [Host
Address], [File Path, [Login Name] and [Password], and change it in
the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off]. Touch
[OK].
- To delete the unregistered box, touch [Non Reg. Box.] Delete as following the step (5) above.

17-157
17
17-158
17
To change/delete the FTP destination address:

- Touch [FTP].
- To change, touch [Change] to display the FTP Description Screen.
Address], [File Path], [Login Name] and [Password] ,and change it
in the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off]. Touch
[OK].

17-159
17
To change/delete the SMB destination address:

- Touch [SMB].
search key or the arrows keys (,) and (+).
- To change, touch [Change] to display the SMB Description Screen.
Address], [File Path], [Login Name] and [Password], and change it
in the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off]. Touch
[OK].
17-160
17
To delete Group:
- Touch [Group].
- Touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation popup
screen. To suspend deleting, touch [No].

17-161
17
17-162
18
Browser Control Setting
POD Administrator
18
18.1
Web Utilities
18
When the machine is connected with a PC over a network, the web browser
activated on the PC provides the following functions.
- Account Track Setting
Make the account track settings concerning the administrator setting using the web browser on a PC.
- Scan Transmission Setting
Register the address for the transmission of the scanned image data concerning the administrator using the web browser.
- Setting Data Import/Export
Transmit the setting data from the machine to a PC (export) using the web
browser, then return the data to the machine (import).
- Box Edit
Use the web browser to change the name of the box or file created in the
HDD or to display the thumbnail of the top page of the file.
Prerequisites
- Browser: Internet Explorer 6.02 / Netscape Navigator 7.1 / FireFox1.0 or
later
- Contact your network manager for details on the network system, the IP
address or host name of the machine.
- The account track setting is available only when the machine is under the
following conditions.
All distribute numbers (1,000) are assigned the account authentication
party.
Account authentication is set ON.
User authentication data is not yet registered.
- The user name "admin" (for accessing to the Administrator Setting Menu)
cannot be changed.
Enter the administrator password previously specified on the machine.
00000000 is initially applied.
Once entered, the user name and password are not necessary to be reentered unless the web browser is restarted.
!
Details
To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset].

18-3
18
To cancel adding a new account track data, click on [Back] or any Administrator Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.
Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine using
the web browser.
Procedure
Turn on the power to the PC connected with the machine over a network.
Activate the web browser, then select [Open] from the File menu.
Enter the URL (http:// [IP address or host name of the machine]), then
click on [OK].
The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed.
!
Details
The Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice.
18-4
18.2
18
Setting Account Track Data

Make the account track settings concerning the administrator setting using
the web browser on a PC.
!
Details
A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message.

However, duplicating a password is possible using the administrator setting.
The Section Name (Account Name) entry box accepts letters, numbers.
Any symbols will be rejected with an error message displayed in the window.
Max. 1,000 account entries can be registered. An error message will be
displayed if the above limit is exceeded.
An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not been
completed due to the machine operation in progress. Please click on [Apply] while the machine is in an idle state.

18-5
18
18.2.1 Adding Account Track
Add a new account track data (password, name, and limit value).
Procedure
Open the Web Utilities window.
Click on [Machine Manager Setting].
The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed.
Enter "admin" in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit administrator
in the password text box, then click on [OK].
The Machine Manager Setting menu will be displayed.
18-6
18
Click on [Volume Track setting].
The Volume Track Setting menu will be displayed.
Click on [Volume Track data add].
The Volume Track Data Add window will be displayed.
Enter a new account track data.

-
Section Name (Account Name) : 8 characters max.

Password: 8 digits max.
Limit: 99,999,999 copies max.

18-7
18
7
Click on [Apply].
The registered content will be displayed in the window.

The new account track data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations.
Click on [Back] to return to the Volume Track Setting menu or any menu
item to jump to the desired window.
18-8
18
18.2.2 Editing Account Track Data

Change or delete the account track data (password, section name, or limit
value, or reset the counters).
Procedure
password in the password text box, then click on [OK].

18-9
18
4
Click on [Volume Track setting].
The Volume Track Setting menu will be displayed.
Click on [Volume Track data list].
The Volume Track List will be displayed.
18-10
18
Change the Section Name (Account Name), Password, and Limit Value.
-
Click on the number of the data to be edited.
The Volume Track Add Data window will be displayed.

- Change the section name (account name), password, or limit value,
as desired. For details in entering procedure, refer to page 5-4.
Click on [Apply].
The edited content will be displayed in the window.

The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that
is valid for the user operations.
- Click on [Back] to return to the Account Track Data List window.

18-11
18
7
Reset Counter.
-
Click on the check box(es) to select the account track data of the
counter to be cleared. If all the counters are to be cleared, click on
[SelectAll].
Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the "Copy/Printer
Count reset." or "Scan Count reset."
Click on [Apply].
The Counter Reset Confirmation window will be displayed.

- Click on [Apply] to immediately reset the counters to zero.
The message "Setting was changed" will be displayed.
18-12

-
18
Click on [Back] to return to the Account Track Data List or any menu
Delete Counter.
-
Click on the check box(es) to select the account track data to be

deleted. If all the data are to be cleared, click on [SelectAll].
Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the "Delete (Except for Another user count)".
Click on [Apply].
The Delete Confirmation window will be displayed.

18-13
18
-
Click on [Apply] to immediately delete the data.
The message "Setting was deleted" will be displayed.

- Click on [Back] to return to the Volume Track Data List or any menu
18-14
18
Save Counter.
-
Click on [Save this table as a file].
Click on [Save].

18-15
18
In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the data, then click on
[Save].
!
Details
The account track data will be stored in CSV format.

The data cannot be saved while the machine is in operation. In this case,
try this procedure again after the machine starts idling. Click on [Back] in
the browser window to return to the Account Track Data List for starting
over.
18-16
18
Example: Account track data list stored as a file
The "Another user count" will be stored by the name of "UNKNOWN"

in the last line.

18-17
18
18.3
Setting Scan Transmission Function

Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete the address for the
transmission of the scanned image data using the web browser. For details
of the Scan Transmission Setting, contact your service representative.
Prerequisites
- The Scan Transmission Setting is not used in the machine.
- Using Scan Transmission Setting in the administrator setting, you cannot
newly register an E-mail/HDD/FTP/SMB address or group the entries.
- The [Scan transmission setting] key appears in the Scan Transmission
Setting window only when the optional Image Controller is installed in the
machine.
- Click on the [DAILY USE] check box in the E-mail Registration table, if the
data is frequently used.
- The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored, if
entered.
- The HDD Box No. will be registered as a 9-digit number.
- For example, entering [1] will be registered as [000000001].
Procedure
18-18
18
The Administrator Setting menu will be displayed.
Click on [Scan transmission setting].
The Scan Transmission Setting window will be displayed.

18-19
18
5
Register the E-Mail, HDD, FTP, and SMB, as required.
18-20
18
Click on [Registration] to complete the entry.

The registered content will be displayed.
Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.
Display the Entry List.

-
Click on [Entry List] of the desired item under the entry box to display the Entry List.

18-21
18
8
Change the registered contents.

-
Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 7.
Click on the entry name to be changed.
The window for changing the selected item will be displayed.

- Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration].
The registered content will be displayed.

- Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.
18-22
18
Delete the registered contents.

-
Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 7.
Click on the check box in the Delete column of the item to be deleted, then click on [Delete]. If all the data are to be cleared, click on
[SelectAll].
The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed.

- Confirm the registered name to be deleted, then click on [Yes].
Click on [Back] to return to the Entry List window.


18-23
18
18.4
Transmitting Machine Setting File

Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from the machine to a PC (export) using the web browser, edit the setting data on the PC,
then return the file to the machine (import).
Account track data (max. 1,000 files)
Four Scan Transmission Setting data (max. 500 files in total)
- E-mail data (E-Mail address)
- HDD (Box No.)
- SMB (shared folder)
Prerequisites
- The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returned
to the machine at any time, and is available for common use if you have
two or more machines.
- The file transmitted to a PC, being converted to a file type for batch
processing, can be edited efficiently and returned to the machine.
- The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the four data types mentioned above, however, each data type can be made into a file and transmitted separately.
- The exported setting file of this machine can be imported to another
model, and vice versa. For details, contact your service representative.
- The exported setting file of this machine can be imported to another
model, and vice versa. For details, contact your service representative.
!
Details
The file name is automatically assigned as described below. Select the

data to be exported, changing the name if desired.
vt_tab.txt (account track data)
ip_email.txt (E-mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
ip_hdd.txt (HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
ip_ftp.txt (FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
ip_smb.txt (SMB data of Scan Transmission Setting data)
18-24
18
Procedure

18-25
18
4
Click on [Setting data Import/Export].
The Setting Data Import/Export window will be displayed.
Export the machine setting file.

-
Select the desired file type from the pull-down menu, then click on
[Export....]
18-26
18
The File Download dialog box will be displayed.

- Click on [OK].
In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the machine setting file, then click on [Save].
A dialog box will be displayed when the saving operation is completed.

- Click on [Close].
18-27
18
6
Edit the machine setting file.

The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file
which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editor
or Table Editor. A new setting file can also be created according to the
specifications for each file type. See page 17-54 for details.
Import the machine setting file.

-
Click on [Browse...] to designate the machine setting file to be imported, then click on [Import].
The result message will be displayed when the registration is completed.
18-28
18
!
Details
The file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating. If an error

message is displayed, try again to save the file after the current machine
operation is completed.
If the registration cannot be completed successfully, error messages will
be displayed as follows.
Can't transfer data (The machine is busy)
Try again to import the data after the machine operation in progress is
completed.
The data cannot be recognized
Confirm that the data is the machine setting file.
Data size is too large
Confirm that the data is the machine setting file.
Check if the file size exceeds 100,000 bytes.
The data cannot be registered
Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file.
Check if the file entries are already over the limit.

18-29
18
To Edit the Machine Setting File

- Save the file as a text.
- Begin the file with a specified tag. (ex. #EKC_TAB)
- A line should be 300 bytes or less.
- The file size should be 100,000 bytes or less.
- The line that begins with "#" is a comment.
- ex. Machine setting file of an account track data
Specifications for Each Machine Setting File Type

Account track data setting file:
- Begin the file with #EKC_TAB.
- Max. 1,000 files can be edited.
- A line should include PASSWORD, NAME, and LIMIT, separated by a tab.
- Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) and alphabets only to specify PASSWORD.
- Use numbers and alphabets only to specify NAME.
- Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify LIMIT (0 - 99,999,999).
E-mail data setting file:
- Begin the file with #IP_EMAIL.
- A line should include NAME, ADDRESS, REFERENCE, and DAILY, separated by a tab.
- NAME should be 24 bytes or less.
- ADDRESS should be 250 bytes or less.
18-30

-
18
REFERENCE should be 250 bytes or less.

Mark DAILY USE with "1" or DAILY NOT USE with "0" in each column.
HDD data setting file:

- Begin the file name with #IP_HDD.
- A line should include NAME, NUMBER, REFERENCE, or DAILY, separated by a tab.
- Use up to 9 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify a NUMBER.
- REFERENCE should be 24 bytes or less.
- Mark DAILY USE with "1" or DAILY NOT USE with "0" in each column.
FTP data setting file:
- Begin the file name with #IP_FTP.
- A line should include NAME, ADDRESS, PORT, FILEPATH, LOGINNAME,
PASSWORD, REFERENCE, or DAILY being separated by a tab.
- ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less.
- Use up to 5 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify PORT (1 - 65,535).
- FILEPATH should be 96 bytes or less.
- LOGINNAME should be 47 bytes or less.
- PASSWORD should be 24 bytes or less.
- REFERENCE should be 24 bytes or less.
- Mark DAILY USE with "1" or DAILY NOT USE with "0" in each column.
-
SMB data setting file:

Begin the file name with #IP_SMB.
A line should include NAME, ADDRESS, FILEPATH, LOGINNAME,
PASSWORD, REFERENCE, or DAILY being separated by a tab.
NAME should be 24 bytes or less.
ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less.
FILEPATH should be 96 bytes or less.
LOGINNAME should be 47 bytes or less.
PASSWORD should be 14 bytes or less.
REFERENCE should be 24 bytes or less.
Mark DAILY USE with "1" or DAILY NOT USE with "0" in each column.

18-31
18
18.5
Box Edit
Use the web browser to change the name of the box or file created in the
HDD, or to display the thumbnail of the top page of the file.
Prerequisites
This function is available only when the following conditions are satisfied on
the machine.
- Any screen for storing/recalling data is not currently displayed on the
touch panel of the machine.
- The machine is mounted with the HDD.
Procedure
18-32
18
Click on [Box edit].
The Box Edit window will be displayed.
Click on the desired user name.
Selected user name will be marked with an asterisk (*) at its head.
The user name marked with L is locked and cannot be selected.
!
Details
The number in parentheses on the right side of the title User Name indicates the count of registered users.

18-33
18
6
Click on the desired box name.
Selected box name will be marked with an asterisk (*) at its head.
The box name marked with L is locked and cannot be selected.
To change the box name, proceed to the next step.
To change the file name or check the thumbnail, proceed to step 8.
!
Details
The number in parentheses on the right side of the title Box Name indicates the count of registered boxes.
Change the box name.

Clicking on the desired box name (as in step 6), a text box will appear
at the top of the Box Name area.
- Enter the new name within 20 alphanumeric characters.
Click on [Change] on the right side of the text box.
The new name will be registered and enabled immediately.

18-34
18
Click on the desired file name to display the thumbnail.
Selected file name will be marked with an asterisk (*), and the thumbnail
of the top page of selected file will be displayed in the File Name area.
To change the file name, proceed to the next step.
!
Details
The number in parentheses on the right side of the title File Name indicates the count of registered files.
The file name will be listed in datal order of save.
Only the top page of the file can be displayed as thumbnail. You cannot
specify any other page.
18-35
18
9
Change the file name.

Clicking on the desired file name (as in step 8), a text box will appear at
the top of the File Name area.
- Enter the new name within 30 alphanumeric characters.
Click on [Change] on the right side of the text box.
The new name will be registered and enabled immediately.
!
Details
When changing the file name, a message may inform you that the entered
name has been already used.
In this case, reenter a new name or consult your service representative.
18-36
18.6
18
PageScope Web Connection

PageScope Web Connection is a device control utility program provided by
the HTTP server built into the image controller of the KONICA MINOLTA
bizhub PRO 1050/1050e. This utility can be used with a Web browser to display the status of the bizhub PRO 1050 printer, scanner, and network, and to
change default and network settings.
!
Details
When the Security Strengthen mode is set on, this utility function cannot
be used.
This function is also unavailable when the PSWC setting of the main body
is specified as Not Use. For details, refer to 02 Controller NIC Setting
on page 17-70.
System Requirements
To fully access all of the features of PageScope Web Connection, the operating computer must meet the following requirements.
Operating System
Web Browser
Windows 98, Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP,

Server 2003
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 (recommended)

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x, in which MSXML3 must
be installed (*1)
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or higher
Macintosh Mac OS 8.x, 9.x, X
Linux
* 1: Download MSXML3.0 from Microsoft Download Center and install it on your system.
Web Browser Settings
JavaScript
JavaScript must be active. For setting JavaScript, see the following procedure.
-
Internet Explorer
Select [Internet Options] under [Tools]. Select the [Security] tab and then
click [Custom Level]. Scroll down to the item that reads [Active Scripting].
Select the option marked [Enable].
Netscape Navigator
Select [Preferences] under [Edit]. Click [Advanced] and then click [Scripts
& Plug-ins]. Check [Navigator] under [Enable JavaScript for].

18-37
18
Cookies
Cookies must be active. For setting cookies, see the following procedure.
-
Internet Explorer
Select [Internet Options] under [Tools]. Select the [Privacy] tab and then
move the slider to the [High] privacy setting.
Netscape Navigator
Select [Preferences] under [Edit]. Click [Privacy & Security] and then click
[Cookies]. Check [Allow cookies based on privacy settings] or [Allow all
cookies] under [Cookie Acceptance Policy].
Cache
Confirm the following cache setting using the browser.
-
Internet Explorer
Select [Internet Options] under [Tools]. Select the [General] tab and then
click [Settings]. Check [Every visit to the page] under [Check for newer
versions of stored pages:].
Netscape Navigator
Select [Preferences] under [Edit]. Click [Advanced] and then click
[Cache]. Check [Every time I view the page] under [Compare the page in
the cache to the page on the network:].
18-38
18.7
18
Access
PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser.
Procedure
Start the Web browser.
In the Address bar, enter the IP address of the image controller as

shown below. Then press the [Enter] key.
http://IP address of the image controller/
(Example)
When the IP address of the image controller is 192.168.0.10:
http://192.168.0.10
The PageScope Web Connection screen appears.
Operation
PageScope Web Connection operation is identical to Internet Web pages.
You can click a link on the Web page to jump to the link destination.

18-39
18
18.8
Screen Configuration
The screen shown below is called the User Mode screen: all users can view
this screen. By clicking [Admin Mode] and entering an appropriate Admin
Password in the User Mode screen, you can enter the Administrator Mode
screen. For details, refer to Administrator Mode on page 18-44.
The configuration of the PageScope Web Connection screen is shown below.
!
Details
If user authentication is set, the user name and password entry screen
will appear.
8
5
1. KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Web Connection Logo

Click the KONICA MINOLTA logo to jump to the Konica Minolta web site.
http://konicaminolta.jp
Click the PageScope Web Connection logo to jump to the About Screen,
providing the version information and the copyright description.
Click the PageScope Web Connection logo on the About Screen to jump
to the following Web site.
http://pagescope.com
2. Status Display
Icons and text indicate the current status of the main body's printer and
scanner. The message "Ready" appears when the main body's printer
and scanner are operating normally.
3. Administrator Mode
18-40
18
Logs into Administrator Mode. For details, refer to Logging in Using Administrator Mode on page 18-42.
4. Language
Sets the display language for the browser. [Auto] indicates the same language as the operating system being used and the other options indicate
the same language as displayed on the control panel.
5. Tabs
Select the categories of items to be displayed.
- System
- Job (User Mode only)
- Print
- Scan (Administrator Mode only)
- Network (Administrator Mode only)
For the details of each tab, see the following sections.
6. Menus
Selects the information or setup item to be displayed. The menus that appear vary depending on the tab selection.
For the details of each menu, see the following sections.
7. Information and Setting Details
Displays the details of the selected menu.
8. Help
If an online manual URL has been set, the online manual will appear. For
details, refer to Online Assistance on page 18-46.

18-41
18
18.8.1 Logging in Using Administrator Mode
By logging into PageScope Web Connection in Administrator Mode, you can

configure or confirm the image controller system.
Procedure
Click the [Admin Mode] button in the upper left corner of the screen.
Enter the password for Administrator Mode and click the [Login] button.
To log out, click [Logout].
!
Details
The default value of the administrator password for PageScope Web

Connection is 00000000.
You can change the administrator password for PageScope Web Connection using the browser in the [System] area of Administrator Mode.
See Administrator Mode on page 18-44. You can also change it using
the touch panel of the main body. Contact your service store for details.
18-42
18
In order to ensure the security against data used in Administrator Mode,

set SSL. SSL can be set on the [Network] tab of Administrator Mode. For
details, SSL/TLS on page 18-77.

18-43
18
18.9
Administrator Mode
By logging into PageScope Web Connection in Administrator Mode, you can
configure or confirm the image controller system.
For the details on the login procedure for Administrator Mode, refer to Logging in Using Administrator Mode on page 18-42.
18.10 Administrator Mode System Tab

On the [System] tab, information concerning the system configuration of the
machine and settings is displayed.
18.10.1Administrator Password
This screen appears when you click [Administrator Password] on the [System] tab. The screen is used to change the administrator password.
Current Password:
Enter the current administrator password. The password is displayed in
asterisks (*).
New Password:
Enter a new administrator password. Maximum eight alphanumeric characters can used. The password is displayed in asterisks (*).
Retype New Password:

Retype the new password as entered above for confirmation.
[Apply] button:
Click the button to apply the new settings.
[Clear] button:
Click the button to clear the settings that were entered or selected.
18-44
18
18.10.2Device Information
This screen appears when you click [Device Information] on the [System] tab.
The screen is used to enter the device name, device place, and the administrator name.
Device Name:
Enter the name of the device. Maximum 255 alphanumeric characters
can be used. Click [Detail] on the [System] tab of the User Mode Screen
to display this screen.
Device Place:
Enter the location where the device is set up. Maximum 255 alphanumeric characters can be used. Click [Detail] on the [System] tab of the User
Mode Screen to display this screen.
Administrator Name:
Enter the device administrator. Maximum 255 alphanumeric characters
can be used. Click [Device Information] on the [System] tab of the User
Mode Screen to display this screen.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
Click the button to clear the settings that were entered.

18-45
18
18.10.3ROM Version
This screen appears when you click [ROM Version] on the [System] tab. It
shows the ROM version of the copier, the firmware version of the controller,
and other information.
18.10.4Online Assistance
This screen appears when you click [Online Assistance] on the [System] tab.
You can use the screen to enter information concerning product support.
Click [Online Assistance] on the [System] tab of the User Mode Screen to display information entered on this screen.
Contact Name:
Enter the support contact for the product. Maximum 63 alphanumeric
characters can be used.
18-46

-
18
Contact Information:
Enter the phone number of the support contact for the product. (Blank by
default.) Maximum 127 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Product Help URL:

Enter the URL of the product information Web site. (Blank by default.)
Maximum 127 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Corporate URL:
The URL of the manufacturer Web site. (Can be changed.) Maximum 127
alphanumeric characters can be used.
Supplies and Accessories:

Enter the contact for ordering consumables. Maximum 127 alphanumeric
characters can be used.
Online Help URL:

Enter the online manual URL. Maximum 127 alphanumeric characters
can be used.
There are two choices:
Accessing the manual on the Internet posted on the Konica Minolta website:
Enter: http://pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinehelp/
pro1050/help.html.
Accessing the manual over the LAN:
Enter: http://(IP address for the PC)/pswc_help/****.pswc_help.html.
The administrator must have the online manual to make it available over
the LAN server.
Use a PC on which Microsoft IIS or another Web server is running. The
Web server must be set to have the folder " /pswc_help/" accessible.
Make sure to copy to the Web server the entire pswc_help folder which
is installed using the installer CD.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
2
Note
If the online manual URLs are not used, users must save the online help
file on their PCs. In this case, the [Help] button will not function.

18-47
18
18.10.5Import/Export
This screen appears when you click [Import/Export] on the [System] tab. You
can use the screen to import a setting file from a PC to the device, and to
export a setting file from the device to a PC.
!
Details
See appendix for exportable data.
Import:
Enter the name of a file to which the setting value of the device will be
entered (imported).
You can click the [Browse] button and select a setting file to import.
Click the [Import] button to import the setting file from PC to the device.
Export:
Export the setting value of the device to PC.
Click the [Export] button to display the file download screen.
Click the [Save] button to select a place to save the file.
The download completion screen will appear. Click the [Close] button. A
data file will be exported from the device. (The file format must be confirmed.)
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-48
18
18.10.6Maintenance
This screen appears when you click [Maintenance] on the [System] tab. You
can use the screen to operate maintenance of the machine. You can initialize
the network settings (reset to factory default settings) or restart the network
only to enable new parameters.
Network Setting Clear
This screen appears when you click [Network Setting Clear] under the [Maintenance] menu. You can use the screen to initialize the network settings to
factory default.
Network Setting Clear:
Click the [Clear] button to display the confirmation screen.
Click [OK] to clear.
!
Details
It may take few minutes for clearing the network settings. After clearing
the settings is completed, you can access the network again. When you
use the network, restart the Web browser.

18-49
18
Reset
This screen appears when you click [Reset] under the [Maintenance] menu.
Restart on the controller to enable new parameters. In this case, the controller will be initialized, however the main body will not.
!
Details
If you want to initialize the main body after resetting the network, wait until the controller restarts (about 2 minutes) and turn the main switch OFF.
Wait 10 seconds or longer before turning the device ON again.
Reset:
%
Click the [Reset] button to restart the network only to enable new parameters.
!
Details
It may take few minutes for resetting the network. After resetting the network, you can access the network again. When you use the network, restart the Web browser.
18-50
18
18.10.7E-Mail Alert
This screen appears when you click [E-Mail Alert] on the [System] tab. You
can use the screen to set sending notices to the selected e-mail addresses
when an alert occurs to your system. The alert items that are checked their
check boxes will be sent as alert by e-mail.
Notice of E-Mail:
Sets whether or not to enable alert mail notice function.
Notice E-Mail Address:

Enter the e-mail address to which to send alert mail. Maximum 250 characters can be used.
Alert:
Choose notification items.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-51
18
18.11 Administrator Mode Print Tab
The [Printer] tab is used to configure the image controller.
18.11.1Interface
This screen appears when you click [Interface] on the [Print] tab. The screen
is used to set information concerning the interface timeout.
Parallel Timeout:
Set parallel port timeout (10-300 seconds).
Network Timeout:
Set receive network timeout (10-300 seconds).
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-52
18
18.11.2Port Settings
This screen appears when you click [Port Settings] on the [Print] tab. You can
use the screen to see the list of port settings.
RAW port number

List the RAW port numbers 1 to 6 that are set in [TCP/IP] on the [Network]
tab.
Status
Show enable or disable of each RAW port.

18-53
18
18.11.3Default Settings
General Settings
This screen appears when you click [General Settings] under the [Default
Settings] menu of the [Print] tab. The screen is used to set default values for
printer settings, that are not associated with PDL. If there is no command
from the driver, this setting will be applied. These settings also appear if you
select Controller Settings on the touch panel's Device Status screen - 02
Printer Settings - 01 Basic Settings.
Enter for individual items.

PDL, Input Tray, Output Tray, Duplex, Binding, Staple, Punch, Center
Staple / Centerfold / Trimming, Offset, Output Order, Print Number, Collate, Paper Size, Orientation, Resolution, Spool Setting, Banner Option,
Banner Page Tray, Convert Paper Size, 1 Page/Sheet, Booklet, Print Position.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-54
18
PCL Settings
This screen appears when you click [PCL Settings] under the [Default Settings] menu. The screen is used to set PCL.
These settings also appear if you select Controller Settings on the touch panel's Device Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 03 PCL Settings.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-55
18
PS Settings (Option)
This screen appears when you click [PS Settings] under the [Default Settings]
menu. The screen is used to set PS.
These settings also appear if you select Controller Settings on the touch panel's Device Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 03 PS Settings.
Print To PS Error:
Select whether or not to print the error report when an error occurs while
rasterizing PostScript data.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-56
18
TIFF Settings
This screen appears when you click [TIFF Settings] under the [Default Settings] menu. The screen is used to set default values for TIFF settings. These
settings also appear if you select Controller Settings on the touch panel's
Device Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 04 TIFF Settings.

Auto Paper Select, Image Position.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-57
18
18.11.4Administrator Mode Scan Tab
The [Scan] tab is used to enter, edit, or delete subject and body text for email.
18.11.5Subject Registration
This screen appears when you click [Subject] on the [Scan] tab. You can use
the screen to enter, edit, or delete the subject for e-mail.
[Apply] button:
[Edit] button:
Click the button to open the editing screen.
[Clear] button:
Click the button to set it to the default before changes were applied.
[Delete] button:
Click the button to delete a selected subject.
18-58
18
To Enter / Edit Subjects
Check the number of the subject to enter or edit, and click the [Edit]
button.
Enter the subject on the Subject Registration screen, and click the [Apply] button. You can use maximum 64 characters.
Click the [OK] button on the Completed screen. It will take you back to
the subject list screen.

18-59
18
To Delete Subjects
Check the number of the subject to delete, and click the [Delete] button.
Click the [OK] button on the Subject Deletion screen.
the subject list screen.
18-60
18
18.11.6Body Registration
This screen appears when you click [Body] on the [Scan] tab. You can use
the screen to enter, edit, or delete the body text for e-mail.
[Apply] button:
[Edit] button:
Click the button to open the editing screen.
[Clear] button:
Click the button to set it to the default before changes were applied.
[Delete] button:
Click the button to delete a selected body text.

18-61
18
To Enter / Edit Body
Check the number of the body text to enter or edit, and click the [Edit]
button.
Enter the text on the Body Registration screen, and click the [Apply]
button. You can use maximum 255 characters.
the body text list screen.
18-62
18
To Delete Bodies
Check the number of the body text to delete, and click the [Delete] button.
Click the [OK] button on the Body Deletion screen.
the body text list screen.

18-63
18
18.12 Administrator Mode Network Tab
The [Network] tab shows settings concerning the printer controller network.
18.12.1TCP/IP
TCP/IP
This screen appears when you click [TCP/IP] on the [Network] tab. The
screen is used to set a summary of the image controller interface (TCP/IP
settings).
When TCP/IP is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure to
enter parameters correctly.

TCP/IP, Speed, Auto IP, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
RAW Port Number 1-6, Host Name, Domain Name, DNS Server, LPD.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
IP Filtering
This screen appears when you click [IP Filtering] under the [TCP/IP] menu.
The screen is used to specify the host address and restrict access permission. You can also use the screen to enable or disable access permission,
access refusal, and their ranges of TCP/IP filtering. When the same range is
specified for the accept setting and the refuse setting, the refuse setting has
priority over the accept setting.
18-64
18

Access Permission Addresses and their ranges, Access Refusal Addresses and their ranges.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
Click the button to clear the settings that were selected.

18-65
18
18.12.2NetWare
NetWare
This screen appears when you click [NetWare] on the [Network] tab. The
screen is used to enter and confirm various settings concerning NetWare.
When NetWare is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure
to enter parameters correctly.

NetWare Print
Frame Type
Mode
Pserver
Print Server Name
Print Server Password
Print Queue Scan Rate
Bindery/NDS
Bindery
Preferred File Server
NDS
Preferred NDS Context Name
Preferred NDS Tree Name
Nprinter/Rprinter
Printer Name
Printer Number
18-66

-
18
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
Click the button to clear the settings that were selected.
NetWare Status
This screen appears when you click [NetWare Status] under the [NetWare]
menu on the [Network] tab. This screen is used to confirm NetWare status.

18-67
18
18.12.3IPP
This screen appears when you click [IPP] on the [Network] tab. This screen
is used to enter and confirm settings concerning IPP.
When IPP Print is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure

IPP Print, Printer Name, Printer Location, Printer Information, Operations
Supported.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-68
18
18.12.4FTP
FTP Client
This screen appears when you click [FTP] on the [Network] tab, then click
[Client] under the [FTP] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm various settings concerning the FTP client.
When FTP Client is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure

FTP Client, Proxy Server Address, Proxy Server Port Number, FTP Server
Timeout, Port Number.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-69
18
FTP Server
This screen appears when you click [FTP] on the [Network] tab, then click
[Server] under the [FTP] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm various settings concerning the FTP server.
FTP Server:
Select enable or disable.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-70
18
18.12.5SNMP
This screen appears when you click [SNMP] on the [Network] tab. The screen
is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SNMP.
SNMP:
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-71
18
18.12.6SMB
SMB Scan
This screen appears when you click [SMB] on the [Network] tab, then click
[Scan] under the [SMB] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SMB scan.
SMB Scan:
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-72
18
Print
This screen appears when you click [Print] under the [SMB] menu. The
screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SMB printing.
When SMB Print is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure

SMB Print, NetBIOS Name, Print Service Name, Work Group.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-73
18
18.12.7Apple Talk
This screen appears when you click [Apple Talk] on the [Network] tab. The
screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning Apple Talk.
When Apple Talk is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure

Apple Talk, Printer Name, Zone Name.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-74
18
18.12.8E-Mail
E-Mail Receive (POP) Configuration
This screen appears when you click [E-Mail] on the [Network] tab, then click
[E-Mail Receive] under the [E-Mail] menu. The screen is used to enter and
confirm settings concerning receiving e-mail.
When E-Mail Receive is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make
sure to enter parameters correctly.

Receive, Receiving Server Address, User Name, Password, APOP Authentication, Connection Timeout, Port Number.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-75
18
E-Mail Send (SMTP) Configuration
This screen appears when you click [E-Mail] on the [Network] tab, then click
[E-Mail Send] under the [E-Mail] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning sending e-mail.
When E-Mail Send is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make
sure to enter parameters correctly.

Send, SMTP Server Address, Port Number, Connection Timeout, Max
Mail Size, SMTP Server Capacity, Administrator Mail Address, Authentication, POP Before SMTP, SMTP Authentication, User Name, Password,
Realm, Binary Division, Division Size.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-76
18
18.12.9SSL/TLS
This screen appears when you click [SSL/TLS] on the [Network] tab. The
screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SSL/TLS. You can
configure them separately depending whether or not certificates are installed.
Creating a self-signed certificate

18-77
18
Click [Setting].
The SSL/TLS Setting screen appears.
Check [Create a Self-Signed Certificate] and click [Next].
The Self-Signed Certificate Setting screen appears.
2
Note
Only [Create a Self-Signed Certificate], [Request a Certificate], and [Install a Certificate] can be selected.
If you click [Cancel], it will take you back to the SSL/TLS Setting screen.
Enter settings, and click [Create].

Following the screen indicating that the certificate is being created, another screen appears, saying, "The certificate has been created. SSL/
TLS can now be used."
Click [OK].
It will take you back to the SSL/TLS Information screen of the selfsigned certificate.
18-78
18
Requesting a certificate to install

18-79
18
18-80
18
Click [Setting].
Check [Request a Certificate] and click [Next].

The Request a Certificate screen appears.
2
Note
Only [Create a Self-Signed Certificate], [Request a Certificate], and [Install a Certificate] can be selected.
If you click [Cancel], it will take you back to the SSL/TLS Setting screen.
Enter necessary information, and click [Next].

Following the screen indicating that the certificate is being requested,
another screen appears indicating the request has been completed.
Click [OK].
The Certificate Signing Request Data screen appears.
Click [Save].
The file will be saved.
Click [OK].
It will take you back to the SSL/TLS Information screen.
Click [Setting].
Check [Install a Certificate], and click [Next].

The certificate installation screen appears.
Enter the data of the certificate that you requested.
10
Click [Next].
The Encryption Strength Setting and the Mode using SSL/TLS screen
appears.
11
Enter discretionary settings, and click [Create].

Creation results appear.

18-81
18
12
Click [OK].
18-82
18
Requesting a certificate to switch information

18-83
18
18-84
18
Click [Setting].
2
Note
Initially [Request a Certificate] is checked.

Remove an already installed certificate first before requesting a new one.
For details, refer to Removing a certificate on page 18-90.
Click [Next].
Enter necessary information, and click [Next].

Following the screen indicating that the certificate is being requested,
another screen appears indicating the request has been completed.
Click [OK].
The Certificate Signing Request Data screen appears.
Click [Save].
The file will be saved.
Click [OK].
Check [Install a Certificate], and click [Next].

The certificate installation screen appears.
Enter the data of the certificate that you requested.
Click [Next].
10
The Encryption Strength Setting and the Mode using SSL/TLS screen
appears.
11
Enter discretionary settings, and click [Create].

Creation results appear.
12
Click [OK].

18-85
18
Changing mode settings
Changing encryption strength setting
18-86
18
Click [Settings].
Check [Set a Encryption Strength], and click [Next].

The Encryption Strength Setting screen appears.
Select a discretionary value.
Click [Create].
The completion screen appears.
Click [OK].

18-87
18
Changing mode using SSL/TLS
18-88
18
Click [Settings].
Check [Mode using SSL/TLS], and click [Next].

The Mode using SSL/TLS screen appears.
Select a discretionary mode, and click [Create].

The completion screen appears.
Click [OK].

18-89
18
Removing a certificate
18-90
18
Click [Settings].
Check [Remove a Certificate], and click [Next].

The Remove a Certificate screen appears.
Click [Remove].
The removal confirmation screen appears.
Click [OK].

18-91
18
18.12.10Authentication
Auto Logout
This screen appears when you click [Authentication] on the [Network] tab.
The screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning logout time.

Admin Logout Time, User Logout Time.
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:
18-92
18
AP I/F
This screen appears when you click [AP I/F] on the [Network] tab. The screen
is used to enter and confirm settings concerning the AP I/F.

Port Number, Use SSL/TLS, Port Number (SSL/TLS).
[Apply] button:
[Clear] button:

18-93
18
18-94
19
Security
Security
Security
19
19
Security
The Control Software version is as follows.
(This software consists of Image control program and Controller control program.)
-
Image control program (Image Control l1) version: 11-0000, 13-0000,

21-0000, 30-0000, 40-0000
Controller control program (IP Controller Control P1) version: 10-0000,
11-0000, 20-0000
About the ROM version display function:

The bizhub PRO 1050/1050e Control Software (Image control program /
Controller control program) version mentioned above can be confirmed by
using the service representative (CE) service mode ROM version display
function.
When you display the ROM version, the Image control program and Controller control program versions will be displayed as follows.
-
Image control program (Image Control l1) version: 2 digits + 4 zeros following the hyphen (Ex: 11-0000)
Controller control program (IP Controller Control P1) version: 2 digits + 4
zeros following the hyphen (Ex: 10-0000)
Please keep this in mind when checking the software version.

Acknowledgements
- KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA
HOLDINGS, INC.
- PageScope and bizhub PRO are registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Copyright 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.
Exemption
- No part of this manual may be used or duplicated without permission.
- Manufacturer and Sales Company will have no liability for any influences
caused by using the printing system and this Operator Manual.
- The information written in this user manual is subject to change without
prior notice.

19-3
Security
19
19.1
Security Functions
The bizhub PRO 1050/1050e device has two security modes.
Normal mode
Use this mode if the machine is used by a single person and there is a low
possibility of illicit access and operations. This is the default mode when
shipped from the factory. To use regular mode, please see the Operator
Manual for each individual machine.
Security Strengthen mode
Use this mode if the machine is connected to a local area network, or to external networks through a telephone line or other means. A machine manager
manages the device according to this Operator Manual, so that users can
have a safe operating environment.
Your machine manager is the only one who can turn the Security Strengthen
mode ON and OFF, and make other changes, and your service representative will designate an machine manager.
To turn the Security Strengthen mode ON, the service representative should
set a CE authentication password and Machine Manager password for the
device.
The Security strengthen mode cannot be turned ON when the Machine NIC
is activated. Please contact your service representative when using the Security Strengthen mode.
Security Strengthen mode is recommended to prevent data from being accessed or tampered with.
Ask your machine manager if the Security Strengthen mode is turned ON.
19-4
Security
19
19.1.1 Environments in which Security Strengthen mode is recommended

-
The device is connected to an local network, the Internet through a firewall, or the external telephone line for maintenance.
The device is monitored by a telephone line or a network.
19.1.2 Creating a secure environment

For security, we recommend that supervisors and a machine manager use
Security Strengthen mode and establish an environment as follows.
- Where to set up the device
Set up the device in a place where only designated personnel can operate it.
- User training
The machine manager must provide training and information to users to
maintain the security of the device. Users should keep passwords set up
by the machine manager, and a password that they set up on their own
in a secure place.
The machine manager is supposed to give the instructions for releaning
the authentication function to a user when creating a Box for that user,
therefore the user should perform to release the authentication function
when machine operation is completed.
- Qualifications to be a machine manager
A supervisor must select a reliable person who has adequate knowledge,
technical ability, and experience as a machine manager, to whom to delegate administration of the device.
- Guarantee of service representative (CE)
A supervisor or a machine manager can use Security Strengthen mode
after confirming that a service contract was signed with the service representative (CE). Clearly state in the service contract that the service representative will not engage in any fraudulent actions.
- Secure LAN
We recommend that you use an apparatus such as WEP code (802.11x)
to prevent tapping during communication when setting up a local area
network.

19-5
Security
19
19.2
Security Strengthen Mode
19.2.1 Description of Security Strengthen mode

The following items will have enhanced security.
Protect and delete used data in memory and on the HDD
- There are two kinds of image data that will be saved in memory and on
the HDD: AHA compressed data and uncompressed data (TIFF and PDF
formats). Memory and HDD areas containing the AHA compressed data
is freed up when data is deleted. However in normal mode data is not
completely deleted so it could be read through illicit means. In the Security Strengthen mode, data will be completely cleared before freeing up
image areas.
- Regardless of the data type (compressed or uncompressed), the image
area in memory and on the HDD where the data has been saved will be
freed up after it is completely overwritten by the data disrelated to the image data.
Enhanced password
- The password is made up of 8 to 64 alphanumerical characters (case
sensitive).
- If a wrong password is entered, attempts to re-try cannot be made for five
seconds.
Access to the Box with a password
- Set up a system that requires users to input an enhanced password as
described above, to save data or to print data saved in the Box on the
HDD.
- If an enhanced password is set up as above, security will be improved
when saving scanned data in the Box. No one other than the machine
manager can delete the Box or Personal Folder in which scanned data is
saved, and changing the Box's attributes requires authentication with the
enhanced password. In addition, authentication will be required to use
scanned data saved in the Box.
Machine NIC setting
- When the Security Strengthen mode is ON, the Machine NIC cannot be
used.
External access prohibited
- No access is allowed over telephone lines other than CS Remote Care.
19-6
Security
19
Create, save and analyze an audit log
- A history of security function operations will be created and saved. Date
and time, information identifying the person who made the operation, details of the operation, and results of the operation will be saved, enabling
analysis of unauthorized access. This log will be overwritten if the audit
area is depleted.
Machine Manager authentication
- A service representative will set up an authentication data for a machine
manager.
- The machine manager must input a password to gain authorized access.
Only one authentication string can be registered per machine.
Machine Manager Setting mode
- If the Machine Manager Setting mode has been entered by successful
Manager authentication, the setting change of various machine functions
will be available on the machine.
- Be sure to exit the Machine Manager Setting mode if you leave in front of
the machine while using the Machine Manager Setting mode.
19.2.2 Data protected by Security Strengthen mode

Data protected by Security Strengthen mode (for users) is as follows.
-
Data saved in the Personal Folder (with a password)
The following data administered by the machine manager will also receive
enhanced protection.
- User data
- Data controlling the machine
19.2.3 Data that is not protected in Security Strengthen mode

When the machine is connected to PCs on a local network, passwords input
in PCs are not subject to Security Strengthen mode.
To turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF
The machine manager can turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF.
If Security Strengthen mode is OFF, data can potentially be accessed, so be
careful.
If data is accessed in Security Strengthen mode, the machine manager may
not notice until he/she analyzes the audit log. Be careful when the machine
manager is absent for a long time.

19-7
Security
19
19.3
Protect and Delete Data After Use

Data from each mode (copy / scan / printer) will be temporarily saved in
memory or on the HDD, and it will be deleted unless it is moved to a Box.
Data is compressed using a special method, so it cannot be decompressed
externally.
When deleting compressed data, a part of it will be destroyed or overwritten
to prevent decompression.
- Data saved temporarily in memory will be overwritten by unavailable data
(NA) when the job is interrupted or ended.
- Data saved in several areas of memory will be overwritten simultaneously.
- Data in the Box will be overwritten when a delete order is issued.
- If data is sent externally, it will be overwritten when the transmission is
complete.
- If the machine manager issues a delete order for each Box, it will be overwritten.
19-8
Security
19.4
19
User Authentication in Security Strengthen Mode
In Security Strengthen mode, setting up password conditions will be tougher
to improve security. The machine manager should set up a user name and
password required for user authentication, as this is a machine manager operation.
-
User Name:
1 to 64 alphanumerical characters
Password:
8 to 64 alphanumerical characters (case sensitive)
If a wrong password is entered, attempts to re-try cannot be made for five

seconds.
2
Reminder
Do not use your name, birthday, employee number, etc. for a password
that others can easily figure out.
If a password set in normal mode is fewer than 8 characters or more than 64
characters, you cannot use it in Security Strengthen mode.
If this happens, contact the machine manager to turn OFF Security Strengthen mode, and set a new password following the above conditions.
Even after a successful access has been made, authentication with user
name and password will be required under the following conditions.
- The main power switch is turned off.
- The sub power switch is turned off.
- Data output operation is complete in a Box.
- The [Power Save] on the control panel is pressed on the control panel for
one second or longer.
- The auto reset/auto shutoff function operates.
!
Details
When a user accesses a Box for which a password has been set in the
HDD, all authentication operations with password will be saved in an audit log.
Initially, the user authentication is not available on the machine. To activate this function, the distribution number for each section should be
changed.

19-9
Security
19
19.4.1 To register a new user
Follow the procedure below to setup a user name and password to be required for user authentication in Security Strengthen mode.
Procedure
Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility Screen.

The Input Password Screen will be displayed.
Enter the password.
Use the touch panel keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine Manager
password, then touch [OK]. The Machine Manager Setting Menu
Screen will be displayed.
19-10
Security
19
!
Details
Passwords are case sensitive.

If a wrong password or fewer than 8 alphanumerical characters are entered and the [OK] key is touched, the warning message "Password does
not match" will appear, and no key will work for five seconds. Enter the
right password after five seconds.
If authentication fails, the information will be saved in the audit log.
Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track].
Touch [03 User Authentication Set].
The User Authentication Setting Screen will be displayed.

19-11
Security
19
6
Touch [Add] to display the User Registration Screen.
Touch [User No.], [User Name], [Password], or [Belong Section] to display each subsequent screen, then make the desired setting.
19-12
Security
19
To enter the User No.:
Touch [User No.] on the User Registration Screen.

Use the touch panel keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired user number.
Touch [OK] to return to the User Registration Screen.
To enter the User Name:
Touch [User Name] on the User Registration Screen.

Enter the desired user name from the touch panel keypad.

19-13
Security
19
To enter the Password:
Touch [Password] on the User Registration Screen.

Enter the desired password from the touch panel keypad.
To enter the Section:
Touch [Belong Section] on the User Registration Screen.

Touch the desired section key to highlight it.
Touch [OK].
When settings are completed, touch [OK] on the User Registration
Screen.
The User Authentication Setting Screen will be restored.
19-14
Security
19
19.4.2 To change user data

Follow the procedure below to change a user name and password once registered.
Procedure
Touch [06 Machine Manager Setting]. The Input Password Screen will
be displayed.
Enter the password.

19-15
Security
19
!
Details

19-16
Security
19
6
Touch the user name to be changed, then touch [Change].
The Change Registered User Screen will be displayed.
Touch [User Name], [Password], or [Belong Section] to display each

subsequent screen, then make the desired setting change.

19-17
Security
19
To change the User Name:
Touch [User Name] on the User Registration Screen.

Enter the desired user name from the touch panel keypad.
Touch [OK] to return to the Change Registered User Screen.
To change the Password:
Touch [Password] on the User Registration Screen.

Enter the desired password from the touch panel keypad.
2
Note
The current password cannot be used again.
19-18
Security
19
To change the Section:
Touch [Belong Section] on the User Registration Screen.

Touch the desired section key to highlight it.
Touch [OK].
When settings are completed, touch [OK] on the Change Registered
User Screen.
The User Authentication Setting Screen will be restored.

19-19
Security
19
19.4.3 To delete a user
Follow the procedure below to delete a user name, password, and also Personal Folder.
Procedure

Enter the password.
Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine Manager
19-20
Security
19
!
Details


19-21
Security
19
6
Touch the user name to be deleted. The selected key will be highlighted.
Touch [Delete].
The popup menu will be displayed to confirm that the selected user will
be deleted.
Touch [Yes] to delete the selected user name, password, and also the
Personal Folder that belongs to the deleted user.
19-22
Security
19
19.4.4 To change password by user

General users can change the password that has already been set for user
authentication.
We recommend that a user himself/herself changes the password assigned
by the machine manager for security.
Procedure
Touch [01 System Setting].

The System Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

19-23
Security
19
3
Touch [07 Change User Password].

The User Authentication Screen will be displayed.
Touch [User Name], then enter your user name.

The entered name will be displayed on the screen.
Touch [Password], then enter your current password.

The entered password will appear as asterisks (********) on the screen.
!
Details

When user authentication is completed successfully, the Change User
Password Screen will be displayed.
19-24
Security
19
6
Touch [New Password], enter your new password, then touch [OK].
2
Reminder
Enter the new password again for confirmation.

Touch [Check Input], then enter your new password once more. Touch
[OK].
Touch [OK].
The System Setting Menu Screen will be restored.
!
Details
If password setup doesnt proceed successfully, the information will be

saved in the audit log.
The password currently used cannot be entered as a new password.
Touch [Exit].

19-25
Security
19
19.5
HDD Store Function in Security Strengthen Mode

A Box built on the HDD is used to store the scanned data. To prevent the
data from being accessed or tampered with, we recommend using the Box
with a password specified.
Never fail to use the Security Strengthen mode when storing any secret document. If the Security Strengthen mode is turned off temporarily for some
reason, the machine manager should tell that to all users.
For details to store and output the scanned data in a box, see the user manual of Network Scanner.
19.5.1 Store the data in a box while copying

The following is a detailed explanation of how to access a Box in Security
Strengthen mode for which a user name and password have been set.
Procedure
On the User Authentication Screen, touch [User Name] and [Password]

to enter your user name and password.
Touch [User Name] to display the Input User Name Screen.

Enter the user name, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authentication Screen.
19-26
Security
19
Touch [Password] to display the Input Password Screen.

Enter the password, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authentication Screen.
!
Details


19-27
Security
19
2
Touch [OK].
Touch [HDD Store] on the Output Application Screen.
The HDD Box List Screen will be displayed.
19-28
Security
19
Select the desired personal Box.

Enter the password if selected Box requires one.
The File Selection Screen will be displayed.
Touch [Store].
The Input File Name Screen will be displayed.

19-29
Security
19
7
Enter the file name, then touch [OK].
Press [Start] on the control panel to scan.

After scanning all the originals, the machine automatically starts to print
and store the data in a Box.
When operation is completed, press [Access] on the control panel.

The User Authentication Screen will be displayed to prohibit the machine operation without entering a user name and password.
19-30
Security
19
19.5.2 Store scanned data in a box

The following is a detailed explanation of how to save scanned data to a Box
and also to output the data in Security Strengthen mode.
Procedure




19-31
Security
19
!
Details

Touch [OK].
19-32
Security
19
3
Touch [STORE] or [RECALL].
If you touch [STORE], then touch [Scanner to HDD].



19-33
Security
19
6
Touch [Store], then enter.
Enter the file name, then touch [OK].
The Scanner Basic Screen will be displayed.
19-34
Security
19
8
Make the desired setting, then press [Start] on the control panel to scan
and store the image data.
When operation is competed, press [Access] on the control panel.

The User Authentication Screen will be displayed to prohibit the machine operations without entering a user name and password.

19-35
Security
19
19.5.3 Recall/Delete data in a box
The following is a detailed explanation of how to recall or delete the data

stored in a box.
Procedure
On the User Authentication Screen, touch [User Name] and {Password]


19-36
Security
19
-

!
Details


19-37
Security
19
2
Touch [OK].
Touch [RECALL].

19-38
Security
19
5
Recall or Delete the image data.
To recall the image data

-
Touch the desired file key, then touch [>>>].

To output the image data, touch [Wait Output], [Proof Output], or
[Auto Output], as desired, and then touch [OK].
Specify the output page.
Touch [Output Page.]
To output one desired page only, [Touch Page Select], press the
control panel keypad, then touch [OK].
To output all pages, touch [All Pages], then touch [OK].

19-39
Security
19
Enter the desired print quantity from the touch panel keypad, then
touch [OK].
To delete the image data

-
Touch the desired file key, then touch [File Delete].
The popup menu to confirm will be displayed.

- Touch [Yes].
The selected file will be deleted, and return to the File Selection Screen.

19-40
Security
19
19.5.4 Output data in the Secure Box

Secure printing using a PC:
To set up data output using the secure printing function on PC, a secure folder with a specific password must be prepared. Enter the secure folder name
made up of max. 8 alphanumerical characters.
Outputting secure printing on the machine:



19-41
Security
19
-

!
Details

19-42
Security
19
2
Touch [OK].
Touch [RECALL].

19-43
Security
19
4
Touch [Secure Folder] to display the Secure Box List Screen.
Select the desired secure box.
Enter the secure password setup in secure printing.

Touch [OK].
The Secure File List Screen will be displayed.
Select the desired secure file.
19-44
Security
19
Secure printing will start.

-
Touch [Wait Output], [Proof Output], or [Auto Output] as desired.


19-45
Security
19
19.6
Machine Manager Security Functions

The machine manager turns Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF.
To do so, an 8-digit CE authentication password and Machine Manager
password must be set for the machine. Ask your authorized service representative to set up a Machine Manager password. To change this password,
the machine manager himself should operate the procedure.
To protect data in the machine from access and tampering, it is recommended to designate a machine manager and use Security Strengthen mode.
19.6.1 Turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF

The following is an explanation of how to turn Security Strengthen mode ON/
OFF.
Procedure

19-46
Security
19
3
Enter the password.
password, then touch [OK].
The Machine Manager Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.
!
Details


19-47
Security
19
4
Touch [07 Security Setting].
Touch [03 Security Strengthen Mode].
19-48
Security
19
6
Turn Security Strengthen mode ON or OFF.

If you want to turn Security Strengthen mode ON, touch [On] to highlight it. If you want to turn it OFF, touch [Off] to highlight it.
Touch [OK].
The Restart Confirmation popup screen will appear.
Touch [Yes].
The machine will restart and the new setting will be activated.

19-49
Security
19
19.6.2 HDD lock password
While the Security Strengthen mode is turned ON, a lock password (8 to 32

alphanumerical characters, case sensitive) can be set up on the HDD to protect the data stored on it.
If the HDD itself is externally accessed, the data readout will not be available
until the correct lock password is entered.
!
Details
The HDD lock password functions only when the Security Strengthen
mode is ON. When turned OFF, the message Please set Security
Strengthen mode will be displayed.
Procedure

19-50
Security
19
3
Enter the password.
!
Details


19-51
Security
19
4
Touch [07 Security Setting].
Touch [02 HDD Management Setting].
The HDD Management Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.
19-52
Security
19
6
Touch [03 Change HDD Lock Password].

The Change HDD Lock Password Screen will be displayed.
Touch [Current Password] to enter the password currently used, then

touch [OK]. (The first password: 9-digit alphanumeric serial number of
the main body)
!
Details
The main body serial number will be printed at the upper right corner of
the audit log. For details, see the next section Print audit log and Analyze audit log on page 19-58 for the sample log.

19-53
Security
19
8
If authentication is succeeded, touch [New Password] to enter the new

password. The key will not be active until authentication is succeeded.
2
Reminder
!
Details

The current password cannot be used again as a new password.
Touch [Check Input] to re-enter the same password as above.

10
Touch [OK].
19-54
Security
19
19.6.3 Print audit log

An audit log will be automatically created when the data saved in the machine have been accessed.
All the audit log data can be output as follows.
Procedure

Enter the password.

19-55
Security
19
!
Details

If a wrong password or fewer than 8 alphanumerical characters are entered and the OK key is touched, the warning message "Password does
Touch [01 System Setting].
19-56
Security
19
5
Touch [04 Management List Print].

The Management List Print Screen will be displayed.
Touch [Audit Log Report], then touch [COPY].
!
Details
To stop printing, press [Stop] on the control panel, then touch [Cancel] on
the confirmation popup screen.

19-57
Security
19
19.6.4 Analyze audit log
Audit logs need to be analyzed by the machine manager regularly (once per
month) or when unauthorized access and tampering of data saved in the machine in Security Strengthen mode is noticed.
The machine is supposed to store up 750 logs per month.
If more than 750 logs are assumed to be stored in a month, carry out the
analysis in a shorter period before the unanalyzed logs reach that number.
19-58
Security
19
Audit Log Information
The audit log contains the following information.
1. date/time:
date and time when an operation was made that results in the creation of
a log entry.
2. id:
the person who made the operation or who is subject to security protection can be specified.
"-1": Operation by CE (service representative).
"-2": Operation by the machine manager.
"-3": Operation by the unregistered user.
Other integer: Indicates subjects for security protection, and the following action IDs narrow down the subject for protection.
User ID (1 to 1000 numerical symbols)
Secure User ID (1 to 99999 numerical symbols)
3. action:
Used to specify the operation.
Check details of operation that action indicates in the following table.
4. result:
Result of an operation.
For password authentication, success or failure will be indicated as OK
and NG.
For operations without password authentication, all log entries will be indicated as OK.

19-59
Security
19
Table of items saved in audit log
No.
Operation
ID
Stored action
Result
CE authentication
CE ID
01
OK/NG
Manager authentication
Machine Manager ID
02
OK/NG
Set/change Security
Strengthen mode
Machine Manager ID
03
OK
Print audit log
Machine Manager ID
04
OK
Change/register CE password
CE ID
05
OK
Change/register Machine
Manager password
CE ID/ Machine
Manager ID
06
OK
Create user by Machine

Manager
User ID
07
OK
Change/register user password by Machine Manager
User ID
08
OK
Delete user by Machine

Manager
User ID
09
OK
10
Change attributes of user by

Machine Manager
User ID
10
OK
11
Password authentication for

user
User ID/ Unregistered user ID
11
OK/NG
12
Change attributes of user by

user (user password, etc.)
User ID
12
OK
13
Access to file (document

data readout)
User ID
13
OK
14
Delete file (document data

deletion)
User ID
14
OK
15
Change attribute of file
User ID
15
OK
16
Password authentication for

secure printing
Secure user ID
16
OK/NG
/ Unregistered
user ID
17
Access to secure print file
Secure user ID
17
OK
18
Delete secure print file
Secure user ID
18
OK
19
Change HDD lock password
Machine Manager ID
19
OK
19-60
Security
19
The purpose of analyzing the audit log is to understand the following and implement countermeasures:
-
Whether or not data was accessed or tampered with

Subject of attack
Details of attack
Results of attack
For specific analysis methods, see the next page.

Specify unauthorized actions: password authentication
If logs have NG as the result of password authentication (action: 01, 02, 11,
16), items protected by passwords may have been attacked.
- Failed password authentication (NG) log entries specify who made the
operation, and show if unauthorized actions were made when password
authentication failed.
- Even if password authentication succeeded (OK), it shows whether a legitimate user created the action. You need to check carefully when successful authentication occurs after series of failures especially during
times other than normal operating hours.

19-61
Security
19
Specify unauthorized actions: actions other than password authentication under security
All operation results other than password authentication will be indicated as
successful (OK), so determine if there were any unauthorized actions by ID
and action.
- Since you cannot specify what was attacked only with an ID, you need to
see the action and the table on the previous page to determine whether
unauthorized actions were made on a personal box or secure box.
- Check the time, and see if the user who operated the specific subject
made any unauthorized actions.
Example
If a document saved in a box was printed using fraudulent authorization, the
following audit log entry will be created.
1.
Password authentication for the box:

Action = 11
ID = Box that authentication was made
Result = OK/NG
2.
Access to the document in the box:

Action = 13
ID = Box that authentication was made
Check the date and time the above operation occurred, and see if the operation on the document in the personal box or secure box was made by a legitimate box user.
Actions to take if unauthorized operations are found
- If it's found that a password has been leaked after analyzing the audit log,
change the password immediately.
- It's possible that a password may have been tampered with and legitimate users cannot access a box. The machine manager must contact the
user to confirm the situation, and if that's the case, the machine manager
must change the password and delete the data saved in the box.
- If you cannot find documents that should be in a box or if you find a document with changed content, unauthorized actions may have occurred.
Similar countermeasures are needed.
19-62
20
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
20
Troubleshooting
20.1
If Please Call Service Message Is Displayed
20
A Please Call Service message indicates a machine condition that requires

the attention of your service representative.
The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile
numbers of your service representative.
7 CAUTION
%
When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to contact your
service representative immediately by following the procedure below.
Make note of the report code number indicated in the second line of
the message area.
!
Details
The machine manager can call for service using the Utility setting. For details, 01 User Call on page 17-141
In this case, you dont have to make a call for the report code, because
your machine has been monitored automatically by your service representative.
After calling for service using the Utility setting, be sure to turn OFF the
power immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.
20-3
Troubleshooting
20
2
Turn OFF the sub power switch and main power switch.
Unplug the machine.
Contact your service representative and report the condition and report
code number.
!
Details
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble

If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen,
you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this
limited functionality of the copier, consult your service representative. Be
sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.
1. If the limited use of the copier is available, the following message is displayed in the message area instead of the report code.
ex.
-- Tray 2 failure -Press Reset to select except this tray
2. Press [Reset].
Make note of the report code.
Please switch Off/On
E 18-2
3. Turn OFF then ON the sub power switch.

A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of the machine (ex. Tray 2).
7 CAUTION
%
EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE

OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN IS
DISPLAYED.
20-4
Troubleshooting
20.2
20
Clearing Mishandled Paper

When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine stops making copies and the
Jam Position Screen displays to indicate misfeed area(s).
The [Start] LED turns red on the control panel, and copying operation cannot
be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared.
No.
Part name
Description
Message area
An action will be displayed.
Paper jam position

display
Numbers flashing or lighting indicate the jammed positions.
Illustration key
Touch to display the subsequent screens for the disposal

action.
All the misfeed locations will be indicated by flashing/lighting numbers and

arrows on this screen. Flashing number and arrow indicate the jammed position of the highest priority.
Action to remove mishandled paper is displayed in the message area, and
touching [Illustration] will display subsequent screens for the disposal action.
Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.
!
Details
A jam code can be displayed in the message area of the Jam Position
Screen. Contact your service representative, if desired.

20-5
Troubleshooting
20
1
Touch Illustration on the screen.

The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.
!
Details
Touch [Next] to go to the next page of a series of illustrations, if provided.

Touch [Jam Position] to return to the Jam Position Screen.
If paper misfeed occurs in the Perfect Binder PB-501, the Illustration key
is not displayed. Open the front door of the Perfect Binder, then check
the jam positon by the Jam positon display.
Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine.
Do not touch or damage the drum surface.
2
Reminder
Before performing the clearing procedure, refer to Caution Labels and

Indicators on page 1-13.
When completed, the Machine Status Screen will be restored.

If any misfeed location is left, the Jam Position Screen will be restored
with the next disposal procedure in the message area and the location
number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to 2 until all the locations are cleared.
20-6
Troubleshooting
20
7 CAUTION
%
The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT
TOUCH.
Be especially careful not to put your hand into the fixing unit area when
withdrawing the fixing conveyance unit to remove mishandled paper.
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to
get injured.
7 CAUTION
%
The internal paste tank unit is very hot. Toavoid getting burned, DO
NOT TOUCH.
Be especially careful when pushing back in the paste tank unit which
has moved and halted in the front side due to the machine trouble.
Do not hold the front side but the far right side in order to return the
paste tank unit to its original position.

20-7
Troubleshooting
20
20.3
If MACHINE Tab Blinks in Orange

If any trouble occurs in the machine, one of the following messages will be
displayed in the message area and the [MACHINE] tab will blink in orange.
- Paper Misfeed: Mishandled paper
- Tray Empty: Please load ## paper
- Inconformity in Paper Presetting: Please set paper size and type setting, Please set reserved size paper, Please load designated paper in
Tray
With the above message, the [Detail Check] key will be displayed on the Machine Status Screen.
Touch [Detail Check], and follow the instruction on the screen.
20.3.1 Paper Misfeed

If a paper misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you are
setting a reserve job, the machine stops operation and the [MACHINE] tab
may blink in orange.
If the Jam Position Screen is displayed after touching [Detail Check], follow
the procedure Clearing Mishandled Paper on page 20-5 to remove mishandled paper.
20-8
Troubleshooting
20
20.3.2 Tray Empty

If the popup screen shown below is displayed after touching [Detail Check],
the selected tray has become empty.
Follow the procedure below to change the tray selection for the current job,
or supply the empty tray with copy paper.
To change the tray selection
Touch the desired tray key.
Touch [OK] to restore the Machine Status Screen.
Press [Start].
Copy paper will be delivered from newly selected tray to continue the
printing operation.

20-9
Troubleshooting
20
To supply the empty tray with paper
Load paper in the empty tray.

For details, refer to Loading Paper on page 4-3.
Touch [Close] to restore the Machine Status Screen.
Press [Start].
Printing operation will resume using the tray supplied with paper.
20-10
Troubleshooting
20
20.3.3 Inconformity in Paper Presetting

The machine automatically stops when copy paper in the selected tray
should be replaced according to the paper presetting specified in reserve
setting, and displays either of the following popup screens.
Follow the procedure for each to continue the machine operation.
Using Custom size/Wide size/Tabbed standard size paper of different
size or in different condition
Replace paper in the tray with that specified in the paper presetting, then
touch [Change].
Press [Start] to start the printing operation.

20-11
Troubleshooting
20
Using Standard size paper of different size
Replace paper in the tray with that specified in the paper presetting.
Touch [Change], then press [Start] to start the printing operation.
!
Details
If wrong size is loaded in the tray, the above popup screen will be displayed. Replace with the correct size, then touch [Close].
20-12
Troubleshooting
20.4
20
If Memory Full Message Is Displayed (Memory

Overflow)
In certain modes, this machine uses memory to make operations convenient
and smooth flowing.
Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected, and the machine will stop its operation with the following popup screen displayed.
Touch [Stop].
All the scanned data will be cleared to terminate the job.

20-13
Troubleshooting
20
20.5
If Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed

When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, Please switch
Off/On will be displayed in the message area.
Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.
Turn OFF the sub power switch.
Turn OFF the main power switch.
Wait about 10 seconds.
Turn ON the main power switch and

sub power switch.
20-14
Troubleshooting
20.6
20
Troubleshooting Tips
Copier does not operate when sub power switch is on
- Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.
- Check to be sure main power switch is ON.
- Check to see if Weekly Timer function is activated. See When Weekly
Timer Is Activated on page 2-30 for details.
- Check to see if User Authentication is required on the screen. See Making User Authentication on page 2-33 for details.
Copy image is too light
- Manually adjust copy density to darker density.
- Check toner message and add toner, if required.
- Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity
is high.
- Check to see if Photo, Text, or Low Contrast mode is required.
- Check the Density shift.
Copy image is too dark
- Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.
- Check to see if Photo, Text, or Low Contrast mode is required.
- Check the Density shift.
Copy image is not clean or shows spots
- Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.
- Keep original glass and inner surface of document feeder clean.
- Call for service if Please call service is displayed in the message area.
- Check density indicator and lighten if required.
Copy paper mishandles during copying
- Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray capacity.
Magnification cannot be changed
- Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification.
- Press [Reset] and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce
& Shift.
Duplex modes cannot be selected
Fully close ADF, then select the desired duplex mode again.

20-15
Troubleshooting
20
Copying does not begin after pressing [Start]

- Close Front door and left side door of main body.
- Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected.
- Be sure the print quantity is entered.
- Close Finisher door/Folding unit door/Large capacity stacker door completely.
Copying does not resume after mishandled paper is removed
Check copier diagram on touch panel for additional indications of mishandled paper.
Copy quality is poor
- Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary.
- Contact your service representative.
Using user authentication, copies cannot be made after password is entered
- Check to see if the message Copy limit reached is displayed.
- Contact the machine manager to reset limit.
The original paper is mishandled or skewed in the document feeder
- Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.
- Be sure originals are not stapled.
- Align originals evenly in the ADF.
- Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals.
ADF cannot be used after [Reset] is pressed
- Fully close ADF.
- Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.
- Position originals properly in the ADF.
- Set to use ADF in the Initial Setting.
Finisher/Folding unit does not operate
- Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required.
- Properly close finisher door/Folding unit door.
Add toner message is displayed
New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.
Call for PM is displayed in message area
Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.
20-16
Troubleshooting
20
APS selects the wrong paper size

Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.
In mixed original mode, a message to load a required paper size displays, even though that size is loaded in one of the trays
Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size;
otherwise, the tray key on the Copy Screen will blink.
The copy screen does not display settings as described in Operator
Manual
Check with the machine manager, as Initial Settings may have been
changed.
Please check original
- This message appears when the copier detects a non-standard paper
size on the original glass.
- Select paper size and press [Start]. 1.000 magnification will be selected
automatically.
- If this message continues to be displayed after selecting paper size, select 1.000 magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [Start].
If desired, ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1.000 magnification in this situation.
Sheet insertion result is not as expected
- Blank insertion:
Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the
locations designated for sheet insertion.
- Print insertion:
To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right
hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the
page setting screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an
even numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of
that page, so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd.
Finisher staple result is not as expected
- The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait style).
- Check to see if Rotation functions. Release it, if necessary.

20-17
Troubleshooting
20
Copies skew in the stapled sets

- Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the
copy paper upside down.
- Check to see if large-sized copies meet the secondary (sub) tray when
fully output before being stapled. Release the lock of the secondary (sub)
tray, then slightly lift it upward.
Using punch, copies cannot be punched
- Check to see if the Punch Dust indicator lights in red on the Machine Status Screen.
- Empty the trash basket.
Copies cannot be stapled or punched in position
Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy
paper in the paper tray to be used.
Using trimming, copiers cannot be trimmed
- Check to see if the Trim Dust indicator lights in red on the Machine Status
Screen.
Empty the dust box of saddle stitch, or contact the machine manager.
Usint Perfect binding, copies cannot be bound
- Check to see if the front door of perfect binder, perfect binder tray cover
or paste hopper cover is open.
Securely close the front door/perfect binder tray cover/paste hopper cover.
20-18
21
Maintenance
Maintenance
21
Maintenance
21.1
Cleaning Image Scanning Section
21
In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas
clean.
21.1.1 Cleaning the ADF Scanning Glass

Keep the ADF scanning glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies.
Raise the document feeder, then clean the
glass with a clean soft cloth.
21.1.2 Cleaning the Original Glass

Raise the document feeder, then clean the original glass with a clean soft
cloth.
The glass may also clean with a soft cloth
dampened slightly with water, if it is difficult to clean.
2
Reminder
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the original
glass.

21-3
Maintenance
21
21.1.3 Cleaning the ADF Guide Cover
The ADF guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied or the original size cannot be detected correctly.
Raise the document feeder, then clean the
ADF guide cover with a clean soft cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the ADF
guide cover.
21-4
Maintenance
21.2
21
Precautions for Paste Pellets and the Perfect Binder

To ensure safety and product reliability, observe the precautions for using
paste pellets and the Perfect Binder. Read chapter 1 Safety Information as
well.
Precautions for Paste Pellets
- Paste pellets are not edible; do not put them in your mouth nor swallow
them.
- Keep paste pellets out of reach of children.
- Store paste pellets in dark, cool indoors at temperature between 5 and
35 degrees Celsius, avoiding direct sunlight or exposure to water.
- Paste pellets may become degraded by such products as common oils,
organic solvents, solvents used in ink formulations, or volatile fragrances.
Such degradation may cause deterioration in adhesiveness, resulting in
poor binding performance.
Precautions for Perfect Binder
- Use only the paste GC-501 for this binder.
- Handle melted hot paste only with great care.
- If you need to clean or replace melted hot paste, contact your service
representa-tive.
- In order to prevent degradation of paste owing to heating, ensure that the
machine is turned off when it is not in use. It is recommended that you
adjust the time settings for the low power mode and shut-off mode of the
main body to suit the usage of the Perfect Binder, since then apply to the
binder as well.
- Do not overload the paste hopper with paste pellets.
- Do not touch the lever in the paste hopper with your hand to avoid breakdown.

21-5
Maintenance
21
21.3
Checking Copy Count

The Utility Menu Screen allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list.
- Total count
- Feed paper count
- Output paper count
- Printer total count
- Copier total count
- Scanner total count
- PM count, cycle, counter start date
- Developer count, cycle, counter start date
- Drum count, cycle, counter start date
Check the list, then print it from the Copy Screen, if desired.
!
Details
Machine can be set to display the Utility Menu Screen available for displaying and editing the CMS part count list (part name, P/N, limit), and
also resetting the count. For details, please contact your service representative.
Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel.
The Utility Menu Screen will be displayed.
21-6
Maintenance
21
!
Details
The Utility Menu Screen can be displayed even when the job operation is
in progress.
The counter information will be displayed on the left side of the screen.
Touching [Exit] will return to the previous screen.
Touch [Detail].
The PM count, Developer count, and Drum count will be displayed.
Touching [Exit] will exit the Utility mode and restore the previous
screen.

21-7
Maintenance
21
!
Details
The Developer count and Drum count can be selected to indicate either
the cycle count or runtime count. Contact your service representative, if
desired.
Print the counter list, if desired.

-
Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen.

Select the desired paper size, then press [Start].
After the Counter list is printed out, the Utility mode will be released
automatically and the previous screen will be restored.
21-8
Maintenance
21.4
21
Preventive Maintenance
After a set number of copies (750,000 copies) have been made on your machine, Preventive Maintenance (PM) will be required for maintaining optimal
performance.
When preventive maintenance is due, a
message and the PM icon will prompt you
to contact your service representative for
maintenance.
!
Details
The machine manager can call for service using the Utility setting. For details, refer to 01 User Call on page 17-141.
In this case, you dont have to make a call for preventive maintenance,
because your machine has been monitored automatically by your service
representative.

21-9
21
21-10
Maintenance
22
Machine Specifications
22
22
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
22.1
Main Body Specifications
22.1.1 Main Body

Specifications
Name
Type
Console type
Transfer method
Indirect electrostatic method
Original glass
Fixed
Light-sensitive unit
OPC
Light source
Xenon lamp
Developing method
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing
Fixing method
Heat roller
Density adjustment
Automatic and manual (9 steps)
Magnification ratio
1:1 1.0%
Enlargement:
1:1.154 (115.4%), 1:1.224 (122.4%), 1:1.414 (141.4%),
1:2.000 (200%)
Reduction:
1:0.866 (86.6%), 1:0.816 (81.6%), 1:0.707 (70.7%), 1:0.500
(50%)
Zoom/Special ratio magnification ratio:
25% to 400% in 0.1% increments
2
Plain/Recycled paper: 60 to 90 g/m
2
Thick paper: 91 to 300 g/m
2
Thin paper: 40 to 59 g/m
Special paper: OHP, Tab, 4-hole, Coated
Copy paper
* Ink-jet paper is unavailable.

Copying speed
105 copies/min. (A4), 82 copies/min. (A4R),

105 copies/min. (B5), 92 copies/min. (B5R),
61 copies/min. (A3), 69 copies/min. (B4)
Continuous copying
1 to 9,999 copies
Types of original
Sheet, book originals
Original size
A3 or 280 mm x 432 mm maximum

22-3
22
Specifications
Paper size
Standard size:
A3 to B6R size (image cutoff width: leading and trailing
ends 2 mm 2 mm, top and bottom 1.5 mm 1.5 mm)
Wide size and non-standard size:
Max. 324 mm x 460 mm
Paper supply method
* Full-Image Area function is not provided on this machine.

2
Tray 1, 2 (universal); 1,500 sheets (80 g/m )
Tray 3, 4, 5 (universal); 2.000 sheets (80g/m) (PF-701 option)
Warm-up time
Approx. 6 minutes @20C; 50%RH
First copy time
Approx. 3.0 seconds (A4)
Power
AC 230V / 15A; 50Hz (This equipment selects the correct voltage automatically.)
Power consumption
3.00 kW max. (with option)
Sound power level
80 dB max. (with option)
Weight
Approx. 330 kg (main body + ADF)

+ 142 kg w/Paper feeder unit (PF-701)
+ 110 kg w/Large stacker (LS-501/LS-502)
+ 80 kg w/Finisher (FS-503)
+ 120 kg w/Folding unit (FD-501)
+ 263 kg w/Saddle Stitcher (SD-501)
+ 210 kg w/Perfect Binder (PB-501)
Size
895 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm

(main body excluding control panel)
2968 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
(main body + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503)
3272 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
(main body + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502)
4338 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
(main body + PF-701 + FD-501 + SD-501 + FS-503)
4575 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
(main body + PF-701 + FD-501 + SD-501 + PB-501)
Required space
200 mm or more from the back side; 100 mm or more from

both right and left sides
* Space required for the safe operation
22-4
22
22.1.2 ADF (DF-603)

Specifications
Function
Feed 1- and 2-sided originals automatically
Type of original
50 ~ 200 g/m
Original size
Original capacity
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, B6R, 11"x17", 8"x13", 8.5"x11"
2
100 sheets max. (80 g/m )
Original insertion
Automatic feed at a time
Dimensions
650 (W) x 570 (D) x 170 (H) mm

(paper feed tray excluded)
Weight
Approx. 22 kg
Power source
Supply from main body

22-5
22
22.2
Option Specifications
22.2.1 Paper Feeder Unit PF-701

Specifications
Function:
Paper feed into main body (3 trays)
Paper sizes
A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, F4, 12x18, 11"x17", 8.5"x14",

8.5"x11", and those wide sizes (max. 324 mm x 460 mm)
Types of paper
2
50 ~ 244 g/m paper (tray 3 and 5)
2
50 ~ 300 g/m paper (tray 4)
PPC, HQ, coated, labels, tracing paper available
Capacity
2
2,000 sheets (80 g/m ) for each tray
Dimensions
807 (W) x 675 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 142 kg
Power source
22.2.2 Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502

Specifications
Function
Stack printed paper
Paper sizes
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, F4, 12x18, 11"x17, 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, and those wide sizes
(max. 324 mm x 460 mm)
Type of paper
Tabbed standard size is output to secondary (sub) tray

2
Stacker: 50 ~ 244 g/m paper
2
Secondary (sub) tray: 50 ~ 300 g/m paper
Capacity
Stacker: 5,000 sheets (or 2,000 sheets for B5 and A5)

Secondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets
Dimensions
785 (W) x 656 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 110 kg
Power source
LS-501: Internal battery

LS-502: Supply from main body
22-6
22
22.2.3 In-Bin Stapler Finisher FS-503

Specifications
Type
Offset catch tray
Functions
Staple, Straight delivery, Shift delivery, Output to secondary

tray
Paper sizes
Staple:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K and those wide
sizes (max. 324 mm x 460 mm)
Straight/Shift delivery:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, 8K,
16K, 16KR, and those wide sizes (max. 324 mm x 460 mm),
Tab paper (STD size)
Paper type
Number of stapled sheet
* B6R is available in straight delivery only.

2
40 ~ 244 g/m paper
2
50 ~ 300 g/m paper (output to secondary tray)
2
100 sheets max. (80 g/m paper)
Tray capacity
Primary (main) tray: 3,000 sheets max.

Secondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets max.
Staple cartridge
5,000 staples
Dimensions
544 (W) x 656 (D) x 1020 (H) mm

Width including primary (main) tray:
781 mm/ 866 mm (pulled out)
Weight
Approx. 80 kg
Power source

22-7
22
22.2.4 Folding Unit FD-501
Specifications
Functions
Punch, Folding, Post inserting (PI), Straight delivery, Output to

secondary tray
Number of punch holes
2 or 4
Hole diameter
6.5 mm 0.5 mm (2 holes) / 8.0 mm 0.5 mm (4 holes)
Hole pitch
80 mm 0.5 mm (2 holes) / 108 mm 0.5 mm (4 holes)

2
50 to 209 g/m paper (Punch)
2
50 to 130 g/m paper (Folding, Letter Fold-in, Letter Foldout, Z-Fold)
2
50 to 91 g/m paper (Double Parallel, Gate)
2
50 to 300 g/m paper when output to secondary (sub) tray,
or conforms to the specifications of selected output device
(Straight delivery)
Types of paper
Output trays
Cover paper type

Paper sizes
Output trays available for the sheets finished through Folding

unit:
Primary (main) tray / Secondary (sub) tray of Finisher
FS-503 : For details, refer to In-Bin Stapler Finisher FS503 on page 22-7.
Secondary (sub) tray on the left side of Folding unit FD-501:
200 sheets max.
Straight delivery or Punch:
Any tray mentioned above is available for Straight delivery
or Punch.
Any tray mentioned above is available for Folding or Z-Fold.
Secondary (sub) tray on the left side of FD-501 is available
only for Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double Parallel, or
Gate.
2
PPC, HQ, coated, tracing (50 to 300 g/m paper)
Stack capacity using PI
4-hole punch:
A3, B4, A4, B5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x11", 8K, 16K
2-hole punch:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K
Folding:
A3, B4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8K
Post inserting:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17",
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16KR,
tabbed standard sizes, wide sizes (max. 324mm x 460mm)
Straight delivery:
conforms to the specifications of selected output device
2
500 sheets max. (80 g/m paper) for each tray
Dimensions
400 (W) x 656 (D) x 1190 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 120 kg
Power source
Internal battery
22-8
22
22.2.5 Saddle Stitcher SD-501

Specifications
Functions
Multi-folding (Multi Centre, Multi Letter), Fold&Staple, Trimming, Straight delivery
Processing capability
105 sheets per minute at maximum

2
50 to 244 g/m paper (Multi Centre, Fold&Staple, Trimming)
2
50 to 91 g/m paper (Multi Letter)
Types of paper
Paper sizes
Multi Centre, Fold&Staple, and Trimming; A3, B4, A4R,

B5R, F4, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R, 8K, 16KR,
Wide size paper (max. 324mm x 460mm)
Multi Letter; A4R, 8.5x11R
Staple position
Available to be changed (90 ~ 165 mm)
Number of sheets (1 set)
Multi Centre, Multi Letter;

2
5 sheets (50 to 81 g/m paper)
2
3 sheets (82 to 91 g/m paper)
Fold&Staple; see table on page 3-5.
2
Trimming; 50 sheets (80 g/m paper) x 2, or
2) + 1 sheet (200 g/m2)} x 2
{49 sheets (80 g/m
Stack capacity
30 sets max. (Multi Centre, Multi Letter)
Saddle stitcher tray capacity
See page 3-5.
Dimensions
1170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1020 (H) mm

1441(D) mm with Saddle stitcher tray fully withdrawn
Weight
Approx. 263 kg
Power source
Internal battery

22-9
22
22.2.6 Perfect Binder PB-501
Specifications
Functions
Hot-melt type binding, Trimming, Manual binding, Straight delivery to secondary (sub) tray
Processing capability:
105 sheets per minute at maximum
Number of sheets (1 set)
10 to 300 sheets, or within 30 mm thick
Paper sizes
Perfect binding tray;

Body A4, B5, A5, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5", 16K
Cover 330.2 mm x 472 mm max. (custom size)
For details of available sizes in Perfect Binding mode,
seepage 9-50.
Secondary (sub) tray;
100 mm x 139 mm min. to 331 mm x 488 mm max., tab paper (standard sizes)
2
2
Perfect binding tray; 64 to 91 g/m (body), 82 to 161 g/m
(cover)
2
Secondary (sub) tray; 40 to 300 g/m
Paper weight
Paper types
Stack capacity
Perfect binding tray;

Standard, Recycled, Fine (body)
Fine, Coated (cover)
Secondary (sub) tray;
Standard, Recycled, Fine, Coated, Special, OHP, Labels,
Tab paper
2
Cover feeding tray; 1,000 sheets (82 g/m ), 500 sheets (161
2
g/m )
Perfect binding tray; 30 mm thick (300-sheet-bound) booklet 11 sets x 2 (approx. 6,600 sheets)
For details, see page 3-5.
Warm-up time
Approx. 20 minutes
Dimensions
1303 (W) x 775 (D) x 1223 (H) mm
Weight
Approx. 210 kg
Power source
Internal battery
Power consumption
1,000W max.
22-10
23
Appendix
Appendix
23
Appendix
23.1
How to Input Characters
23
As touching the item where you can input characters, the character input
screen appears.
You can input alphanumerics and symbols. A character array is the same
with the computer keyboards.
23.1.1 About keys on the character input screen

Keys on the character input screen are described here.
*/)
This key moves a cursor.
[Delete]
This key deletes the character on the left of the cursor.
[OK]
This key determines the characters you input, and the character input screen
closes.
[Cancel]
This key cancels the characters you input, and the character input screen
closes.
[Shift]
This key switches between an upper case letter and a lower case letter, and
between numbers and signs.

23-3
Appendix
23
23.1.2 About character input
The followings describe basic steps to input characters on the character input screen.
Touch the corresponding key to input the desired character.
Touch [OK].
The character input screen closes. The input characters are displayed
on the corresponding column.
23-4
Appendix
23.2
23
Setting Data for Import/Export

[1] System
Main menus
Sub menus
Target items
Device Information
Device Information
Device Name Device Place Administrator Name
Online Assistance
Online Assistance
Contact Name
Contact Information
Product Help URL
Corporate URL
Supplies and Accessories
Online Help URL
E-Mail Alert
AlertMail
Notice of E-Mail
Notice of E-Mail Address
Item
Paper Empty
Paper Jam
Maintenance
Staple Empty
Toner Empty
Output Full
Service Call
Punch Waste Remove

23-5
Appendix
23
[2] Print
Main menus
Sub menus
Target items
Interface
Interface
Parallel Timeout
Network Timeout
Default Setting
General
PDL
Input Tray
Output Tray
Duplex
Binding
Staple
Punch
Center Staple/CenterFold/Trimming
Offset
Output Order
Page Order
Print Number
Collate
Paper Size
Orientation
Resolution
Spool setting
Banner Option
Banner Page Tray
Convert Paper Size
1 Page/Sheet
Booklet
Print Position
Default SettingPCL
Font Name
Symbol Set
Line/Page
Font Point Size
Font Pitch
CR/LF Mapping
Default SettingPS
Print To PS Error
Default SettingTIFF
Auto Paper Select

Image Position
23-6
Appendix
23
[3] Network
Main menus
Sub menus
Target items
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
TCP/IP
Speed
Auto IP
IP Adress
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Server
RAW Port Number1
RAW Port Number2
RAW Port Number3
RAW Port Number4
RAW Port Number5
RAW Port Number6
LPD
IP Address Filtering
Access Permission Address

Start address 1 - Ending address 1
Access Refusal Address
Netware
NetWare Print
Frame Type
Mode
Pserver
Print Server Name
Print Server Password
Print Queue Scan Rate
Bindery/NDS
Bindery
Preferred File Server
NDS
Preferred NDS Context
Preferred NDS Tree Name
Nprinter/Rprinter
Printer Name
Printer Number
NetWare

23-7
Appendix
23
Main menus
Sub menus
Target items
IPP
IPP
IPP Print
Printer Name
Printer Location
Printer Information
Printer URI
Operations Supported
Print Job
Accept Print Job
Validate Job
Cancel Job
Get Job Attribute
Get Jobs
Get Printer Attribute
FTP
Client
FTP Client
Proxy Server Port Number
Server Timeout
Port Number
Server
FTP Server
SNMP
SNMP
SNMP
SMB
Scan
SMB Scan
Print
SMB Print
NetBIOS Name
Print Service Name
Work Group
Apple Talk
Apple Talk
Apple Talk
Printer Name
Zone Name
E-Mail
Email-Receive
Receive
Receiving Server Address
User Name
Password
APOP Authentication
Connection Timeout
Port Number
Email-Send
Send
SMTP Server Capacity
Port Number
Connection Timeout
Max Mail Size
SMTP Server Capacity
Administrator Mail Address
Authentication
Off
POP Before SMTP
SMTP Authentication
User Name
Password
Realm
Binary Division
Division Size
23-8
Appendix
23
Main menus
Sub menus
Target items
SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS Information
Encryption Strength
Validity Period
Organization
Organization Unit
Locality
State/Province
Country
Authentication
Auto Logout
Admin Logout Time

User Logout Time
AP I/F
AP I/F
Port Number
Use SSL/TLS
Port Number(SSL/TLS)

23-9
Appendix
23
23.3
Configuration Setting
Print Sample
23-10
Appendix
23
Print Sample

23-11
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-12
Appendix

23
23-13
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-14
Appendix
23.4
23
Font List
Print Sample

23-15
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-16
Appendix
23
Print Sample

23-17
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-18
Appendix
23
Print Sample

23-19
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-20
Appendix
23
Print Sample

23-21
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-22
Appendix
23
Print Sample

23-23
Appendix
23
Print Sample
23-24
Appendix
23
Print Sample

23-25
Appendix
23
23.5
PCL Font List

Font#
Font
Pitch/Point
000
Courier
scalable
001
CG Times
scalable
002
CG Times Bold
scalable
003
CG Times Italic
scalable
004
CG Times Bold Italic
scalable
005
CG Omega
scalable
006
CG Omega Bold
scalable
007
CG Omega Italic
scalable
008
CG Omega Bold Italic
scalable
009
Coronet
scalable
010
Clarendon Condensed
scalable
011
Univers Medium
scalable
012
Univers Bold
scalable
013
Univers Medium Italic
scalable
014
Univers Bold Italic
scalable
015
Univers Medium Condensed
scalable
016
Univers Bold Condensed
scalable
017
Univers Medium Condensed Italic
scalable
018
Univers Bold Condensed Italic
scalable
019
Antique Olive
scalable
020
Antique Olive Bold
scalable
021
Antique Olive Italic
scalable
022
Garamond Antique
scalable
023
Garamond Halbfett
scalable
024
Garamond Kursiv
scalable
025
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
scalable
026
Marigold
scalable
027
Albertus Medium
scalable
028
Albertus Extra Bold
scalable
029
Arial
scalable
030
Arial Bold
scalable
031
Arial Italic
scalable
032
Arial Bold Italic
scalable
23-26
Appendix
23
Font#
Font
Pitch/Point
033
Times New
scalable
034
Times New Bold
scalable
035
Times New Italic
scalable
036
Times New Bold Italic
scalable
037
Helvetica
scalable
038
Helvetica Bold
scalable
039
Helvetica Olique
scalable
040
Helvetica Bold Oblique
scalable
041
Helvetica Narrow
scalable
042
Helvetica Narrow Bold
scalable
043
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
scalable
044
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
scalable
045
Palatino Roman
scalable
046
Palatino Bold
scalable
047
Palatino Italic
scalable
048
Palatino Bold Italic
scalable
049
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
scalable
050
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
scalable
051
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
scalable
052
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
scalable
053
ITC Bookman Light
scalable
054
ITC Bookman Demi
scalable
055
ITC Bookman Light Italic
scalable
056
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
scalable
057
New Century Schoolbook Roman
scalable
058
New Century Schoolbook Bold
scalable
059
New Century Schoolbook Italic
scalable
060
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
scalable
061
Times Roman
scalable
062
Times Bold
scalable
063
Times Italic
scalable
064
Times Bold Italic
scalable
065
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
scalable
066
ITC Zapf Dingbats
scalable
067
Symbol
scalable

23-27
Appendix
23
Font#
Font
Pitch/Point
068
Symbol
scalable
069
Wingdings
scalable
070
Courier Bold
scalable
071
Courier Italic
scalable
072
Courier Bold Italic
scalable
073
Letter Gothic
scalable
074
Letter Gothic Bold
scalable
075
Letter Gothic Italic
scalable
076
CourierPS
scalable
077
CourierPS Bold
scalable
078
CourierPS Oblique
scalable
079
CourierPS Bold Oblique
scalable
080
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
081
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
082
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
083
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
084
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
085
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
086
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
087
Line Printer
16.67/8.5
23-28
Appendix
23.6
23
Glossary
Term
Description
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/
1000BASE-TX
Types of specifications in compliance with the Ethernet

standard.
Cables made of two stranded copper wire rods are used.
Communication speed is 10Mbps with 10Base-T, 100Mbps
with 100Base-TX, and 1000Mbps with 1000Base-TX.
APOP
Abbreviation of Authenticated Post Office Protocol. An authentication method of improved safety by encrypting the
password; ordinary POP uses an unencrypted password
which is used to receive E-mails.
Client
A computer which uses services provided by servers through

the network.
DHCP
Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

A protocol for a client machine on the TCP/IP network to automatically read the setting for the network from a server.
Only by controlling the IP addresses for the DHCP clients collectively with the DHCP server, a network can be easily constructed avoiding duplicate addresses.
DNS
Abbreviation of Domain Name System.

A system to allow to acquire an appropriate IP address from
the host name in the network environment. Users can specify
the name of the host instead of the IP address which is difficult to memorize and distinguish and access the other personal computer on the network.
FTP
Abbreviation of File Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to

transfer files on the TCP/IP network such as Internet, Intranet, etc.
Gateway
Hardware or software serving as a point connecting networks. Not only connecting, it converts the format, address,
protocol, etc. of the data according to the network to be connected.
Hard disk
Mass storage device to save data.

The data is maintained even if the power is turned OFF.
HTTP
Abbreviation of HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol

used to transmit or receive data between a web server and
client (web browser, etc.). Files of image, voice, animation,
etc. correlated with the document can be exchanged including the expression form and other information.
IP address
A code (address) to identify individual network devices on the

Internet. Comprises 4 sets of figures of 3 digits at the maximum such as 192.168.1.10. An IP address is allocated to all
computers and other devices connected to the Internet.
IPP
Abbreviation of Internet Printing Protocol. A protocol to control the transmission and reception of printing data or printing
devices through the Internet or other TCP/IP networks. Data
can be transmitted to a remote printer through the Internet
and printed there.
LAN
Abbreviation of Local Area Network. A network connecting

computers on the same floor, in the same building, in the
buildings nearby, etc.

23-29
Appendix
23
Term
Description
LPR/LPD
Abbreviation of Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon.

A type of printing through a network of the WindowsNT system or UNIX system. Printing data from Windows or UNIX
can be transmitted to a printer on a network using TCP/IP.
Memory
Unit to save data temporarily.

Data in some memory is erased when the power is turned
OFF and not erased in others.
NDS
Abbreviation of Novell Directory Service.

Shared resources such as servers, printers, user information,
etc. on the network or information such access authority of
each user to those resources can be centrally controlled in a
hierarchical structure.
NetWare
Network OS developed by Novel.

Uses NetWare IPX/SPX as the communication protocol.
OS
Abbreviation of Operating System. Basic software to control

the computer system. Windows, MacOS, and Unix are examples.
PDF
Abbreviation of Portable Document Format. One of electronic documents (extension; .pdf) in the format based on PostScript which can be accessed using Adobe Acrobat Reader,
software free of charge.
ping
Abbreviation of Packed INternet Groper. A command used to

confirm the communication situation with a distant device
under the TCP/IP network environment.
POP
Abbreviation of Post Office Protocol. A protocol to receive

electronic mails from a mail server. Currently, POP3, version
3 of POP, is mainly used.
Port number
Number to distinguish each communication port of multiple

processes working in the computers on the network. A same
port cannot be used for multiple processes.
PostScript
Representative page description language generally used for

printing requiring specifically high quality, developed by US
Adobe.
Printer driver
Software acting as an intermediate between the computer

and printer.
Proxy Server
A server provided to act as the connecting point with the outside instead of each client in the connection with Internet and
to secure the security of the whole system efficiently.
Pserver
Print server module under the Netware environment.

Monitors, alters, pauses, resumes or stops the print job.
Resolution
Degree how correctly the details of images or prints can be

reproduced.
SMB
Abbreviation of Server Message Block. A protocol used

mainly to realize sharing of files or printers through the network between Windows.
SMTP
Abbreviation of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol to

transmit or transfer the electronic mails.
SNMP
Abbreviation of Simple Network Management Protocol. A

control protocol using TCP/IP in the network environment.
23-30
Appendix
23
Term
Description
SSL/TLS
Abbreviation of Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security.

An encryption system to transmit data in safe between an
Web server and browser.
TCP/IP
Abbreviation of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.

Substantially the standard protocol used for the Internet.
Uses IP address to identify each network device.
TIFF
Abbreviation of Tagged Image File Format.

One of the file formats to save image data (extension; .tif).
Various types of image information can be saved in one image data with the tag representing the data type.
Web browser
Software to access web pages. Internet Explorer, Netscape

Navigator, etc. are examples.

23-31
Appendix
23
23.7
Index
Numerics
AMS ........................................6-49
1.000 magnification mode ..... 6-32
Annotation ..............................8-81
1-2 .......................................... 6-37
AP I/F ..................................17-117
1SHOT indication time ........... 16-8
AppleTalk ...........................17-100
2 in 1 ...................................... 8-20
Application key .................5-4, 8-8
2 Repeat ................................ 8-50
APS ........................................6-47
2-1 .......................................... 6-44
ATS permit ...........................16-19
2-2 .......................................... 6-37
ATS/APS switch ...................16-18
4 in 1 ...................................... 8-20
Audit log report ....................17-24
4 Repeat ................................ 8-50
Authentication method .........17-53
8 in 1 ...................................... 8-20
Authentication setting ..........17-53
8 Repeat ................................ 8-50
Auto Image Shift (Tab Print) .16-24
Auto low power ............2-27, 17-6

Auto paper select ...................6-47
Access key ............................... 2-6
Auto paper select key ..............5-4
Accessibility key .......... 2-7, 10-22
Auto paper type ....................16-21
Account track data

setting file ............................ 18-30
AUTO RESET key setting .....16-43
Add section settings ............ 17-59

Add user settings ................. 17-65
Adding account track ............ 18-6
Auto reset setting .................16-10

Auto select of booklet copy .16-46
Auto shut-off ................2-27, 17-6
Adding toner .......................... 4-14
Auto start mode

(Single Feed) ...........................6-19
ADF (Automatic Document

Feeder) ..................................... 2-3
Auto zoom key .........................5-4

Automatic exposure (AE) ........6-26
ADF AMS ............................. 16-46

ADF APS .............................. 16-46
ADF frame erasure setting ... 17-31
Back cover .............................8-13
ADF restart timing

adjustment ........................... 13-20
Background whiteness ...........6-26
Adhesive binding ................... 8-23
Binding ...................................14-4
Adjusting response time

of touch keys ....................... 10-22
Binding direction for

duplex copies .........................9-13
Adjustment key ........................ 5-5
Binding direction of originals ..6-12
AES key ......................... 5-3, 6-27
Binding margin .......................8-66
Air assist .............................. 12-19
Blank insert ............................12-5
Alert mail ............................ 17-110
Block set ..............................17-14
Basic setting ...............14-4, 14-12
All-image area ........................ 8-60

23-32
Appendix
Book copy ..............................8-33
Book/News ............................12-5
Booklet ...................................8-23
Bookmark key .......................... 8-9
Both sides adj. ...........12-4, 12-16
Box Edit ............................... 18-32
Brightness adjustment dial ...... 2-7
Browser ..................................18-1
Browser control setting ..........18-3
Administrator mode ........ 18-44
Administrator mode
screen ............................. 18-40
Administrator password . 18-44
Alert mail ........................ 18-51
AP I/F .............................. 18-93
Apple Talk ...................... 18-74
Authentication ................ 18-92
Auto logout ..................... 18-92
Body registration ............ 18-61
Default settings .............. 18-54
Device information ......... 18-45
E-mail ............................. 18-75
E-mail receive (POP)
configuration .................. 18-75
E-mail send (SMTP)
configuration .................. 18-76
Encryption strength ........ 18-87
FTP ................................. 18-69
FTP client ....................... 18-69
FTP server ...................... 18-70
General settings ............. 18-54
Import/Export ................. 18-48
Interface ......................... 18-52
IP filtering ....................... 18-64
IPP .................................. 18-68
Logging administrator
mode .............................. 18-42
Maintenance ................... 18-49
NetWare ......................... 18-66
NetWare status ............... 18-67
Network setting clear ..... 18-49
Network tab .................... 18-64
Online assistance ........... 18-46
PageScope

23
Web Connection ............ 18-37
PCL settings .................. 18-55
Port settings ................... 18-53
Print ............................... 18-73
Print tab ......................... 18-52
PS settings (option) ........ 18-56
Reset .............................. 18-50
ROM version .................. 18-46
Scan tab ......................... 18-58
SMB ............................... 18-72
SMB scan ...................... 18-72
SNMP ............................. 18-71
SSL/TLS ......................... 18-77
Subject registration ........ 18-58
System requirements ..... 18-37
System tab ..................... 18-44
TCP/IP ........................... 18-64
TIFF settings .................. 18-57
User mode screen ......... 18-40
Web browser settings .... 18-37
Buzzer for job stop setting .... 16-6
Buzzer ON/OFF,
volume setting ....................... 16-4
Buzzer setting ........................ 16-4
Buzzer volume ....................... 16-4
C
[C] (Clear quantity) key ............ 2-6
Call for service screen ........... 20-3
Cartridge indicator ................. 4-17
CAUTION ................................. 1-3
Caution labels and indicators 1-13
Centre staple/
Centre fold/ Trimming ........... 14-4
Centring adjustment ............ 13-22
Change ................................ 12-29
Change HDD lock
password ........................... 17-150
Change magnification ratio ... 6-33
Change overlay memory ..... 17-26
Change preset zoom ........... 17-26
Change section settings ...... 17-59
23-33
Appendix
23
Change send address .......... 17-26
Copy screen .............................5-3
Change user password ........ 16-12
Copy setting .........................16-41
Change user settings ........... 17-64
COPY tab .........................5-3, 5-5
Change/delete e-mail
destination address ........... 17-156
Copy/Printer setting ...........17-128
Change/delete the FTP

Change/delete the HDD
Change/delete the SMB
Chapter .................................. 8-17
Check mode .......................... 10-5
Check/Control reserved jobs ... 7-4
Checking copy count ............. 21-6
Count/Set indicator ..................5-5

CSRC .................................17-112
CSRC communications
test .....................................17-116
CSRC receive setting .........17-115
CSRC send setting .............17-114
Custom size .........................12-22
Custom size (original) .............6-21
Custom size
(Paper Presetting) ...................6-55
Cleaning image scanning

section ................................... 21-3
Darker key ..............................6-27
Clearing mishandled paper .... 20-5
Data LED ..................................2-7
Coated A ................................ 12-4
Date/Time ...............................8-69
Coated B ................................ 12-5
Default address setting ........16-49
Collated mode ... 9-15, 9-16, 9-25
Default resolution setting .....16-51
Collated/Uncollated output to the

secondary (sub) tray .............. 9-22
Default screen setting ............16-9
Coloured
paper .............. 12-4, 12-14, 16-22
Delete section settings .........17-60
Combination .......................... 8-20

Configuration page print ........ 14-3
Continuation print (copy) ... 17-138
Continuation print (print) .... 17-129
Control panel ........................... 2-3
Control panel layout ................. 2-6
Controller ............................... 14-3
Controller key ........................... 5-5
Conveyance fixing unit ............ 2-5
Delete group .......................17-161

Delete user settings ..............17-65
Density adjustment key ............5-3
Density level .........................17-33
Density level sample ............16-28
Density setting ......................16-26
Density shift for
enhance mode .....................16-25
Diff. time setting .....................17-9
Double parallel mode .............9-32
Copy card ............................ 16-44
Double parallel position

adjustment ...........................13-44
Copy mode ............................ 6-37
Drum unit ..................................2-5
Copy mode area ...................... 5-4
Duplex ....................................14-4
Copy reserve operation ..... 17-135
23-34
Appendix
23
E
Fixing prerotation set ......... 17-131
Each function
setting ..........16-23, 16-46, 16-51
Fixing unit ................................ 2-5
Each reset setting ................ 16-43
Folder box list/delete ......... 17-144
Editing account track data .....18-9
Folding copies ....................... 9-32
E-mail ................................. 17-102
Folding mode ........................ 9-32
E-mail data ...........................18-24
Folding position adjustment 13-36
E-mail data setting file ......... 18-30
Folding Unit FD-501 ................ 2-8
E-mail error notification ...... 17-110
Font pattern list ................... 17-23
E-mail receive setting ......... 17-106
Frame/Fold erase .................. 8-54
E-mail send setting ............ 17-105
Front cover ............................ 8-13
Embossed ..............................12-5
Front door ................................ 2-4
Empty trash basket ................4-25
FTP .......................... 17-94, 18-24
ENERGY STAR program ........ x-13
FTP data setting file ............. 18-31
Enlarge/Reduce .....................6-35
Full auto ............................... 16-39
Erase mode .......................... 17-33
Function invalid ................... 17-19
Erase outside of original ...... 17-29
Function key .................... 5-4, 6-8
Except orig. glass (1:1) ......... 17-29
Function key setting ............ 16-14
Exit .........................................15-4
Function setting ................... 16-18
Expert adjustment ................ 17-29
Function valid ...................... 17-19
Exposure (density) .................6-26

External machine items ............ 2-3
Fold & Staple mode ............... 9-34
G
Gate mode ............................. 9-32
Gate position adjustment .... 13-50
Features of the bizhub

PRO 1050/1050e ..................... 5-7
Gateway address ................ 17-69
Feed tray ................................14-4
Feed tray auto selection ...... 16-17
HDD ................................... 17-108
Feed tray setting .................. 16-17
HDD (box no.) ...................... 18-24
File form ............................... 16-51
HDD data auto delete

period setting .................... 17-148
File form setting (e-mail) ...... 16-51

File form setting (FTP) .......... 16-51
File form setting (HDD) ......... 16-51
File form setting (SMB) ........ 16-51
Fine ........................................12-5
Finisher adjustment .............. 13-24
Finisher FS-503 ......................2-19
Finisher mode for full auto ... 16-43
HDD data setting file ........... 18-31

HDD lock password .......... 17-150
HDD management setting . 17-144
Help key ................................... 2-7
Help mode ........................... 10-19
Help screen ......................... 10-20
Hole-punch .... 12-4, 12-15, 16-22
23-35
Appendix
23
Hole-punch vertical
position adjustment ............. 13-33
How to make a basic copy .... 5-12
K
Key counter ..........................16-44
Key response time ...............16-11
Keypad .....................................2-6
Icon area .................................. 5-6
Image auto rotation ............ 17-133

Image centring ....................... 8-58
Language setting ....................16-3
Image density selection ....... 16-31
Large Capacity Stacker

LS-501/LS-502 .......................2-11
Image insert ........................... 8-29
Laser safety ............................1-10
Image shift ................. 8-61, 16-24
Left side door ...........................2-4
Image shift in decimal point . 16-24
Letter fold-in mode .................9-32
Incomplete job ......................... 7-8
Letter fold-in position

adjustment ...........................13-38
Inconformity in paper
presetting ............................. 20-11
Initial by key counter insert .. 16-44
Letter fold-out mode ..............9-32
Initial setting ......................... 16-39
Letter fold-out position

adjustment ...........................13-41
Input size ............................. 12-23
Lighter key ..............................6-27
Inserting a new
staple cartridge ...................... 4-17
Limited use of the

copier in trouble .....................20-4
Insertion sheets ..................... 8-14
Line speed setting ................17-69
Installation space ................... 1-15
Loading paper ..........................4-3
Interface setting ................... 14-20
Loading tabbed sheets ..........4-11
Internal machine items ............. 2-5

Interrupt copying ................... 10-9
Loading/Sorting large numbers

of sheets (LS-501/LS-502) .....9-25
Interrupt key ............................. 2-6
Lock/delete mode memory ..17-26
Interrupt mode ....................... 10-9
Low contrast ........................16-25
Interruption suspend .......... 17-134
Low contrast mode ................6-30
IP address ............................ 17-69
Lunch hour off setting ..........17-18
IP address (Server PC) ......... 17-69
IP address (Tandem) ............ 17-69

IPP ....................................... 17-91
Machine adjustment ...............13-3

Machine adjustment outlines .13-3
Machine configuration ..............2-3
Jam position screen .............. 20-5
Machine manager
password ..................17-3, 17-143
Job list ..................................... 5-5

Job list screen .......................... 7-3
JOB LIST tab ................... 5-5, 7-3
Machine manager register ...17-49

Machine manager setting .......17-3
JOB offset operating .......... 17-128

23-36
Appendix
Machine manager
setting menu ..........................17-4
Machine NIC setting ............ 17-69
Machine status display ............ 5-6
Machine status icons ............... 5-4
Machine status screen ............. 5-5
MACHINE tab ........................... 5-5
Magnification adjustment .......13-3
Main body specifications .......22-3
Main power switch ................... 2-5
Maintenance ...................... 17-141
Maintenance & supply
indicator ................................... 5-6
Making double-sided copies
using ADF ...............................6-37
Making double-sided copies
using original glass ................6-40
Making single-sided copies from
double-sided originals ...........6-44
Management list print .......... 17-22
Manager/Machine register ... 17-50
Manual zoom .........................6-34
Memory full message ........... 20-13
Memory overflow ................. 20-13
Memory scan key ..................... 5-4
Memory scan mode ...............6-24
Message area ...................5-4, 5-6
Mixed original .........................6-14
Mode check key ....................... 2-7
Mode memory ...................... 10-11
Mode memory key ................... 2-7
Mode memory list ................ 17-22
Multi Centre mode .................9-38
Multi folder (fold)
adjustment ...........................13-36
23
N
Name ................................... 12-13
Needless tab paper exit ...... 16-24
Neg. pos. reverse .................. 8-45
NetWare ............................... 17-87
Network printer .................... 17-87
Network setting ................... 17-69
Network setting clear ........ 17-121
No Image Area Erase ............. 8-42
No image area erase ............. 8-42
No. ......................................... 14-4
Non image area erase
setting .................................. 17-33
Non register/Output set ....... 17-67
Non-sort mode ............ 9-15, 9-25
Normal ................................... 12-5
Number of tabs .................... 12-26
O
Offset ..................................... 14-4
OHP ....................................... 12-6
OHP interleave ...................... 8-26
On - APS/AMS only ............. 17-29
Operation prohibit set .......... 17-26
Option specifications ............. 22-6
Orig. glass small size ........... 17-35
Orig./Out bind direction set . 16-46
Original binding direction .... 16-46
Original direction ................... 6-10
Original glass AMS .............. 16-46
Original glass APS ............... 16-46
Original glass SDF ............. 17-139
Original information ............... 3-10
Original scan area setting .... 17-29
Multi folder (punch)

adjustment ...........................13-31
Original setting ...................... 6-10
Multi Letter mode ...................9-38
Original size search ............. 17-35
Multi-feed detection ...............9-46
Output application key ............ 5-4

Original setting key .................. 5-3
23-37
Appendix
23
Output history .......................... 7-6
Password input timing .........17-51
Output indicator ....................... 5-4
Paste pallets .....................1-8, 1-9
Output order .......................... 14-4
PCL setting .... 14-5, 14-10, 14-13
Output to the primary (main)

tray ......................................... 9-15
PDL .........................................14-4
Output to the secondary (sub)

tray (finisher) .......................... 9-16
Output to the secondary (sub)
tray (LS-501/502) ................... 9-25
Output to the stacker ............. 9-25
Output tray ............................. 14-4
Output tray key ........................ 9-9
Overlay ................................... 8-86

.......................... 1-9, 2-16, 22-10
Perfect Binding Setting ........17-43
Photo ....................................16-25
Photo mode ............................6-30
Photo mode density setting .16-29
Please call service message ..20-3
PM icon ..................................21-9
Overlay memory ..................... 8-89
Positioning original on
original glass ..........................5-19
Positioning originals ...............5-16
Page no. position (booklet) 17-130

Page numbering .................... 8-69
Page order ............................. 14-4
Page space function .............. 8-64
Positioning originals in ADF ...5-16

Post Inserter ...........................9-42
Power LED ...............................2-7
Power OFF/ON screen .........20-14
Power save key ........................2-7
PageScope Web
Connection ........................ 17-119
Power save LED .............2-7, 2-26
Paper indicator ........................ 4-3
Power save setting .................17-6
Paper information .................... 3-3
Present time ...........................17-9
Paper length adjustment ...... 13-55
Preset density ........................6-28
Paper misfeed ........................ 20-8
Preset zoom ...............6-35, 16-33
Paper presetting .................... 6-53
Preventive maintenance
(PM) ........................................21-9
Paper presetting key ................ 5-4

Paper removal button .. 2-11, 4-31
Paper set .............................. 12-11
Paper set key ........................... 5-6
Paper setting .......................... 12-3
Paper size .......... 3-8, 12-3, 12-19
Paper tray setting .................. 6-46
Paper type ................. 12-4, 16-21
Primary (main) tray .................2-19

Print number ...........................14-4
Printer centring adjustment ..13-22
Printer drum clock adjustment
<SIDE1> .................................13-4
Printer drum clock adjustment
<SIDE2> .................................13-7
Paper weight ............................ 3-3
Printer horizontal adjustment

<SIDE1> .................................13-9
Paper width
adjustment ............... 13-27, 13-53
Printer horizontal adjustment

<SIDE2> ...............................13-11
Passive function ................... 17-94
Printer prohibit timer ............16-24
23-38
Appendix
23
Printer restart timing adjustment

<SIDE1> ............................... 13-13
Resolution ............................ 16-51
Printer restart timing adjustment

<SIDE2> ............................... 13-16
Rotation ................................. 6-51
Printer setting .........................14-6
Return .................................... 15-4

Rotation off key ............. 5-4, 6-52
Program job ...........................8-39
Proof copy key ......................... 2-6
Saddle Stitcher Adjustment . 13-57
Proof copying .........................10-3
Saddle Stitcher SD-501 2-13, 22-9
Proxy server ......................... 17-94
Saddle stitcher tray ............... 2-14
PS setting .......14-6, 14-10, 14-14
Safety information ................... 1-3
PSWC ................................. 17-119
Scan stop (pull out tray) .... 17-137
Punch .....................................14-4
Scan to HDD/Scan to FTP .. 17-94
Punch dust indicator ..............4-25
Scan to SMB ....................... 17-98
Punch key ................................ 5-4
Scanner address register .. 17-156
Punch mode ...........................9-28
Scanner function (e-mail) .... 17-26
R
Recalling previous
job settings .......................... 10-17
Recalling stored
job settings .......................... 10-15
Reduce&Shift .........................8-66
Register ................................ 12-34
Register type/weight ............ 12-11
Regulation notices .................1-10
Removing finished sets
from stacker ...........................4-31
Scanner function (FTP) ........ 17-26

Scanner function (HDD) ....... 17-26
Scanner function (SMB) ...... 17-26
Scanner message .................... 5-6
Scanner restart
timing adjustment ................ 13-18
Scanner setting ................... 16-50
SDF auto setting ................ 17-140
Secondary (sub) tray ............. 2-19
Section authentication ......... 17-51
Section distribute number ... 17-51
Repeat
Auto/ Repeat mode ..........8-50
Vert./Horiz. mode .............8-47
Section management setting 17-54
Report code ...........................20-3
Security strengthen mode . 17-153
Report type ............................14-8
Select printer setting ........... 14-17
Reserve job setting ................6-64
Select tray when APS cancel 16-46
Reset all count .........17-60, 17-66
Selecting an output tray .......... 9-8
Reset function setting .......... 16-42
Send address edit/delete .. 17-154
Reset key ................................. 2-6
Send history ............................ 7-7
Reset section count ............. 17-60
Sentence setting ................ 17-106
Reset setting ........................ 16-39
Set density ........................... 16-28
Reset user count .................. 17-66
Set number indicator ............... 5-4

Section name input ............. 17-51

Security setting .................. 17-143
23-39
Appendix
23
Set numbering (Watermark) ... 8-78
Stapling centre position

adjustment ...........................13-25
Set password for

timer interrupt ...................... 17-20
Stapling output to the primary

(main) tray ...............................9-19
Setting Account Track Data ... 18-5
Start key ...................................2-6
Setting job during warm-up ... 5-22
Start LED ..................................2-6
Setting print quantity ............. 5-20
Start/Stop button ...................9-49
Setting Scan Transmission

Function ............................... 18-18
Status hold when

auto reset .............................16-46
Sheet insertion ....................... 8-10
Stop key ...................................2-6
Single feed ............................. 6-18
Stop scanning/printing ...........5-25
Size setting .......................... 17-35
Stop Setting for P. B. Cover

Unfit Length ..........................17-47
Set numbering ....................... 8-69
SMB ......................... 17-98, 18-24

SMB data setting file ........... 18-31
SMB printing ........................ 17-98
Store image in HDD

(Overlay Memory) ...................8-89
SNMP ................................... 17-96
Storing and recalling

job conditions .......................10-11
SNMP Trap ........................ 17-123
Storing job conditions ..........10-11
Sorting/Stapling copies ......... 9-15
Sub power switch ............2-3, 2-6
Special image ........................ 6-26
Subnet mask ........................17-69
Special image key .................... 5-3
Summer time ..........................17-9
Special Image/Density
Setting .................................. 16-51
Suspended job .........................7-9
Spool .................................... 14-19

Spool job ................................ 7-11
Stacker ................................... 2-11
Stacker adjustment .............. 13-54
System connection ............17-141

System setting .............16-3, 17-6
System setting
(Machine Manager) .................17-6
Stamp .................................... 8-69
Standard size ....................... 12-21
Tab paper .............................12-25
Standard size (original) .......... 6-21
Tab paper (original) ................6-21
Standard size
(Paper Presetting) .................. 6-55
Tab paper (Paper Presetting) .6-58

Tandem mode ........................9-67
Standard/optional equipment 2-20
Tandem Setting ....................16-34
Staple ..................................... 14-4
TCP/IP ..................................17-83
Staple key ................................ 5-4
Text ......................................16-25
Staple mode .......................... 9-15
Text & Photo mode ................6-30
Stapler position adjustment . 13-25
Text mode ..............................6-30
Stapling auto reset ............... 16-46
Text/Photo ............................16-25
Text/Photo enhance ...............6-30
23-40
Appendix
23
TIFF setting ....14-6, 14-10, 14-15
Useful Paper Weight Select . 17-43
Time and date setting ............17-8
User ....................................... 12-5
Timer action on/off setting ... 17-16
User auth./Volume track ...... 17-53
Timer interrupt ........................2-30
User authentication ... 2-33, 17-51
Timer interrupt password .......2-31
User authentication set ....... 17-61
Timer setting ........................ 17-13
User call ............................. 17-141
Timing adjustment ............... 13-13
User density 1 ..................... 16-28
Title setting .........................17-106
User density 2 ..................... 16-28
To store copy paper ................. 3-9
User density setting ............. 16-28
Toner message ........................ 5-6
User management list ......... 17-22
Toner unit door ........................ 2-4
User Paper Selection ........... 16-38
Total counter ............................ 2-5
User/Section auth. connect . 17-51
Touch panel .....................2-3, 2-7
Using folder/finisher functions

manually ................................ 9-46
Touch screen adjustment .... 16-53
Using power save manually .. 2-28
Transmitting Machine Setting

File ........................................ 18-24
Utility menu screen ................ 21-6
Trash basket ............................ 2-9
Utility screen .......................... 15-3
Tray 1 ....................................... 2-4
Utility/Counter key ................... 2-7
Tray 2 ....................................... 2-4

Tray 3 ....................................... 2-3
Tray 4 ....................................... 2-3
V
Volume track ....................... 17-56
Tray 5 ....................................... 2-3
Tray empty .............................20-9
Wake-up screen .................... 2-23
Tray key .................................... 5-4

Tray priority .......................... 16-18
Warning and precaution

symbols ................................... 1-3
Tray setting .......................... 12-20
Watermark ............................. 8-78
Tray setting list ......................... 5-5
Watermark numbering ........... 8-78
Tray/ Exit tray capacity ............ 3-5
Weekly timer .......................... 2-30
Trimming mode ......................9-34
Weekly timer on/off setting . 17-11
Troubleshooting tips ............ 20-15
Weekly timer setting ............ 17-10
Turn off the power ..................2-25
Weight ........... 12-6, 12-14, 16-22
Turn on the power ..................2-23
Wide size paper ................... 12-23
Type ..................................... 12-13
Wide size paper

(Paper Presetting) .................. 6-56
U
Uncollated mode 9-15, 9-16, 9-25
Unsuitable ADF originals ........3-10
Use management list ........... 17-23
23-41
Appendix
23
Z
Z-fold mode ........................... 9-32
Z-fold position adjustment ... 13-47
Z-folded original ..................... 6-16
Zoom ...................................... 6-32
Zoom key ................................. 5-3
23-42

Bizhub Pro 1050e

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Bizhub Pro 1050e

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1050/1050e

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning and Precaution Symbols .................................................. 1-3

Meaning of Symbols ...................................................................... 1-3

Safety Information ............................................................................ 1-3

Regulation Notices ......................................................................... 1-10

Laser Safety ................................................................................. 1-10

Ozone Release ............................................................................. 1-12

Electromagnetic Interference ....................................................... 1-12

For European Users ..................................................................... 1-12

For German Users ........................................................................ 1-12

Caution Labels and Indicators ...................................................... 1-13

Installation Space ........................................................................... 1-15

Preparation for Use

Machine Configuration ..................................................................... 2-3

External Machine Items .................................................................. 2-3

Internal Machine Items ................................................................... 2-5

Control Panel Layout ..................................................................... 2-6

Folding Unit FD-501 ....................................................................... 2-8

Large Capacity Stacker LS-501/LS-502 ...................................... 2-11

Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ............................................................... 2-13

Perfect Binder PB-501 ................................................................. 2-16

Finisher FS-503 ............................................................................ 2-19

Standard/Optional Equipment ..................................................... 2-20

Turning On/Off the Power Switch ................................................. 2-23

To Turn On the Power .................................................................. 2-23

To Turn Off the Power .................................................................. 2-25

bizhub PRO 1050/1050e

Auto Low Power ...........................................................................2-27

Auto Shut-Off ................................................................................2-27

Using Power Save Manually .........................................................2-28

When Weekly Timer Is Activated ..................................................2-30

Making User Authentication ...........................................................2-33

Paper and Original Information

Paper Information ..............................................................................3-3

Paper Weight ..................................................................................3-3

Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity ..................................................................3-5

Paper Size .......................................................................................3-8

To Store Copy Paper ......................................................................3-9

To Use Machine When Power Save LED Lights ...........................2-26

Original Information ........................................................................3-10

Using Original Glass .....................................................................3-10

ADF Originals ................................................................................3-12

Supplies & Handling

Loading Paper ....................................................................................4-3

Loading Cover Paper in Cover Feeding Tray of

Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray ....................................................4-11

Adding Toner ...................................................................................4-14

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into Finisher FS-503 ................4-17

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ..4-20

Adding Paste Pellets to Perfect Binder PB-501 ............................4-22

Empty Trash Basket of Folding Unit FD-501 .................................4-25

Empty Dust Box of Saddle Stitcher SD-501 ..................................4-27

Empty Dust Box of Perfect Binder PB-501 ....................................4-29

Removing Finished Sets from Large Capacity Stacker

bizhub PRO 1050/1050e

Before Making Copies

Machine Status Screen .................................................................. 5-5

Features of the bizhub PRO 1050/1050e ........................................ 5-7

How to Make a Basic Copy ............................................................ 5-12

Positioning Originals ...................................................................... 5-16

Positioning Originals in ADF ......................................................... 5-16

Positioning Original on Original Glass .......................................... 5-19

Copy Screen ...................................................................................... 5-3